11/2007

Copyright R&S UP300/350

© Copyright 2007

ROHDE & SCHWARZ GmbH & Co. KG

Test and Measurement Division
Mühldorfstraße 15
81671 München, Germany

4th edition 11/2007

Printed in Germany.
Printed on FFC bleached paper.

Subject to alterations. Errors excepted.

Reprints, also in extracts, are only allowed with written permission of the manufacturer.
All rights reserved.

E-1147.2759.00 1-2 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Chapter Overview

Chapter Overview

General Content of the Manuals for the Audio Analyzer R&S UP300/350
Data Sheet
Safety Instructions
Certificate of Quality
EC Certificate of Conformity
Support Center Addresses
List of Rohde & Schwarz Offices

Chapter 1 Introduction

Chapter 2 Control Elements

Chapter 3 Putting the R&S UP300/350 into Operation

Chapter 4 Getting Started – Measurement Example

Chapter 5 Manual Operating Concept

Chapter 6 Working with the R&S UP300/350

Chapter 7 Instrument Interfaces

Chapter 8 Error Messages

Chapter 9 Index

Operating Manual, 11/2007 1-3 E-1147.2759.00

Content of the Manuals R&S UP300/350

Content of the Manuals

Introduction This operating manual provides information about:

ƒ Technical characteristics of the instrument
ƒ Putting into operation
ƒ Basic operating procedures and control elements
ƒ Operation via menus
In the introduction, a typical R&S UP300/350 measurement is described.
The operating manual also contains information about maintenance and
troubleshooting based on the warnings and error messages issued by the
instrument.

E-1147.2759.00 1-4 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Table of Contents

Table of Contents
Chapter Overview ............................................................................................................................ 1-3
Content of the Manuals................................................................................................................... 1-4
Table of Contents ............................................................................................................................ 1-5
Data Sheet ...................................................................................................................................... 1-11
Analyzer ................................................................................................................................... 1-11
Analog audio inputs ..................................................................................................... 1-11
Digital audio inputs (model R&S UP350 only) ............................................................. 1-11
Measurement functions ............................................................................................... 1-12
Filters ........................................................................................................................... 1-14
FFT analyzer................................................................................................................ 1-15
Generator................................................................................................................................. 1-15
Analog audio outputs ................................................................................................... 1-15
Digital audio outputs (model R&S UP350 only)........................................................... 1-15
Signals ......................................................................................................................... 1-15
Sweep .......................................................................................................................... 1-17
Display of results ..................................................................................................................... 1-17
Units ............................................................................................................................. 1-17
Graphical display of results.......................................................................................... 1-17
Audio monitor............................................................................................................... 1-17
Digital audio protocol (model R&S UP350 only).......................................................... 1-18
General specifications ................................................................................................. 1-18
Safety Instructions ........................................................................................................................ 1-21
Certificate of Quality ..................................................................................................................... 1-31
EC Certificate of Conformity ........................................................................................................ 1-32
Support Center Address............................................................................................................... 1-33
List of Rohde & Schwarz Offices................................................................................................. 1-34

1 Introduction................................................................................................. 1-35

1.1 Application Range of the R&S UP300/350 .......................................................................... 1-35

1.2 Supplied Accessories ........................................................................................................... 1-36
1.3 Warranty ................................................................................................................................. 1-36

2 Control Elements ........................................................................................ 2-37

2.1 Front View .............................................................................................................................. 2-37

2.2 Rear View: R&S UP300/350 .................................................................................................. 2-38
2.3 Rear View: R&S UP350 (Digital Interface) ........................................................................... 2-39

3 Putting the R&S UP300/350 into Operation .............................................. 3-40

3.1 Unpacking the R&S UP300/350 ............................................................................................ 3-40

Operating Manual, 11/2007 1-5 E-1147.2759.00

Table of Contents R&S UP300/350

3.2 Setting up the Instrument ..................................................................................................... 3-40

3.3 Connecting the R&S UP300/350 to the AC Line ................................................................. 3-42
3.4 Switching On the R&S UP300/350 ....................................................................................... 3-42
3.5 Function Test ......................................................................................................................... 3-43
3.6 EMC ......................................................................................................................................... 3-43
3.7 Connecting a DUT.................................................................................................................. 3-44
3.8 Connecting an External Keyboard....................................................................................... 3-45
3.9 Connecting a USB Stick........................................................................................................ 3-46

4 Getting Started ............................................................................................ 4-47

4.1 Generator and Analyzer Settings......................................................................................... 4-47

5 Manual Operating Concept ........................................................................ 5-51

5.1 Overview of Operating Steps ............................................................................................... 5-52

5.2 Making Entries from the Keypad.......................................................................................... 5-53
5.2.1 Numeric Keys............................................................................................................... 5-54
5.2.2 Main Menu Selection Keys .......................................................................................... 5-54
5.2.3 Rotary Knob ................................................................................................................. 5-55
5.2.4 Cursor Keys ................................................................................................................. 5-55
5.2.5 Function Keys .............................................................................................................. 5-55
5.2.6 Action Keys .................................................................................................................. 5-56
5.2.7 BACK/SYS Key............................................................................................................ 5-56
5.3 Screen Display ....................................................................................................................... 5-57
5.3.1 Display Area................................................................................................................. 5-58
5.3.2 Menu Area ................................................................................................................... 5-60
5.3.3 Function Area............................................................................................................... 5-60
5.4 Calling and Changing the Menus......................................................................................... 5-61
5.5 Setting the Parameters ......................................................................................................... 5-63
5.5.1 Direct Selection of Instrument Functions..................................................................... 5-63
5.5.2 Toggling a Setting ........................................................................................................ 5-63
5.5.3 Selecting Settings ........................................................................................................ 5-64
5.5.4 Entering Numerical Parameters................................................................................... 5-65
5.5.4.1 Entry with the Numeric Keys ............................................................. 5-65
5.5.4.2 Entry with the Cursor Keys and Rotary Knob ................................... 5-67
5.6 Overview of all Menus and Functions ................................................................................. 5-69
5.6.1 Generator..................................................................................................................... 5-69
5.6.1.1 FUNCTIONS Menu ........................................................................... 5-69
5.6.1.2 SINE Menu ........................................................................................ 5-69
5.6.1.3 NOISE Menu ..................................................................................... 5-70
5.6.1.4 MULTISINE Menu ............................................................................. 5-70
5.6.1.5 SINE BURST Menu........................................................................... 5-71
5.6.1.6 MOD DIST Menu............................................................................... 5-71
5.6.1.7 DFD Menu ......................................................................................... 5-71

E-1147.2759.00 1-6 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Table of Contents

5.6.1.8 POLARITY TEST Menu .................................................................... 5-72

5.6.1.9 DC OFFSET Menu............................................................................ 5-72
5.6.1.10 SWEEP RMS Menu .......................................................................... 5-73
5.6.1.11 SWEEP RMS SELECTIVE Menu ..................................................... 5-74
5.6.1.12 SWEEP THD Menu........................................................................... 5-75
5.6.1.13 MONITOR Menu ............................................................................... 5-76
5.6.1.14 CONFIG Menu .................................................................................. 5-76
5.6.2 Analyzer ....................................................................................................................... 5-77
5.6.2.1 FUNCTIONS Menu ........................................................................... 5-77
5.6.2.2 FREQUENCY, DC, RMS Menu ........................................................ 5-78
5.6.2.3 PEAK Menu....................................................................................... 5-78
5.6.2.4 QUASI PEAK Menu .......................................................................... 5-79
5.6.2.5 RMS SELECTIVE Menu ................................................................... 5-79
5.6.2.6 FFT Menu.......................................................................................... 5-80
5.6.2.7 THD Menu ......................................................................................... 5-80
5.6.2.8 DFD Menu ......................................................................................... 5-81
5.6.2.9 PHASE Menu .................................................................................... 5-81
5.6.2.10 MOD DIST Menu............................................................................... 5-82
5.6.2.11 PROTOCOL Menu ............................................................................ 5-82
5.6.2.12 SAMPLE RATE Menu ....................................................................... 5-82
5.6.2.13 FILTER Menu .................................................................................... 5-83
5.6.2.14 CONFIG Menu .................................................................................. 5-83
5.6.3 Graph Menu ................................................................................................................. 5-84
5.6.3.1 GRAPH MODE Menu........................................................................ 5-84
5.6.3.2 X AXIS Menu..................................................................................... 5-84
5.6.3.3 Y AXIS Menu..................................................................................... 5-84
5.6.3.4 CURSORS Menu .............................................................................. 5-85
5.6.4 System menu (SYS Menu) .......................................................................................... 5-87
5.6.4.1 PRESET Menu .................................................................................. 5-87
5.6.4.2 STATE Menu..................................................................................... 5-87
5.6.4.3 FILE Menu......................................................................................... 5-87
5.6.4.4 CONFIG Menu .................................................................................. 5-88
5.6.4.5 SERVICE Menu ................................................................................ 5-88
5.6.4.6 INFO Menu........................................................................................ 5-88
5.6.4.7 CALIB Menu ...................................................................................... 5-88

6 Working with the R&S UP300/350.............................................................. 6-89

6.1 Factory Default Settings ....................................................................................................... 6-89

6.1.1 Generator..................................................................................................................... 6-90
6.1.2 Analyzer ....................................................................................................................... 6-94
6.1.3 Graph ........................................................................................................................... 6-97
6.1.4 System ......................................................................................................................... 6-97
6.2 Generator................................................................................................................................ 6-98
6.2.1 Configuring Generator Parameters (CONFIG) ............................................................ 6-99
6.2.1.1 Selecting the Generator Type – Analog/Digital (R&S UP350 only) 6-101
6.2.1.2 Analog Generator............................................................................ 6-102

Operating Manual, 11/2007 1-7 E-1147.2759.00

Table of Contents R&S UP300/350

6.2.1.2.1 Selecting the Generator Bandwidth ................................................ 6-102

6.2.1.2.2 Selecting the Reference Potential of the Output Signal.................. 6-103
6.2.1.2.3 Activating/Deactivating the Generator Output ................................ 6-104
6.2.1.2.4 Selecting the Type of the Level Range Switchover ........................ 6-105
6.2.1.3 Digital Generator (R&S UP350 only) .............................................. 6-107
6.2.1.3.1 Selecting the Sample Frequency of the Output Signal ................... 6-107
6.2.1.3.2 Entering the Sample Frequency Offset........................................... 6-108
6.2.1.3.3 Setting the Validity Bit ..................................................................... 6-108
6.2.1.3.4 Selecting the Valid Number of Bits in the Output Signal................. 6-109
6.2.1.3.5 Selecting the Interface Protocol ...................................................... 6-109
6.2.2 Setting the Generator Signal Type (FUNCTIONS).................................................... 6-110
6.2.2.1 Selecting Generator Functions ....................................................... 6-112
6.2.2.2 Configuring Signal Parameters ....................................................... 6-113
6.2.2.2.1 SINE (Sinewave Signal).................................................................. 6-114
6.2.2.2.2 NOISE (Noise Signal) ..................................................................... 6-119
6.2.2.2.3 MULTISINE (Multitone Signal) ........................................................ 6-122
6.2.2.2.4 SINE BURST (Sine Burst Signal) ................................................... 6-132
6.2.2.2.5 MOD DIST (Two-Tone Signal in Accordance with IEC) ................. 6-138
6.2.2.2.6 DFD (Difference Frequency Signal)................................................ 6-144
6.2.2.2.7 POLARITY TEST (Polarization Test Signal)................................... 6-150
6.2.2.2.8 DC OFFSET (DC Voltage Component) .......................................... 6-152
6.2.2.2.9 SWEEP RMS .................................................................................. 6-154
6.2.2.2.10 SWEEP RMS SELECTIVE ............................................................. 6-171
6.2.2.2.11 SWEEP THD ................................................................................... 6-190
6.2.3 Audio Monitoring Output (MONITOR) ....................................................................... 6-209
6.3 Analyzer ................................................................................................................................ 6-212
6.3.1 Configuring the Analyzer (CONFIG) .......................................................................... 6-213
6.3.1.1 Selecting the Analyzer Type – Analog/Digital (R&S UP350 only) .. 6-215
6.3.1.2 Analog Analyzer .............................................................................. 6-216
6.3.1.2.1 Selecting the Analyzer Bandwidth .................................................. 6-216
6.3.1.2.2 Selecting the Reference Potential of the Input Signal .................... 6-217
6.3.1.2.3 Selecting the Signal Source ............................................................ 6-218
6.3.1.2.4 Selecting the Signal Coupling ......................................................... 6-219
6.3.1.2.5 Selecting the Measurement Range Selection Mode....................... 6-220
6.3.1.2.6 Selecting the Measurement Channel.............................................. 6-221
6.3.1.3 Digital Analyzer (R&S UP350 only)................................................. 6-222
6.3.1.3.1 Selecting the Sample Frequency of the Input Signal...................... 6-222
6.3.1.3.2 Selecting the Input Signal ............................................................... 6-223
6.3.1.3.3 Selecting the Valid Number of Bits in the Input Signal ................... 6-223
6.3.2 Setting the Measurement Functions (FUNCTIONS) ................................................. 6-224
6.3.2.1 Selecting the Measurement Functions............................................ 6-226
6.3.2.2 Configuring the Measurement Parameters..................................... 6-227
6.3.2.2.1 FREQUENCY, DC, RMS ................................................................ 6-228
6.3.2.2.2 PEAK (Peak Value)......................................................................... 6-237
6.3.2.2.3 QUASI PEAK (Quasi Peak Value) .................................................. 6-243
6.3.2.2.4 RMS SELECTIVE (Selective RMS value)....................................... 6-246
6.3.2.2.5 FFT (Frequency-Domain Display, Spectrum) ................................. 6-251
6.3.2.2.6 THD, THD+N, SINAD (Total Harmonic Distortion) ......................... 6-259
6.3.2.2.7 POLARITY (Polarity Test) ............................................................... 6-267
6.3.2.2.8 DFD (Difference Frequency Distortion) .......................................... 6-268
6.3.2.2.9 PHASE (Measuring the Phase Difference Between Channels) ..... 6-272
6.3.2.2.10 MOD DIST (Modulation Distortion) ................................................. 6-275
6.3.2.2.11 PROTOCOL (Protocol Analysis), (R&S UP350 only) ..................... 6-278
6.3.2.2.12 SAMPLE RATE (Sample Frequency), (R&S UP350 only).............. 6-281

E-1147.2759.00 1-8 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Table of Contents

6.3.3 Configuring the Filters (FILTER)................................................................................ 6-282

6.3.3.1 Selecting the Filters......................................................................... 6-283
6.3.4 Starting and Stopping the Measurements ................................................................. 6-285
6.4 Graph Menu.......................................................................................................................... 6-286
6.4.1 Selecting the Display Mode (GRAPH MODE) ........................................................... 6-287
6.4.1.1 Selecting the Display Parameters................................................... 6-288
6.4.1.2 Selecting the Display Mode............................................................. 6-290
6.4.2 Scaling the X Axis (X AXIS) ....................................................................................... 6-292
6.4.2.1 Setting the Display Range............................................................... 6-293
6.4.2.2 Selecting the Display Mode............................................................. 6-295
6.4.3 Scaling the Y Axis (Y AXIS) ....................................................................................... 6-296
6.4.3.1 Setting the Display Range............................................................... 6-297
6.4.3.2 Selecting the Display Mode............................................................. 6-299
6.4.4 Trace Analysis Using Cursors (CURSORS).............................................................. 6-300
6.4.4.1 Configuring the X Cursors............................................................... 6-301
6.4.4.1.1 Activating/Deactivating the X Cursors............................................. 6-302
6.4.4.1.2 Assigning the X Cursors to a Trace (Ch 1 or Ch 2) ........................ 6-303
6.4.4.1.3 Positioning the X Cursors on a Maximum....................................... 6-303
6.4.4.1.4 Manual Positioning the X Cursors................................................... 6-305
6.4.4.1.5 Zooming the Display Area............................................................... 6-307
6.4.4.2 Configuring the Y Cursors............................................................... 6-309
6.4.4.2.1 Activating/Deactivating the Y Cursors............................................. 6-310
6.4.4.2.2 Manual Positioning the Y Cursors................................................... 6-311
6.4.4.2.3 Zooming the Display Area............................................................... 6-312
6.4.5 Full-Screen Display.................................................................................................... 6-314
6.5 System Menu (SYS Menu key)............................................................................................ 6-316
6.5.1 Instrument Default Setting (PRESET Menu) ............................................................. 6-317
6.5.1.1 Selecting and Calling the Instrument Default Setting ..................... 6-318
6.5.1.2 Start the Remote Control Manually................................................. 6-319
6.5.2 Displaying the Current Instrument Setting (STATE Menu)........................................ 6-320
6.5.3 User-Defined Settings (FILE Menu) .......................................................................... 6-322
6.5.3.1 Saving and Loading a User-Defined Settings................................. 6-323
6.5.3.2 Printing out a Screenshot................................................................ 6-325
6.5.3.3 Saving the Measurement Results ................................................... 6-327
6.5.4 System Settings (CONFIG Menu) ............................................................................. 6-328
6.5.4.1 Setting the Date and Time .............................................................. 6-329
6.5.4.2 Selecting an Internal or External Reference Sources..................... 6-331
6.5.4.3 Configuring the Instrument Interfaces............................................. 6-332
6.5.4.4 Setting the Screen Saver Mode ...................................................... 6-334
6.5.4.5 Selecting the Internal or External Monitors ..................................... 6-336
6.5.5 Service Functions (SERVICE Menu) ......................................................................... 6-337
6.5.5.1 Performing the Selftests.................................................................. 6-337
6.5.6 System Information (INFO Menu).............................................................................. 6-338
6.5.6.1 Displaying the Module Data ............................................................ 6-339
6.5.6.2 Displaying the Instrument Statistics ................................................ 6-339
6.5.6.3 Displaying the System Messages ................................................... 6-340
6.5.7 Adjustment Functions (CALIB Menu) ........................................................................ 6-341

Operating Manual, 11/2007 1-9 E-1147.2759.00

Data Sheet R&S UP300/350

6.5.7.1 Starting the Auto Adjustment of the Generator Module .................. 6-342
6.5.7.2 Starting the Auto Adjustment of the Analyzer Module .................... 6-342
6.5.7.3 Starting the Auto Adjustment of the R&S UP300/350..................... 6-343

7 Instrument Interfaces ............................................................................... 7-344

7.1 Keyboard Connector (KEYB).............................................................................................. 7-344

7.2 Monitor Connector (MON)................................................................................................... 7-344
7.3 Reference Input and Output (10 MHz In/Out).................................................................... 7-345
7.4 USB Interface (PC, DEV) ..................................................................................................... 7-345
7.5 Audio Monitoring Output (MON OUT) ............................................................................... 7-345

8 Error Messages ......................................................................................... 8-346

8.1 System Messages................................................................................................................ 8-346

8.2 Warnings Indicating Impermissible Operating States ..................................................... 8-347

9 Index .......................................................................................................... 9-349

E-1147.2759.00 1-10 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Data Sheet

Data Sheet
Note: In a highly innovative company like Rohde & Schwarz, products are
continuously undergoing further development. To obtain information about
new applications and features, visit our Internet page at
http://www.smart.rohde-schwarz.com.

Analyzer

Analog audio inputs

Frequency range DC/10 Hz to 80 kHz

Frequency response 10 Hz to 20 Hz ±0.1 dB

(referenced to 1 kHz) 20 Hz to 22 kHz ±0.05 dB
22 kHz to 40 kHz ±0.1 dB
40 kHz to 80 kHz ±0.25 dB

BNC connectors 2 channels, floating, selectable AC/DC coupling, channel 1 on

front panel, channel 2 on rear panel
Maximum input voltage rms, sinewave 33 V
Measurement ranges in steps of 6 dB 0.4 V to 50 V
(max. input 33 V)
Input impedance inner/outer conductor to ground 100 kΩ
Crosstalk attenuation frequency < 20 kHz, 600 Ω > 100 dB
source impedance
Common-mode rejection at 50 Hz, Vin < 3 V > 80 dB
at 1 kHz, Vin < 3 V > 75 dB
at 16 kHz, Vin < 3 V > 60 dB

Generator output each input channel switchable to the other generator output
channel

Digital audio inputs (model R&S UP350 only)

BNC connector unbalanced, grounded, on rear panel

Impedance 75 Ω
Input level (Vpp) 100 mV to 5 V
Optical input TOSLINK
Channels 1, 2, or both
Audio bits 16 to 24
Sampling rate 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz,
96 kHz, 192 kHz

Operating Manual, 11/2007 1-11 E-1147.2759.00

Data Sheet R&S UP300/350

Format professional and consumer

Measurement functions

RMS value, wideband

Error limits measurement speed AUTO, at ±0.1 dB, additional error with
1 kHz sine, AC coupling DC coupling
measurement speed AUTO ±0.1 % of measurement range
FAST
±0.1 dB additional error
Integration time AUTO FAST/AUTO VALUE 5 ms/50 ms, at least 1 cycle
1 ms to 10 s
Noise with A filter, 600 Ω source < 2 µV
impedance
with CCIR unweighting filter, < 4 µV
600 Ω source impedance
Filters weighting filters and sets of predefined octave and third-octave
filters; up to 3 filters can be combined

RMS value, selective

Error limits ±0.2 dB
Bandwidth (-3 dB) Relative 1%, 3%, 1/3 octave,
1/12 octave, value
minimum BW 10 Hz

Absolute 10 Hz to fmax/5
Selectivity 100 dB
Frequency setting fixed through entered value or
autotuning

Peak value
Measurement pos. peak, neg. peak,
peak-to-peak, absolute peak
Error limits at 1 kHz ±0.2 dB
Interval 20 ms to 10 s
Filters weighting filters and sets of predefined octave and third-octave
filters; up to 3 filters can be combined

Quasi-peak
Measurement in accordance with CCIR 468-4
Error limits analyzer bandwidth 22 kHz in accordance with CCIR 468-4
Noise with CCIR weighting filter, <12 µV
600 Ω source impedance
Filters weighting filters and sets of predefined octave and third-octave
filters; up to 3 filters can be combined

E-1147.2759.00 1-12 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Data Sheet

DC voltage
Voltage range 0 V to ±33 V
Error limits ± (1 % of measured value +
0.5 % of measurement range)
Total harmonic distortion (THD)
Fundamental 20 Hz to 20 kHz
Frequency tuning fixed through entered value,
auto-tuning to input signal
Weighted harmonics up to 80 kHz any combination of d2 to d9
Error limits harmonics < 50 kHz ±0.7 dB
harmonics < 80 kHz ±1 dB
Inherent distortion fundamental 1 kHz < -100 dB
fundamental 20 Hz to 5 kHz < -90 dB
fundamental 5 kHz to 15 kHz < -85 dB
fundamental 15 kHz to 20 kHz < -80 dB
Spectrum bar graph showing signal and distortion

THD+N and SINAD

Fundamental 20 Hz to 20 kHz
Frequency tuning fixed through entered value,
auto-tuning to input signal
Bandwidth weighting filters and sets of predefined octave and third-octave
filters; up to 3 filters can be combined
Error limits bandwidth < 22 kHz ±0.8 dB
bandwidth < 80 kHz ±1.4 dB
Inherent distortion bandwidth 20 Hz to 22 kHz, < -95 dB + 4 µV
fundamental 1 kHz
bandwidth 20 Hz to 22 kHz, < -90 dB + 4 µV
fundamental 20 Hz to 5 kHz
bandwidth 20 Hz to 80 kHz, < 80 dB + 8 µV
fundamental 20 Hz to 20 kHz
Spectrum post-FFT of filtered signal

Difference frequency distortion

(DFD)
Measurement method in accordance with IEC 268-3
or IEC 118
Frequency range difference frequency 80 Hz to 2 kHz
center frequency 200 Hz to 80 kHz
Error limits fcenter < 20 kHz ±0.5 dB
Inherent distortion DFD d2, fcenter < 20 kHz < -105 dB
DFD d3, 5 kHz < fcenter < 20 kHz < -90 dB

Operating Manual, 11/2007 1-13 E-1147.2759.00

Data Sheet R&S UP300/350

Spectrum bar graph showing signal and distortion

Modulation distortion (MOD DIST)

Frequency range lower frequency 30 Hz to 2.7 kHz
upper frequency 8 × flower to 20 kHz
Error limits ±0.5 dB
Inherent distortion flower = 60 Hz, < -85 dB
4 kHz < fupper < 15 kHz
flower = 60 Hz,
15 kHz < fupper < 20 kHz
input voltage ≤ 4 V < -80 dB
input voltage > 4 V < -75 dB
Spectrum bar graph showing signal and distortion

Frequency
Frequency range 20 Hz to 80 kHz
Error limits measurement time 10 s ±10 ppm
measurement time 1 s ±100 ppm

Phase
Frequency range analyzer bandwidth 22 kHz 20 Hz to 22 kHz
analyzer bandwidth 80 kHz 80 Hz to 80 kHz
Error limits f < 20 kHz, both channels with ±1°
same range

Polarity test
Measurement polarity of unsymmetrical input
signal
Display positive/negative
For all analog and digital analyzers. Up to three filters can be
Filters combined. All filters are digital filters with a coefficient accuracy
of 32 bit floating point.
Weighting filters A weighting
C message
CCITT
CCIR unweighted
CCIR 1k weighted
CCIR 2k weighted
deemphasis 50/15, 50, 75, J.17
IEC/IEEE tuner
Set of third-octave and octave filters

E-1147.2759.00 1-14 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Data Sheet

FFT analyzer

Frequency range DC to 80 kHz

FFT size 1 k, 2 k, 4 k, 8 k, 16 k points
Window functions rectangular, Hann, Blackman-
Harris, Rife-Vincent 1 to 3,
Hamming, flat top,
Kaiser (β = 12)
Resolution 16 k points, bandwidth 22 kHz 2.93 Hz
Averaging exponential or normal 1 to 256

Generator

Analog audio outputs

BNC connectors 2 channels, electronic, floating (max. 0.2 V peak referenced to

ground) or grounded, short-circuit-proof, max. current 120 mA
with external feed
channel 1 on front panel, channel 2 on rear panel
Voltage range sine, open-circuit 0.1 mV to 7.5 V (Vrms)
Source impedance 27 Ω
Crosstalk attenuation f < 20 kHz > 100 dB
Load impedance > 200 Ω
Common-mode rejection at 1 kHz > 50 dB
Frequency limits specified for the signals apply to a sampling
Digital audio outputs rate of 48 kHz. For other sampling rates, limits are calculated in
(model R&S UP350 only) accordance with the following formula: fnew = f48kHz × sampling
rate/48 kHz.
BNC connectors unbalanced, transformer coupling, on rear panel
Impedance 75 Ω, short-circuit-proof
Output level (Vpp) into 75 Ω 0.5 V
Optical output TOSLINK
Channels 1, 2, or both
Audio bits 16 to 24
Sampling rate 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz,
96 kHz, 192 kHz
Format professional and consumer

Signals

Operating Manual, 11/2007 1-15 E-1147.2759.00

Data Sheet R&S UP300/350

Sine
Frequency range 2 Hz to 80 kHz
Error limits at 1 kHz ±0.1 dB
Frequency response (ref. to 1 kHz) 20 Hz to 20 kHz ±0.05 dB
Inherent distortion THD+N measurement bandwidth 20 Hz < -90 dB
to 22 kHz
Sweep parameters frequency, level

MOD DIST for measuring modulation distortion

Frequency range lower frequency 30 Hz to 2700 Hz
upper frequency 8 × flower to 39.95 kHz
Level ratio (LF:UF) selectable from 10:1 to 1:1
Error limits ±0.5 dB
Inherent distortion at 60 Hz, 7 kHz, level ratio 4:1 < -90 dB
other settings; fupper < 20 kHz < -84 dB

DFD for measuring difference frequency distortion

Frequency range difference frequency 80 Hz to 2 kHz
center frequency 200 Hz to 39.95 kHz
Error limits ±0.5 dB
Inherent distortion DFD d2, 7 kHz < fcenter < 20 kHz < -105 dB
DFD d3, 7 kHz < fcenter < 20 kHz < -90 dB

Multisine
Frequency range 2.4 Hz to 80 kHz
Minimum frequency spacing bandwidth 22 kHz 2.4 Hz
Dynamic range referenced to peak value 100 dB
Characteristics 1 to 17 spectral lines, level,
start phase and frequency
selectable for each line

Sine burst
Burst time 1 signal period up to 60 s
Interval time burst time up to 60 s
Low level zero to burst level, absolute or
relative to burst

Noise
Distribution Gaussian, triangular,
rectangular

Polarity test signal

E-1147.2759.00 1-16 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Data Sheet

SINE2 BURST signal 1.2 kHz

ON-TIME 1 cycle
INTERVAL 2 cycles

Sweep

Generator function Sine

Sweep parameters frequency and/or level
Sweep spacing linear, logarithmic
Sweep Modes Single, continuous
Coupled analyzer functions RMS; RMS Sel.; THD(N)
Sweep Points X-Axis 2 to 1024
Z-Axis (Freq. & Ampl. Sweep) 1 to 10

Display of results

Units

Level (analog) V, dBu, dBV, dBm and dBr (ratio to reference value)
Level (digital) FS, %FS, dBFS and dBr (ratio to reference value)
Distortion % or dB
Frequency Hz
Phase deg

Graphical display of results

Display modes spectrum plot

curve plot
bar graph
lists of results
Display functions autoscale
x-axis zoom
full-screen and part-screen mode
2 vertical, 2 horizontal cursor lines
search function for max. values

Audio monitor

Headphone connector 3.5 mm jack

Output voltage <2V

Operating Manual, 11/2007 1-17 E-1147.2759.00

Data Sheet R&S UP300/350

Output current < 20 mA

Source impedance 10 Ω, short-circuit-proof
Recommended headphone 600 Ω
impedance

Digital audio protocol

(model R&S UP350 only)

Generator
Validity bit NONE, L+R
Channel status data predefined masks for
professional or consumer
format in acc. with IEC 60958
Analyzer
Display of protocol bits validity bit L or R
channel status bits mnemonic display of data
fields, predefined settings for
professional or consumer
format in acc. with IEC 60958;
automatically detected
error indication block errors, sequence errors,
preamble errors
Clock rate measurement error limits ±50 ppm

General specifications

Interfaces
USB host printer; USB stick A plug, protocol version 1.1
USB device device-specific command set, B plug, protocol version 1.1
remote control via Windows
driver (Windows XP/2000)
Connector for external monitor 15-pin D-Sub female
(VGA)
Keyboard connector PS/2 female

Display
Type 5.4“ active TFT color display
Resolution 320 × 240 pixels
Max. refresh rate 10 pictures/s, nominal

Power supply
Input voltage range autoranging 100 V to 240 V (AC),
50 Hz to 60 Hz
Power consumption < 120 VA

E-1147.2759.00 1-18 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Data Sheet

Ambient conditions
Operating temperature range meets EN 60068-2-1/2 +5 °C to +45 °C
Storage temperature range -20 °C to +70 °C
Relative humidity meets EN 60068-2-78 95 % at +40 °C
(non-condensing)

Mechanical resistance
Sinusoidal vibration meets EN 60068-2-6, 5 Hz to 150 Hz,
EN 61010-1 and max. 2g at 55 Hz,
MIL-T-28800D class 5
55 Hz to 150 Hz:
0.5g constant
Random vibration meets EN 60068-2-64 10 Hz to 500 Hz: 1.9g
Shock meets EN 60068-2-27 and shock spectrum
MIL-STD-810

Electromagnetic compatibility meets EN 55011 class B and

EN 61326 (EMC Directive of
EU (89/336/EEC))

EMI field strength 10 V/m

Safety EN 61010-1/IEC 61010-1, UL

3111-1; CSA C22.2 No. 1010.1

Dimensions (W × H × D) 219 mm × 147 mm × 350 mm

Weight 9 kg

Operating Manual, 11/2007 1-19 E-1147.2759.00

 R&S UP300/350

E-1147.2759.00 1-20 Operating Manual, 11/2007

 Before putting the product into operation for
the first time, make sure to read the following

Safety Instructions

All plants and locations of the Rohde & Schwarz group of companies make every effort to keep the
safety standard of our products up to date and to offer our customers the highest possible degree of
safety. Our products and the auxiliary equipment required for them are designed and tested in
accordance with the relevant safety standards. Compliance with these standards is continuously
monitored by our quality assurance system. The product described here has been designed and tested
in accordance with the EC Certificate of Conformity and has left the manufacturer’s plant in a condition
fully complying with safety standards. To maintain this condition and to ensure safe operation, observe
all instructions and warnings provided in this manual. If you have any questions regarding these safety
instructions, the Rohde & Schwarz group of companies will be happy to answer them.
Furthermore, it is your responsibility to use the product in an appropriate manner. This product is
designed for use solely in industrial and laboratory environments or in the field and must not be used in
any way that may cause personal injury or property damage. You are responsible if the product is used
for an intention other than its designated purpose or in disregard of the manufacturer's instructions. The
manufacturer shall assume no responsibility for such use of the product.
The product is used for its designated purpose if it is used in accordance with its product documentation
and within its performance limits (see data sheet, documentation, the following safety instructions).
Using the product requires technical skills and a basic knowledge of English. It is therefore essential
that the product be used exclusively by skilled and specialized staff or thoroughly trained personnel with
the required skills. If personal safety gear is required for using Rohde & Schwarz products, this will be
indicated at the appropriate place in the product documentation.

Symbols and safety labels

Attention!
Observe Weight Danger of Warning!
Ground Electrostatic
product indication for electric Hot PE terminal Ground
terminal sensitive
documentation units >18 kg shock surface
devices

Device fully
Supply Direct
Standby Alternating Direct/alternating protected by
voltage current
indication current (AC) current (DC/AC) double/reinforced
ON/OFF (DC)
insulation

1171.0000.42-03.00 Sheet 1
 Safety Instructions

Observing the safety instructions will help prevent personal injury or damage of any kind caused by
dangerous situations. Therefore, carefully read through and adhere to the following safety instructions
before putting the product into operation. It is also absolutely essential to observe the additional safety
instructions on personal safety that appear in relevant parts of the product documentation. In these
safety instructions, the word "product" refers to all merchandise sold and distributed by the Rohde &
Schwarz group of companies, including instruments, systems and all accessories.

Tags and their meaning

DANGER This tag indicates a definite hazard carrying a high risk of death or
serious injury if not avoided.
WARNING This tag indicates a possible hazard carrying a medium risk of death or
(serious) injury if not avoided.
CAUTION This tag indicates a hazard carrying a low risk of minor or moderate
injury if not avoided.
ATTENTION This tag indicates the possibility of incorrect use that can cause damage
to the product.
NOTE This tag indicates a situation where the user should pay special attention
to operating the product but which does not lead to damage.

These tags are in accordance with the standard definition for civil applications in the European
Economic Area. Definitions that deviate from the standard definition may also exist in other economic
areas or military applications. It is therefore essential to make sure that the tags described here are
always used only in connection with the related product documentation and the related product. The
use of tags in connection with unrelated products or documentation can result in misinterpretation and
thus contribute to personal injury or material damage.

Basic safety instructions

1. The product may be operated only under the product or opening the product, the
the operating conditions and in the product must be disconnected from the
positions specified by the manufacturer. Its supply network. Any adjustments,
ventilation must not be obstructed during replacements of parts, maintenance or
operation. Unless otherwise specified, the repair must be carried out only by technical
following requirements apply to personnel authorized by Rohde & Schwarz.
Rohde & Schwarz products: Only original parts may be used for
prescribed operating position is always with replacing parts relevant to safety (e.g.
the housing floor facing down, IP protection power switches, power transformers,
2X, pollution severity 2, overvoltage fuses). A safety test must always be
category 2, use only in enclosed spaces, performed after parts relevant to safety
max. operation altitude 2000 m above sea have been replaced (visual inspection, PE
level, max. transport altitude 4500 m above conductor test, insulation resistance
sea level. measurement, leakage current
Unless specified otherwise in the data measurement, functional test).
sheet, a tolerance of ±10% shall apply to 3. As with all industrially manufactured goods,
the nominal voltage and of ±5% to the the use of substances that induce an
nominal frequency. allergic reaction (allergens, e.g. nickel)
2. Applicable local or national safety such as aluminum cannot be generally
regulations and rules for the prevention of excluded. If you develop an allergic
accidents must be observed in all work reaction (such as a skin rash, frequent
performed. The product may be opened sneezing, red eyes or respiratory
only by authorized, specially trained difficulties), consult a physician immediately
personnel. Prior to performing any work on to determine the cause.

1171.0000.42-03.00 Sheet 2
 Safety Instructions

4. If products/components are mechanically product itself is not permitted. Doing so can

and/or thermically processed in a manner result in the danger of an electric shock
that goes beyond their intended use, from the product. If extension cords or
hazardous substances (heavy-metal dust connector strips are implemented, they
such as lead, beryllium, nickel) may be must be checked on a regular basis to
released. For this reason, the product may ensure that they are safe to use.
only be disassembled, e.g. for disposal 11. If the product has no power switch for
purposes, by specially trained personnel. disconnection from the AC supply, the plug
Improper disassembly may be hazardous to of the connecting cable is regarded as the
your health. National waste disposal disconnecting device. In such cases, it
regulations must be observed. must be ensured that the power plug is
5. If handling the product yields hazardous easily reachable and accessible at all times
substances or fuels that must be disposed (corresponding to the length of connecting
of in a special way, e.g. coolants or engine cable, approx. 2 m). Functional or
oils that must be replenished regularly, the electronic switches are not suitable for
safety instructions of the manufacturer of providing disconnection from the AC
the hazardous substances or fuels and the supply. If products without power switches
applicable regional waste disposal are integrated in racks or systems, a
regulations must be observed. Also disconnecting device must be provided at
observe the relevant safety instructions in the system level.
the product documentation. 12. Never use the product if the power cable is
6. Depending on the function, certain products damaged. Check the power cable on a
such as RF radio equipment can produce regular basis to ensure that it is in proper
an elevated level of electromagnetic operating condition. By taking appropriate
radiation. Considering that unborn life safety measures and carefully laying the
requires increased protection, pregnant power cable, ensure that the cable cannot
women should be protected by appropriate be damaged and that no one can be hurt by
measures. Persons with pacemakers may e.g. tripping over the cable or suffering an
also be endangered by electromagnetic electric shock.
radiation. The employer/operator is 13. The product may be operated only from
required to assess workplaces where there TN/TT supply networks fused with max.
is a special risk of exposure to radiation 16 A (higher fuse only after consulting with
and, if necessary, take measures to avert the Rohde & Schwarz group of companies).
the danger.
14. Do not insert the plug into sockets that are
7. Operating the products requires special dusty or dirty. Insert the plug firmly and all
training and intense concentration. Make the way into the socket. Otherwise, this can
certain that persons who use the products result in sparks, fire and/or injuries.
are physically, mentally and emotionally fit
15. Do not overload any sockets, extension
enough to handle operating the products;
cords or connector strips; doing so can
otherwise injuries or material damage may
cause fire or electric shocks.
occur. It is the responsibility of the
employer to select suitable personnel for 16. For measurements in circuits with voltages
operating the products. Vrms > 30 V, suitable measures (e.g.
appropriate measuring equipment, fusing,
8. Prior to switching on the product, it must be
current limiting, electrical separation,
ensured that the nominal voltage setting on
insulation) should be taken to avoid any
the product matches the nominal voltage of
hazards.
the AC supply network. If a different voltage
is to be set, the power fuse of the product 17. Ensure that the connections with
may have to be changed accordingly. information technology equipment comply
with IEC 950/EN 60950.
9. In the case of products of safety class I with
movable power cord and connector, 18. Unless expressly permitted, never remove
operation is permitted only on sockets with the cover or any part of the housing while
earthing contact and protective earth the product is in operation. Doing so will
connection. expose circuits and components and can
lead to injuries, fire or damage to the
10. Intentionally breaking the protective earth
product.
connection either in the feed line or in the

1171.0000.42-03.00 Sheet 3
 Safety Instructions

19. If a product is to be permanently installed, the battery or storage battery only with the
the connection between the PE terminal on matching Rohde & Schwarz type (see
site and the product's PE conductor must spare parts list). Batteries and storage
be made first before any other connection batteries must be recycled and kept
is made. The product may be installed and separate from residual waste. Batteries and
connected only by a license electrician. storage batteries that contain lead, mercury
20. For permanently installed equipment or cadmium are hazardous waste. Observe
without built-in fuses, circuit breakers or the national regulations regarding waste
similar protective devices, the supply circuit disposal and recycling.
must be fused in such a way that suitable 28. Please be aware that in the event of a fire,
protection is provided for users and toxic substances (gases, liquids etc.) that
products. may be hazardous to your health may
21. Do not insert any objects into the openings escape from the product.
in the housing that are not designed for this 29. The product can be very heavy. Be careful
purpose. Never pour any liquids onto or into when moving it to avoid back or other
the housing. This can cause short circuits physical injuries.
inside the product and/or electric shocks, 30. Do not place the product on surfaces,
fire or injuries. vehicles, cabinets or tables that for reasons
22. Use suitable overvoltage protection to of weight or stability are unsuitable for this
ensure that no overvoltage (such as that purpose. Always follow the manufacturer's
caused by a thunderstorm) can reach the installation instructions when installing the
product. Otherwise the operating personnel product and fastening it to objects or
will be endangered by electric shocks. structures (e.g. walls and shelves).
23. Rohde & Schwarz products are not 31. Handles on the products are designed
protected against penetration of water, exclusively for personnel to hold or carry
unless otherwise specified (see also safety the product. It is therefore not permissible
instruction 1.). If this is not taken into to use handles for fastening the product to
account, there exists the danger of electric or on means of transport such as cranes,
shock for the user or damage to the fork lifts, wagons, etc. The user is
product, which can also lead to personal responsible for securely fastening the
injury. products to or on the means of transport
24. Never use the product under conditions in and for observing the safety regulations of
which condensation has formed or can form the manufacturer of the means of transport.
in or on the product, e.g. if the product was Noncompliance can result in personal injury
moved from a cold to a warm environment. or material damage.
25. Do not close any slots or openings on the 32. If you use the product in a vehicle, it is the
product, since they are necessary for sole responsibility of the driver to drive the
ventilation and prevent the product from vehicle safely. Adequately secure the
overheating. Do not place the product on product in the vehicle to prevent injuries or
soft surfaces such as sofas or rugs or other damage in the event of an accident.
inside a closed housing, unless this is well Never use the product in a moving vehicle if
ventilated. doing so could distract the driver of the
vehicle. The driver is always responsible for
26. Do not place the product on heat-
the safety of the vehicle. The manufacturer
generating devices such as radiators or fan
assumes no responsibility for accidents or
heaters. The temperature of the
collisions.
environment must not exceed the maximum
temperature specified in the data sheet. 33. If a laser product (e.g. a CD/DVD drive) is
integrated in a Rohde & Schwarz product,
27. Batteries and storage batteries must not be
do not use any other settings or functions
exposed to high temperatures or fire. Keep
than those described in the product
batteries and storage batteries away from
documentation. Otherwise this may be
children. Do not short-circuit batteries and
hazardous to your health, since the laser
storage batteries.
beam can cause irreversible damage to
If batteries or storage batteries are
your eyes. Never try to take such products
improperly replaced, this can cause an
apart, and never look into the laser beam.
explosion (warning: lithium cells). Replace

1171.0000.42-03.00 Sheet 4
 Informaciones de seguridad

Por favor lea imprescindiblemente antes de

la primera puesta en funcionamiento las
siguientes

Informaciones de seguridad

El principio del grupo de empresas Rohde & Schwarz consiste en tener nuestros productos siempre al
día con los estandards de seguridad y de ofrecer a nuestros clientes el máximo grado de seguridad.
Nuestros productos y todos los equipos adicionales son siempre fabricados y examinados según las
normas de seguridad vigentes. Nuestra sección de gestión de la seguridad de calidad controla
constantemente que sean cumplidas estas normas. El presente producto ha sido fabricado y
examinado según el comprobante de conformidad adjunto según las normas de la CE y ha salido de
nuestra planta en estado impecable según los estandards técnicos de seguridad. Para poder preservar
este estado y garantizar un funcionamiento libre de peligros, el usuario deberá atenerse a todas las
informaciones, informaciones de seguridad y notas de alerta. El grupo de empresas Rohde & Schwarz
está siempre a su disposición en caso de que tengan preguntas referentes a estas informaciones de
seguridad.
Además queda en la responsabilidad del usuario utilizar el producto en la forma debida. Este producto
solamente fue elaborado para ser utilizado en la industria y el laboratorio o para fines de campo y de
ninguna manera deberá ser utilizado de modo que alguna persona/cosa pueda ser dañada. El uso del
producto fuera de sus fines definidos o despreciando las informaciones de seguridad del fabricante
queda en la responsabilidad del usuario. El fabricante no se hace en ninguna forma responsable de
consecuencias a causa del mal uso del producto.
Se parte del uso correcto del producto para los fines definidos si el producto es utilizado dentro de las
instrucciones de la correspondiente documentación de producto y dentro del margen de rendimiento
definido (ver hoja de datos, documentación, informaciones de seguridad que siguen). El uso del
producto hace necesarios conocimientos profundos y conocimientos parciales del idioma inglés. Por
eso se deberá tener en cuenta de exclusivamente autorizar para el uso del producto a personas peritas
o debidamente minuciosamente instruidas con los conocimientos citados. Si fuera necesaria
indumentaria de seguridad para el uso de productos de R&S, encontrará la información debida en la
documentación del producto en el capítulo correspondiente.

Símbolos y definiciones de seguridad

¡Cuidado!
Informaciones
Ver Elementos de
para Peligro de ¡Advertencia! Conexión a Conexión
documen- Conexión construcción
maquinaria golpe de Superficie conductor a masa
tación de a tierra con peligro de
con uns peso corriente caliente protector conductora
producto carga
de > 18kg
electroestática

El aparato está
Corriente Corriente protegido en su
potencia EN Indicación Corriente
continua continua/alterna totalidad por un
MARCHA/PARADA Stand-by alterna AC
DC DC/AC aislamiento de
doble refuerzo

1171.0000.42-03.00 Sheet 5
 Informaciones de seguridad

Tener en cuenta las informaciones de seguridad sirve para tratar de evitar daños y peligros de toda
clase. Es necesario de que se lean las siguientes informaciones de seguridad concienzudamente y se
tengan en cuenta debidamente antes de la puesta en funcionamiento del producto. También deberán
ser tenidas en cuenta las informaciones para la protección de personas que encontrarán en el capítulo
correspondiente de la documentación de producto y que también son obligatorias de seguir. En las
informaciones de seguridad actuales hemos juntado todos los objetos vendidos por el grupo de
empresas Rohde & Schwarz bajo la denominación de „producto“, entre ellos también aparatos,
instalaciones así como toda clase de accesorios.

Palabras de señal y su significado

PELIGRO Identifica un peligro directo con riesgo elevado de provocar muerte o
lesiones de gravedad si no se toman las medidas oportunas.
ADVERTENCIA Identifica un posible peligro con riesgo medio de provocar muerte o
lesiones (de gravedad) si no se toman las medidas oportunas.
ATENCIÓN Identifica un peligro con riesgo reducido de provocar lesiones de
gravedad media o leve si no se toman las medidas oportunas.
CUIDADO Indica la posibilidad de utilizar mal el producto y a consecuencia
dañarlo.
INFORMACIÓN Indica una situación en la que deberían seguirse las instrucciones en el
uso del producto, pero que no consecuentemente deben de llevar a un
daño del mismo.

Las palabras de señal corresponden a la definición habitual para aplicaciones civiles en el área
económica europea. Pueden existir definiciones diferentes a esta definición en otras áreas económicas
o en aplicaciones militares. Por eso se deberá tener en cuenta que las palabras de señal aquí descritas
sean utilizadas siempre solamente en combinación con la correspondiente documentación de producto
y solamente en combinación con el producto correspondiente. La utilización de las palabras de señal
en combinación con productos o documentaciones que no les correspondan puede llevar a
malinterpretaciones y tener por consecuencia daños en personas u objetos.

Informaciones de seguridad elementales

1. El producto solamente debe ser utilizado trabajo y de prevención de accidentes. El
según lo indicado por el fabricante referente producto solamente debe de ser abierto por
a la situación y posición de funcionamiento personal perito autorizado. Antes de efectuar
sin que se obstruya la ventilación. Si no se trabajos en el producto o abrirlo deberá este
convino de otra manera, es para los ser desconectado de la corriente. El ajuste,
productos R&S válido lo que sigue: el cambio de partes, la manutención y la
como posición de funcionamiento se define reparación deberán ser solamente
principialmente la posición con el suelo de la efectuadas por electricistas autorizados por
caja para abajo , modo de protección IP 2X, R&S. Si se reponen partes con importancia
grado de suciedad 2, categoría de para los aspectos de seguridad (por ejemplo
sobrecarga eléctrica 2, utilizar solamente en el enchufe, los transformadores o los
estancias interiores, utilización hasta 2000 m fusibles), solamente podrán ser sustituidos
sobre el nivel del mar, transporte hasta por partes originales. Despues de cada
4.500 m sobre el nivel del mar. recambio de partes elementales para la
A menos que se especifique otra cosa en la seguridad deberá ser efectuado un control de
hoja de datos, se aplicará una tolerancia de seguridad (control a primera vista, control de
±10% sobre el voltaje nominal y de ±5% conductor protector, medición de resistencia
sobre la frecuencia nominal. de aislamiento, medición de medición de la
corriente conductora, control de
2. En todos los trabajos deberán ser tenidas en
funcionamiento).
cuenta las normas locales de seguridad de

1171.0000.42-03.00 Sheet 6
 Informaciones de seguridad

3. Como en todo producto de fabricación comprometido a valorar y señalar areas de

industrial no puede ser excluido en general trabajo en las que se corra un riesgo
de que se produzcan al usarlo elementos aumentado de exposición a radiaciones para
que puedan generar alergias, los llamados evitar riesgos.
elementos alergénicos (por ejemplo el
7. La utilización de los productos requiere
níquel). Si se producieran en el trato con
instrucciones especiales y una alta
productos R&S reacciones alérgicas, como
concentración en el manejo. Debe de
por ejemplo urticaria, estornudos frecuentes,
ponerse por seguro de que las personas que
irritación de la conjuntiva o dificultades al
manejen los productos estén a la altura de
respirar, se deberá consultar inmediatamente
los requerimientos necesarios referente a
a un médico para averigurar los motivos de
sus aptitudes físicas, psíquicas y
estas reacciones.
emocionales, ya que de otra manera no se
4. Si productos / elementos de construcción son pueden excluir lesiones o daños de objetos.
tratados fuera del funcionamiento definido de El empresario lleva la responsabilidad de
forma mecánica o térmica, pueden generarse seleccionar el personal usuario apto para el
elementos peligrosos (polvos de sustancia manejo de los productos.
de metales pesados como por ejemplo
8. Antes de la puesta en marcha del producto
plomo, berilio, níquel). La partición elemental
se deberá tener por seguro de que la tensión
del producto, como por ejemplo sucede en el
preseleccionada en el producto equivalga a
tratamiento de materias residuales, debe de
la del la red de distribución. Si es necesario
ser efectuada solamente por personal
cambiar la preselección de la tensión
especializado para estos tratamientos. La
también se deberán en caso dabo cambiar
partición elemental efectuada
los fusibles correspondientes del prodcuto.
inadecuadamente puede generar daños para
la salud. Se deben tener en cuenta las 9. Productos de la clase de seguridad I con
directivas nacionales referentes al alimentación móvil y enchufe individual de
tratamiento de materias residuales. producto solamente deberán ser conectados
para el funcionamiento a tomas de corriente
5. En el caso de que se produjeran agentes de
de contacto de seguridad y con conductor
peligro o combustibles en la aplicación del
protector conectado.
producto que debieran de ser transferidos a
un tratamiento de materias residuales, como 10. Queda prohibida toda clase de interrupción
por ejemplo agentes refrigerantes que deben intencionada del conductor protector, tanto
ser repuestos en periodos definidos, o en la toma de corriente como en el mismo
aceites para motores, deberan ser tenidas en producto. Puede tener como consecuencia el
cuenta las prescripciones de seguridad del peligro de golpe de corriente por el producto.
fabricante de estos agentes de peligro o Si se utilizaran cables o enchufes de
combustibles y las regulaciones regionales extensión se deberá poner al seguro, que es
para el tratamiento de materias residuales. controlado su estado técnico de seguridad.
Cuiden también de tener en cuenta en caso
11. Si el producto no está equipado con un
dado las prescripciones de seguridad
interruptor para desconectarlo de la red, se
especiales en la descripción del producto.
deberá considerar el enchufe del cable de
6. Ciertos productos, como por ejemplo las distribución como interruptor. En estos casos
instalaciones de radiación HF, pueden a deberá asegurar de que el enchufe sea de
causa de su función natural, emitir una fácil acceso y nabejo (según la medida del
radiación electromagnética aumentada. En cable de distribución, aproximadamente
vista a la protección de la vida en desarrollo 2 m). Los interruptores de función o
deberían ser protegidas personas electrónicos no son aptos para el corte de la
embarazadas debidamente. También las red eléctrica. Si los productos sin interruptor
personas con un bypass pueden correr están integrados en construciones o
peligro a causa de la radiación instalaciones, se deberá instalar el interruptor
electromagnética. El empresario/usario está al nivel de la instalación.

1171.0000.42-03.00 Sheet 7
 Informaciones de seguridad

12. No utilice nunca el producto si está dañado el 20. En caso de que los productos que son
cable eléctrico. Compruebe regularmente el instalados fijamente en un lugar sean sin
correcto estado de los cables de conexión a protector implementado, autointerruptor o
red. Asegure a través de las medidas de similares objetos de protección, el circuito de
protección y de instalación adecuadas de suministro de corriente deberá estar
que el cable de eléctrico no pueda ser protegido de manera que usuarios y
dañado o de que nadie pueda ser dañado productos estén suficientemente protegidos.
por él, por ejemplo al tropezar o por un golpe
21. Por favor, no introduzca ningún objeto que
de corriente.
no esté destinado a ello en los orificios de la
13. Solamente está permitido el funcionamiento caja del aparato. No vierta nunca ninguna
en redes de distribución TN/TT aseguradas clase de líquidos sobre o en la caja. Esto
con fusibles de como máximo 16 A puede producir corto circuitos en el producto
(utilización de fusibles de mayor amperaje y/o puede causar golpes de corriente, fuego
sólo previa consulta con el grupo de o heridas.
empresas Rohde & Schwarz).
22. Asegúrese con la protección adecuada de
14. Nunca conecte el enchufe en tomas de que no pueda originarse en el producto una
corriente sucias o llenas de polvo. Introduzca sobrecarga por ejemplo a causa de una
el enchufe por completo y fuertemente en la tormenta. Si no se verá el personal que lo
toma de corriente. Si no tiene en utilice expuesto al peligro de un golpe de
consideración estas indicaciones se arriesga corriente.
a que se originen chispas, fuego y/o heridas.
23. Los productos R&S no están protegidos
15. No sobrecargue las tomas de corriente, los contra el agua si no es que exista otra
cables de extensión o los enchufes de indicación, ver también punto 1. Si no se
extensión ya que esto pudiera causar fuego tiene en cuenta esto se arriesga el peligro de
o golpes de corriente. golpe de corriente para el usario o de daños
en el producto lo cual también puede llevar al
16. En las mediciones en circuitos de corriente
peligro de personas.
con una tensión de entrada de Ueff > 30 V se
deberá tomar las precauciones debidas para 24. No utilice el producto bajo condiciones en las
impedir cualquier peligro (por ejemplo que pueda producirse y se hayan producido
medios de medición adecuados, seguros, líquidos de condensación en o dentro del
limitación de tensión, corte protector, producto como por ejemplo cuando se
aislamiento etc.). desplaza el producto de un lugar frío a un
lugar caliente.
17. En caso de conexión con aparatos de la
técnica informática se deberá tener en 25. Por favor no cierre ninguna ranura u orificio
cuenta que estos cumplan los requisitos de del producto, ya que estas son necesarias
la EC950/EN60950. para la ventilación e impiden que el producto
se caliente demasiado. No pongan el
18. A menos que esté permitido expresamente,
producto encima de materiales blandos como
no retire nunca la tapa ni componentes de la
por ejemplo sofás o alfombras o dentro de
carcasa mientras el producto esté en
una caja cerrada, si esta no está
servicio. Esto pone a descubierto los cables
suficientemente ventilada.
y componentes eléctricos y puede causar
heridas, fuego o daños en el producto. 26. No ponga el producto sobre aparatos que
produzcan calor, como por ejemplo
19. Si un producto es instalado fijamente en un
radiadores o calentadores. La temperatura
lugar, se deberá primero conectar el
ambiental no debe superar la temperatura
conductor protector fijo con el conductor
máxima especificada en la hoja de datos.
protector del aparato antes de hacer
cualquier otra conexión. La instalación y la
conexión deberán ser efecutadas por un
electricista especializado.

1171.0000.42-03.00 Sheet 8
 Informaciones de seguridad

27. Baterías y acumuladores no deben de ser 31. Las asas instaladas en los productos sirven
expuestos a temperaturas altas o al fuego. solamente de ayuda para el manejo que
Guardar baterías y acumuladores fuera del solamente está previsto para personas. Por
alcance de los niños. No cortocircuitar eso no está permitido utilizar las asas para la
baterías ni acumuladores. Si las baterías o sujeción en o sobre medios de transporte
los acumuladores no son cambiados con la como por ejemplo grúas, carretillas
debida atención existirá peligro de explosión elevadoras de horquilla, carros etc. El
(atención celulas de Litio). Cambiar las usuario es responsable de que los productos
baterías o los acumuladores solamente por sean sujetados de forma segura a los medios
los del tipo R&S correspondiente (ver lista de de transporte y de que las prescripciones de
piezas de recambio). Las baterías y seguridad del fabricante de los medios de
acumuladores deben reutilizarse y no deben transporte sean tenidas en cuenta. En caso
acceder a los vertederos. Las baterías y de que no se tengan en cuenta pueden
acumuladores que contienen plomo, causarse daños en personas y objetos.
mercurio o cadmio deben tratarse como
32. Si llega a utilizar el producto dentro de un
residuos especiales. Respete en esta
vehículo, queda en la responsabilidad
relación las normas nacionales de
absoluta del conductor que conducir el
evacuación y reciclaje.
vehículo de manera segura. Asegure el
28. Por favor tengan en cuenta que en caso de producto dentro del vehículo debidamente
un incendio pueden desprenderse del para evitar en caso de un accidente las
producto agentes venenosos (gases, líquidos lesiones u otra clase de daños. No utilice
etc.) que pueden generar daños a la salud. nunca el producto dentro de un vehículo en
movimiento si esto pudiera distraer al
29. El producto puede poseer un peso elevado.
conductor. Siempre queda en la
Muévalo con cuidado para evitar lesiones en
responsabilidad absoluta del conductor la
la espalda u otras partes corporales.
seguridad del vehículo. El fabricante no
30. No sitúe el producto encima de superficies, asumirá ninguna clase de responsabilidad
vehículos, estantes o mesas, que por sus por accidentes o colisiones.
características de peso o de estabilidad no
33. Dado el caso de que esté integrado un
sean aptas para él. Siga siempre las
producto de laser en un producto R&S (por
instrucciones de instalación del fabricante
ejemplo CD/DVD-ROM) no utilice otras
cuando instale y asegure el producto en
instalaciones o funciones que las descritas
objetos o estructuras (por ejemplo paredes y
en la documentación de producto. De otra
estantes).
manera pondrá en peligro su salud, ya que el
rayo laser puede dañar irreversiblemente sus
ojos. Nunca trate de descomponer estos
productos. Nunca mire dentro del rayo laser.

1171.0000.42-03.00 Sheet 9
 Certified Quality System

DIN EN ISO 9001 : 2000

DIN EN 9100 : 2003
DIN EN ISO 14001 : 2004
DQS REG. NO 001954 QM UM

QUALITÄTSZERTIFIKAT CERTIFICATE OF QUALITY CERTIFICAT DE QUALITÉ

Sehr geehrter Kunde, Dear Customer, Cher Client,

Sie haben sich für den Kauf eines you have decided to buy a Rohde & vous avez choisi d‘acheter un produit
Rohde & Schwarz-Produktes entschie- Schwarz product. You are thus as- Rohde & Schwarz. Vous disposez
den. Hiermit erhalten Sie ein nach sured of receiving a product that is donc d‘un produit fabriqué d‘après
modernsten Fertigungsmethoden manufactured using the most modern les méthodes les plus avancées. Le
hergestelltes Produkt. Es wurde nach methods available. This product was développement, la fabrication et les
den Regeln unseres Management- developed, manufactured and tested tests respectent nos normes de ges-
systems entwickelt, gefertigt und in compliance with our quality manage- tion qualité.
geprüft. ment system standards. Le système de gestion qualité de
Das Rohde & Schwarz Management- The Rohde & Schwarz quality manage- Rohde & Schwarz a été homologué
system ist zertifiziert nach: ment system is certified according to: conformément aux normes:

DIN EN ISO 9001:2000 DIN EN ISO 9001:2000 DIN EN ISO 9001:2000

DIN EN 9100:2003 DIN EN 9100:2003 DIN EN 9100:2003
DIN EN ISO 14001:2004 DIN EN ISO 14001:2004 DIN EN ISO 14001:2004

1171.0200.11-02.00
 EC Certificate of Conformity

Certificate No.: 2005-33

This is to certify that:

Equipment type Stock No. Designation

UP300 1147.2497.03 Audio Analyzer

UP350 1147.2507.03 Audio Analyzer

complies with the provisions of the Directive of the Council of the European Union on the
approximation of the laws of the Member States
- relating to electrical equipment for use within defined voltage limits
(73/23/EEC revised by 93/68/EEC)
- relating to electromagnetic compatibility
(89/336/EEC revised by 91/263/EEC, 92/31/EEC, 93/68/EEC)
Conformity is proven by compliance with the following standards:
EN61010-1 : 2001
EN55011 : 1998 + A1 : 1999 + A2 : 2002, Klasse B
EN61326 : 1997 + A1 : 1998 + A2 : 2001 + A3 : 2003
For the assessment of electromagnetic compatibility, the limits of radio interference for Class
B equipment as well as the immunity to interference for operation in industry have been used
as a basis.
Affixing the EC conformity mark as from 2005

ROHDE & SCHWARZ GmbH & Co. KG

Mühldorfstr. 15, D-81671 München

Munich, 2005-11-03 Central Quality Management MF-QZ / Radde

1147.2497.03 CE E-1
 Customer Support
Technical support – where and when you need it
For quick, expert help with any Rohde & Schwarz equipment, contact one of our
Customer Support Centers. A team of highly qualified engineers provides telephone
support and will work with you to find a solution to your query on any aspect of the
operation, programming or applications of Rohde & Schwarz equipment.

Up-to-date information and upgrades

To keep your Rohde & Schwarz equipment always up-to-date,
please subscribe to our electronic newsletter at
http://www.rohde-schwarz.com/www/response.nsf/newsletterpreselection
or request the desired information and upgrades via email from your Customer Support
Center (addresses see below).

Feedback
We want to know if we are meeting your support needs. If you have any comments
please email us and let us know [email protected].

USA & Canada Monday to Friday (except US public holidays)

8:00 AM – 8:00 PM Eastern Standard Time (EST)
Tel. from USA 888-test-rsa (888-837-8772) (opt 2)
From outside USA +1 410 910 7800 (opt 2)
Fax +1 410 910 7801
E-mail [email protected]

East Asia Monday to Friday (except Singaporean public holidays)

8:30 AM – 6:00 PM Singapore Time (SGT)
Tel. +65 6 513 0488
Fax +65 6 846 1090
E-mail [email protected]

Rest of the World Monday to Friday (except German public holidays)

08:00 – 17:00 Central European Time (CET)
Tel. from Europe +49 (0) 180 512 42 42
From outside Europe +49 89 4129 13776
Fax +49 (0) 89 41 29 637 78
E-mail [email protected]

1171.0200.22-01.00
12 Address List

Headquarters, Plants and Subsidiaries Locations Worldwide

Headquarters Please refer to our homepage: www.rohde-schwarz.com

ROHDE&SCHWARZ GmbH & Co. KG Phone +49 (89) 41 29-0 ◆ Sales Locations
Mühldorfstraße 15 · D-81671 München Fax +49 (89) 41 29-121 64
P.O.Box 80 14 69 · D-81614 München [email protected] ◆ Service Locations
◆ National Websites
Plants
ROHDE&SCHWARZ Messgerätebau GmbH Phone +49 (83 31) 1 08-0
Riedbachstraße 58 · D-87700 Memmingen +49 (83 31) 1 08-1124
P.O.Box 16 52 · D-87686 Memmingen [email protected]

ROHDE&SCHWARZ GmbH & Co. KG Phone +49 (99 23) 8 50-0

Werk Teisnach Fax +49 (99 23) 8 50-174
Kaikenrieder Straße 27 · D-94244 Teisnach [email protected]
P.O.Box 11 49 · D-94240 Teisnach

ROHDE&SCHWARZ závod Phone +420 (388) 45 21 09

Vimperk, s.r.o. Fax +420 (388) 45 21 13
Location Spidrova 49
CZ-38501 Vimperk

ROHDE&SCHWARZ GmbH & Co. KG Phone +49 (22 03) 49-0

Dienstleistungszentrum Köln Fax +49 (22 03) 49 51-229
Graf-Zeppelin-Straße 18 · D-51147 Köln [email protected]
P.O.Box 98 02 60 · D-51130 Köln [email protected]

Subsidiaries
R&S BICK Mobilfunk GmbH Phone +49 (50 42) 9 98-0
Fritz-Hahne-Str. 7 · D-31848 Bad Münder Fax +49 (50 42) 9 98-105
P.O.Box 20 02 · D-31844 Bad Münder [email protected]

ROHDE&SCHWARZ FTK GmbH Phone +49 (30) 658 91-122

Wendenschloßstraße 168, Haus 28 Fax +49 (30) 655 50-221
D-12557 Berlin [email protected]

ROHDE&SCHWARZ SIT GmbH Phone +49 (30) 658 84-0

Am Studio 3 Fax +49 (30) 658 84-183
D-12489 Berlin [email protected]

R&S Systems GmbH Phone +49 (22 03) 49-5 23 25

Graf-Zeppelin-Straße 18 Fax +49 (22 03) 49-5 23 36
D-51147 Köln [email protected]

GEDIS GmbH Phone +49 (431) 600 51-0

Sophienblatt 100 Fax +49 (431) 600 51-11
D-24114 Kiel

HAMEG Instruments GmbH

[email protected]

Phone +49 (61 82) 800-0

12
Industriestraße 6 Fax +49 (61 82) 800-100
D-63533 Mainhausen [email protected]

1171.0200.42-02.00
R&S UP300/350 Application Range of the R&S UP300/350

1 Introduction
This chapter Chapter 1 describes the use of the R&S UP300/350, provides information on
functions and supplies tips regarding storage and transportation procedures.
Furthermore, you will find a description on how to proceed in warranty cases.
Further Chapter 2 contains an overview of the R&S UP300/350´s control elements,
information indicators, etc.
Chapter 3 describes how to put the instrument into operation.

1.1 Application Range of the R&S UP300/350

Use The R&S UP300/350 is a two-channel audio analyzer which provides a
large number of functions and measurement features at favourable price.
The R&S UP300/350 is capable of performing standard audio measure-
ments with a high degree of accuracy. The extended frequency range which
stretches beyond the audio range and up to 80 kHz permits a large number
of other T & M applications (e.g. in ultrasonic technology, RFI voltage
analysis, etc.) in addition to classic audio measurements.
The R&S UP300/350 generates and analyzes signals using digital signal
processing. Conversion into the analog signal world is performed by means
of high-end 24 bit D/A and A/D converters. This gives the measurement
features a high level of stability. The R&S UP350 also has digital inputs and
outputs.
Performance The key features are:
features
ƒ Frequency range from DC to 80 kHz
ƒ Two-channel generator with separate amplitude, phase and frequency
settings for sinewave signal
ƒ Generator generates all signals required for audio measurements:
sinewave, two-tone (DFD and Mod Dist), multi-tone, noise, polarity,
burst sinewave)
ƒ Generator sweep with up to 2 function parameters
ƒ Intrinsic distortion of 0.0003 % at 1 kHz
ƒ Simultaneous numeric display of up to 3 measurement values
ƒ Clearly structured, graphical representation of measurement results
ƒ FFT up to 16 K
ƒ Up to 3 digital filters can be activated
ƒ All filters commonly used for audio measurements are predefined
ƒ USB interface for remote control and for connecting a USB stick
Operation from a All functions and parameters can be set via menus using a keypad and a
keypad rotary knob. Current parameters and operating states are clearly arranged
on a TFT colour display.
Remote control The R&S UP300/350 is standardly equipped with a USB
from a PC interface to allow communication with a PC. All functions and parameters
can be set. Using the USB device driver, you can create your own
measurement applications in automatic measurement and test systems.

Operating Manual, 11/2007 1-35 E-1147.2759.00

Supplied Accessories R&S UP300/350

1.2 Supplied Accessories

Content 1 power cord Europe
1 country specific power cord (if different from Europe)
1 German/English manual

1.3 Warranty

ATTENTION
Equipment returned or sent in for repair must be packed in the original
packing or in packing with electrostatic and mechanical protection.

Warranty The General Terms and Conditions of Rohde & Schwarz shall apply.
conditions
Returning a You will find the addresses of your nearest Rohde & Schwarz's representa-
defective tive and of the support center at the front of the manual.
R&S UP300/350
Indicating claims We would also ask you to state clearly if you are making a claim for repairs
under the warranty under warranty, preferably by including your delivery note. Repair requests
that do not explicitly refer to the warranty will, in the first instance, incur
charges.
If your warranty has expired, we will, of course, repair your R&S UP300/350
in accordance with our general installation and service conditions.

E-1147.2759.00 1-36 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Front View

2 Control Elements

2.1 Front View

14 13 12 11 10

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1 ON/STANDBY switch 8 Signal output Ch 1 (BNC connector)

2 ON/STANDBY indicator 9 Signal input Ch 1 (BNC connector)
3 BACK/SYS key 10 Main menu selection keys
4 ESC/CANCEL key 11 Rotary knob
5 ENTER key 12 Numeric keys
6 Cursor keys 3 / 4 13 Function keys
7 Cursor keys 6 / 5 14 Screen

Operating Manual, 11/2007 2-37 E-1147.2759.00

Rear View: R&S UP300/350 R&S UP300/350

2.2 Rear View: R&S UP300/350

27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19

15 16 17 18

15 Audio monitoring output (jack) 22 Connector for external keyboard

16 Connector for external USB host 23 Input/output for external reference
(10 MHz)
17 Connector for external USB
device 24 Reserved
18 AC supply connector 25 Reserved
19 AC line fuse 26 Signal input Ch 2 (BNC connector)
20 AC line switch 27 Signal output Ch 2 (BNC connector)
21 Connector for external monitor

E-1147.2759.00 2-38 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Rear View: R&S UP350 (Digital Interface)

2.3 Rear View: R&S UP350 (Digital Interface)

35 34 33 32 31

28 29 30

28 Reserved 32 Digital input S/P DIF

29 Reserved 33 Reserved
30 Input/output for external reference 34 Optical input TOSLINK
(10 MHz)
35 Optical output TOSLINK
31 Digital output S/P DIF

Operating Manual, 11/2007 2-39 E-1147.2759.00

Unpacking the R&S UP300/350 R&S UP300/350

3 Putting the R&S UP300/350 into Operation

This chapter Chapter 3 describes how to put the R&S UP300/350 into operation and
connect an external keyboard.
Further Chapter 2 contains an overview of the R&S UP300/350‘s control elements,
information indicators, etc.
Chapter 4, “Getting started”, takes you step-by-step through a number of
simple measurements.
Chapter 7 is an in-depth description of the instrument’s interfaces.

Before putting the R&S UP300/350 into operation, make the following checks:
ƒ Ensure that the ventilation holes are free of obstructions.
ATTENTION ƒ Ensure that there are no unsuitable signal voltages connected to the
input.
ƒ The R&S UP300/350’s outputs may not be overloaded and correct
polarity must be ensured.
The instrument may be damaged if the above checks are not performed.

3.1 Unpacking the R&S UP300/350

Recommended When you unpack the R&S UP300/350, proceed as follows:
procedure
1. Remove the R&S UP300/350 from its packaging and check that the
delivery is complete using the accessory list (Ê 1-36).
2. Carefully check the R&S UP300/350 for any damage.
3. If there is damage, immediately contact the carrier who delivered the
instrument. Under these circumstances, it is essential to keep the box, in
which the R&S UP300/350 was transported, and the packaging material.

3.2 Setting up the Instrument

There is a risk of injury from sharp edges and becoming wedged
CAUTION between the setting lever and the handle.
Always be careful not to injure your fingers when installing the instrument and
adjusting its handles.

Setup instructions The R&S UP300/350 must be only assembled on a firm, level surface. The
instrument has a carrying handle which is also used for various setup options.
This handle can be moved into any position, depending on the
particular field of application.

E-1147.2759.00 3-40 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Setting up the Instrument

Setting the handle 1. Place the thumb and two fingers around the side-mounted setting lever
and loosen it with a turning action.

2. Slide the handle lengthwise while twisting it radially in steps of about 12°.

3. Close the setting lever by pressing on the outer surface.

CAUTION: There is a risk of injury from sharp edges and becoming
wedged between the setting lever and the handle.

4. Remove the protective film from the screen glass if necessary.

ATTENTION: Do not use pointed or sharp objects.

Operating Manual, 11/2007 3-41 E-1147.2759.00

Connecting the R&S UP300/350 to the AC Line R&S UP300/350

3.3 Connecting the R&S UP300/350 to the AC Line

Danger of electric shock!
The R&S UP300/350 meets the requirements for Safety Class I according to
WARNING DIN EN 61010-1/IEC 61010-1, e. g. all metal parts that can be touched or
accessed without removing the enclosure are connected to the protective
ground of the power supply network.
When connecting the instrument to the AC power supply, always use a power
cable and a socket with earthing contact.

Automatic AC line When the R&S UP300/350 is connected to the AC line, it automatically sets
voltage detection itself to the correct voltage (range: AC voltage 100 V to 240 V, AC frequency
50 Hz to 60 Hz). There is no need to set the voltage manually or change the
fuse.
Connecting the 1. Use the supplied power cord to connect the R&S UP300/350 to the AC
AC line line.
The power supply connector [18] is at the rear of the instrument.
2. Connect the power cord to the AC line.

3.4 Switching On the R&S UP300/350

Note: The AC line is still connected to the R&S UP300/350 when the
instrument is in the standby mode.

AC line switch on The R&S UP300/350 is connected to the AC line via power supply connector
the rear panel [18]. The AC line switch [20] which isolates the R&S UP300/350 from the AC
line is located next to the power supply connector.
ON/STANDBY ON operating state
switch on the After switching on by means of the AC line switch [20] at the rear panel, the
front panel R&S UP300/350 is in standby mode and the yellow LED [2] comes on. If you
press the ON/STANDBY switch [1], the instrument is switched on and the
green LED [2] comes on.
STANDBY operating state
To switch the R&S UP300/350 over from the operating mode to standby
mode, press the ON/STANDBY switch [1] for approx. 2 seconds. After
switching off the ON/STANDBY switch [1], the yellow LED [2] comes on.
Switching on 1. Press the AC line switch [20] on the rear panel in the “I” position.
the R&S UP300/350 2. Press the ON/STANDBY switch [20] on the front panel.
The green LED ON [2] comes on.

E-1147.2759.00 3-42 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Function Test

3.5 Function Test

ATTENTION The R&S UP300/350 does not contain any parts the operator can repair. Only
properly qualified technicians are allowed to repair the instrument. When
performing service procedures, follow the requirements of VDE 0701.

Function test After the R&S UP300/350 has been switched on (Ê 3-42), the green LED ON
[2] on the instrument’s front panel comes on. During booting, the "R&S Smart
Instruments" symbol appears on a blue screen background [14]. Booting the
R&S UP300/350 is completed when the waveform and menu bar (Ê 5-57)
appear.
In error case If the application display (Ê 5-57) does not appear and the red, or green LED
flash alternately, switch the R&S UP300/350 off and on. In case the error
continues, return the instrument to our service center for checking.
When the red and green LEDs [2] flash alternately, an internal error has been
recognized. Return the instrument to our service center for checking.

3.6 EMC
EMC The R&S UP300/350 meets the EMC Directive 89/336/EEC (applied
requirements standards EN 55011 Class B and EN 61326).
To prevent EMI, the R&S UP300/350 may only be operated with its enclosure
closed. Only appropriately shielded signal and control cables may be used.
External units, such as keyboard, printer or monitor that are to be connected
to the R&S UP300/350, must comply with EMC directives.
Notes on the In audio engineering, inputs and outputs of test or operating instruments are
R&S UP300/350's usually not referenced to the housing ground, but are rather floating or
interference balanced (or both). The main reason for this complex circuitry is to separate
hum loops.
The R&S UP300/350 inputs are implemented via BNC connectors; the
reference potential is at the outer conductor. If the input is floating (no
connection to the housing), interference at the input amplifier may occur at
extremely high-frequency RFI field strengths due to demodulation, which can
impair the measurement at low levels. Appropriate grounding measures on
the DUT as well as short line lengths help to reduce interference.
In case of doubt, check the spectrum of the measured signal.

Operating Manual, 11/2007 3-43 E-1147.2759.00

Connecting a DUT R&S UP300/350

3.7 Connecting a DUT

ATTENTION The analyzer inputs of the R&S UP300/350 are protected against
overvoltage, but must not be overloaded on a permanent basis (Vrms > 33 V).
If overloaded, the instrument may be damaged, and subsequent malfunctions
cannot be excluded.

Generator output Via the generator outputs Ch 1 [8] and Ch 2 [27], you can stimulate the DUT
with high-end test signals (Ê 6-98).
Analyzer input Via the analyzer inputs Ch 1 [9] and Ch 2 [26], you can measure and evaluate
the output signals of your DUT (Ê 6-212).
Audio analysis with By combining the generator and the analyzer, the R&S UP300/350 provides
the R&S UP300/350 versatile capabilities for audio analysis (Ê 6-259, 6-267, 6-268, 6-272, 6-275).

E-1147.2759.00 3-44 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Connecting an External Keyboard

3.8 Connecting an External Keyboard

ATTENTION
Connect the keyboard only when the R&S UP300/350 is off or in the
STANDBY mode, otherwise malfunctions may occur at a later time.

Use You can connect an external PC keyboard via the 6-pin PS/2 KEYB
connector [22] on the R&S UP300/350’s rear panel. The keyboard makes it
easier to enter file names. The keyboard allows data entry as well as
operation of the R&S UP300/350.
The keyboard is detected automatically when it is connected.
Key assignment for
operating the
R&S UP300/350
[ F10 ] ⇐ | ⇒ [ F11 ]

[ F1 ] ... [ F7 ] [ A ] ... [ D ]

[ Esc ] [ Å ], [ Æ ] [ 0 ] to [ 9 ], [ . ], [ - ]

[ F9 ] [ Enter ] [ Ç ], [ È ]

Operating Manual, 11/2007 3-45 E-1147.2759.00

Connecting a USB Stick R&S UP300/350

3.9 Connecting a USB Stick

ATTENTION
To ensure that the USB stick is detected by the R&S UP300/350, the stick
must be formatted in the FAT32 file system.

Use You can connect an external USB stick to the USB device interface [17] at the
rear of the R&S UP300/350. The USB stick is an extension of the internal
memory. You can use it to print into a file on the USB stick or to transfer trace
data to a PC.

E-1147.2759.00 3-46 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Generator and Analyzer Settings

4 Getting Started
This chapter Chapter 4 uses a number of simple settings to illustrate how to operate the
R&S UP300/350.
For the following example, the initial instrument setting is the default setting
(factory). This is set in the PRESET menu (Ê 6-317). The full default setup is
described in chapter 6.
Further Chapter 5 contains an in-depth explanation of the basic operating steps, for
information example selecting menus and setting parameters. The layout of the screen
and the information displayed on the screen are also described.
Chapter 6 describes all the R&S UP300/350‘s menus and the associated
functions in detail.

4.1 Generator and Analyzer Settings

Introduction In this example, the SINE generator function is set at channel Ch 1 with a
frequency of 960 Hz and at channel Ch 2 with a frequency of 2 kHz. Both
signal amplitudes have the value of Vrms = 1 V. The measurement function
FREQ DC RMS is then set and the measurement result is displayed
graphically with the aid of an FFT analysis. The parameters are set manually.
Generator settings Perform the following steps:
1. Reset the R&S UP300/350.

• Press the key.

• Using the cursor keys select from the bottom menu

bar.

• Press the key.

2. Set the sine signal in the generator.

• Press the main menu selection key.

• Using the cursor keys select from the bottom menu

bar.

• Press the key.

• Using the cursor keys select from the bottom menu

bar.

Operating Manual, 11/2007 4-47 E-1147.2759.00

Generator and Analyzer Settings R&S UP300/350

3. Set the signal frequency to 960 Hz in Ch 1 and to 2 kHz in Ch 2.

• Press the numeric key to select the channel Ch 1.

• Press the key.

• Use the numeric keys to enter the value. Finish the

entry with the unit key.

• Press the numeric key to select the channel Ch 2.

• Press the key.

• Use the numeric key to enter the value . Finish the entry with the

unit key.
4. Set the signal amplitude Vrms = 1 V.

• Press the numeric key to select the channels Ch 1 and Ch 2.

• Stay in the menu.

• Press the key.

• Use the numeric key to enter the value . Finish the entry with the

key.
Analyzer settings 1. Set the analyzer input to generator.

• Press the main menu selection key.

• Using the cursor keys select from the bottom menu

bar.

• Press the key.

• Use the to select the Gen Meas setting.

Finish the selection procedure with the key.

2. Switch on the FREQ, DC, RMS, and FFT measurement functions.
• Using the cursor keys select from the bottom menu
bar.

• Press the key.

• Press the key.

E-1147.2759.00 4-48 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Generator and Analyzer Settings

Graphical display 1. Graphical display of the measurement results.

• Press the main menu selection key.

• Using the cursor keys select from the bottom menu

bar.

• Press the key.

• Use the to select the Spectrum setting.

Finish the selection procedure with the key.

The R&S
UP300/350
display

2. Change the scaling of the X axis in the measurement diagram.

• Using the cursor keys select from the bottom menu
bar.

• Press the key.

• Use the numeric key to enter the value . Finish the entry with the

key.
The R&S
UP300/350
display

Operating Manual, 11/2007 4-49 E-1147.2759.00

Generator and Analyzer Settings R&S UP300/350

3. Position the cursor 1 on trace 2.

• Using the cursor keys select from the bottom menu
bar.
• Press the numeric key to select the channel Ch 2.

• Press the key.

• Press the key to switch on the cursor.

• Press the key.

• Use the to select the Max setting.

Finish the selection procedure with the key.

The R&S
UP300/350
display

Full-screen 1. Set the full-screen display.

display
• Press the main menu selection key.

• Use the to move the cursor in little steps.

• Use the cursor keys to position the cursor on the maximum

value.
The R&S
UP300/350
display

E-1147.2759.00 4-50 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350

5 Manual Operating Concept

5.1
This chapter Chapter 5 contains an overview of the R&S UP300/350's basic manual
operating concept. This includes a description of the keypad, screen
layout, menu operation, and how to set parameters. There is an overview of
the menus and functions at the end of this chapter.
Further information Chapter 6 contains an in-depth description of the menu functions.
Chapter 4 contains a brief introduction which takes you step-by-step through
some simple settings.

Operating Manual, 11/2007 5-51 E-1147.2759.00

Overview of Operating Steps R&S UP300/350

5.1 Overview of Operating Steps

First hierarchical The R&S UP300/350 is basically operated via hierarchically arranged menus.
level The following four main menus are simultaneously available at the first
hierarchical level:
ƒ Analyzer
ƒ Generator
ƒ Graph
ƒ System
Using the four keys ANL, GEN, GRAPH, and SYS, you can switch between
these menus. Each menu is called at the position where it has been quitted.
Second hierarchical Within the main menu, the corresponding function menus make up the
level second hierarchical level. These functions are on the horizontal softkey bar.
Using the horizontal cursor keys, you can navigate between these functions.

E-1147.2759.00 5-52 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Making Entries from the Keypad

Third hierarchical The parameter menus for each function menu are displayed on the vertical
level softkey bar at the third hierarchical level.
Some parameter menus include further submenus (fourth level).
Channel selection The keys Ch 1, Ch 2, and Ch 1&2 (the numeric keys 1, 2, and 3 are
keys assigned twice) affect the Analyzer, Generator, and Graph menus. They
control which channel is affected by a setting.
Measurement The keys START, SINGLE, and STOP (the numeric keys 4, 5, and 6 are
control keys assigned twice) control the sequence of the measurement functions.
Entry possibilities Enter a parameter value by using the numeric keypad, rotary knob, or
vertical cursor keys.

5.2 Making Entries from the Keypad

Introduction The R&S UP300/350 is operated using menus in conjunction with a keypad
and a rotary knob. The keypad comprises the following sections:
ƒ Numeric keys [12]
ƒ Main menu selection keys [10]
ƒ Cursor keys [6, 7]
ƒ Function keys [13]
ƒ Action keys [4, 5]
ƒ BACK/SYS key [3]

Operating Manual, 11/2007 5-53 E-1147.2759.00

Making Entries from the Keypad R&S UP300/350

5.2.1 Numeric Keys

Function 1 When the entry field is open, the numeric keys are used to enter numeric
parameters.
− Inserts one of the digits “0” to “9” at the cursor position.
to
− Inserts a decimal point “.” at the cursor position.

− Inserts a minus sign “-” at the cursor position.

Function 2 When the entry field is closed, the numeric keys have special functions. The
numeric keys 1, 2, and 3 are used to select the channels, and the numeric
keys 4, 5, and 6 are used to control the measurement.
− Selects channel Ch 1 for settings and measurements.

− Selects channel Ch 2 for settings and measurements.

− Selects both channels (CH 1&2) for settings and measurements.

− Starts continuous measurement.

− Starts a single measurement.

− Stops continuous measurement.

5.2.2 Main Menu Selection Keys

Function These keys represent the top operator control level and are used to switch
between the Generator menu, Analyzer menu, and Graph menu. The menu
items in the menu section of the display also change accordingly. When
switching between the main menus, the selected menu level is always shown
in its most recent state.
− Switches to the Analyzer menu.

− Switches to the Generator menu.

− Switches to the Graph menu.

− Displays the measurement diagram in the Graph menu in full-screen

mode (toggle function).

E-1147.2759.00 5-54 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Making Entries from the Keypad

5.2.3 Rotary Knob

Function As well as the numeric keys and the cursor keys, the rotary knob is also used
to set parameters.
The rotary knob has several functions:
− Incrementing (turn clockwise) or decrementing (turn
counter-clockwise) numerical instrument parameters.
− Navigating through selection fields upwards (turn clockwise) or down-
wards (turn counter-clockwise).
− Positioning markers, cursors, etc. on the screen.

5.2.4 Cursor Keys

Function As well as the numeric keys and the rotary knob, the cursor keys are used for
entering parameters and to navigate through the menus.
The cursor keys have the following functions:
− Navigating through menus and selection fields
− The 3or4 cursor keys move to change the position you want within the
numerical editing line. Use the 3or4 cursor keys to move the cursor in
the full screen graph (Ê 6-314).
− The 6 or 5 cursor keys increment or decrement numerical parameter
entries.

5.2.5 Function Keys

Function In the function area, various instrument functions are displayed depending on
which menu has been selected.
The displayed instrument functions are assigned to the seven function keys
down the right side of the screen. This means that each function key can
have a variety of functions (Ê 5-60).
When a function key is pressed, various responses can be elicited:
− Immediate activation of a function or toggling between settings
− Entry of a value or selection of a setting/function
− Entry of units
− Confirmation of a new setting and opening of a new menu item
− Branching to a submenu
− Opening and closing a selection field

Operating Manual, 11/2007 5-55 E-1147.2759.00

Making Entries from the Keypad R&S UP300/350

5.2.6 Action Keys

Function The action keys are for terminating menu-guided settings.
− This key is for closing the entry field or selection field after data has
been entered. The new value is set in the R&S UP300/350.
Note: Pressing a unit key will also terminate the entry of the setting data.
− This key is for closing the entry field or selection field, but the data that
has been entered is not saved, i.e. the old value is
retained.

5.2.7 BACK/SYS Key

Function 1: BACK If the entry field is open, the BACK/SYS [3] key can be used to correct
numeric inputs (BACK).
− If the parameter entry field is open, the key functions as the BACK key
(i.e. a value entered using the keyboard can be deleted again one
character at a time). The key has no effect if the value in the entry field
was changed using the cursor keys or rotary knob.
Function 2: SYS If the entry field is closed, the BACK/SYS key [3] will open or close the
system menu (SYS).
− When you press the key, the measurement menu is blanked out and
replaced by the SYS menu. Other functions are assigned to the function
keys [13].
− By pressing the key again, you can quit the SYS menu and accept the
new settings.

E-1147.2759.00 5-56 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Screen Display

5.3 Screen Display

Introduction The screen [14] provides on-going information about events and the
parameters associated with the selected setting functions.
The display mode for the parameters, lettering of the function keys, and type
of menu, all depend on the current settings.
Screen layout The screen is divided into three areas:
I Display area
II Menu area
III Function area

III

II

Operating Manual, 11/2007 5-57 E-1147.2759.00

Screen Display R&S UP300/350

5.3.1 Display Area

Introduction The display window of the R&S UP300/350 changes depending on the
selected main menu. In the Analyzer and Generator menus, the currently set
values are displayed in the form of a list. If you select the Graph menu, a
measurement diagram is displayed in the parameter field. With all other main
menus, the measurement values are displayed in the top part of the screen.
Display of menus: The display window contains:
ƒ Parameter list/Measurement diagram (a) (Ê 6-98, 6-212, 6-286)
ƒ Channel display (b) (Ê 6-115)
ƒ Measurement displays/Cursor parameters (c) (Ê 6-227, 6-300, 6-314)
ƒ Status line with error messages (d) (Ê 6-285, 8-347)
ƒ Selection fields that appear on screen (e) (Ê 5-64)
ƒ Entry fields that appear on screen (f) (Ê 5-65)
ƒ Traces (g) (channel Ch 1: green, channel Ch 2: yellow) (Ê 6-227)
ƒ X cursors (i) and Y cursors (h) (Ê 6-300)
Generator menu
(call with )

b
d

Analyzer menu
c
(call with )

b
d

E-1147.2759.00 5-58 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Screen Display

Graph menu
c
(call with )

b
d

g
a

Full screen
c
(call with )

a
h

Operating Manual, 11/2007 5-59 E-1147.2759.00

Screen Display R&S UP300/350

5.3.2 Menu Area

Menu display Menus for setting the setting parameters and functions are
displayed in the menu area. The selected menu is highlighted, e. g. Genera-
tor menu.

5.3.3 Function Area

Displaying the When a menu is selected, the associated instrument functions are displayed
current assignment in the function area.
The displayed instrument functions are assigned to the seven function keys
down the right-hand side of the screen. If a key in the function area does not
have any lettering, the button cannot be used. Every attempt to press the
button will be ignored. If a key has lettering in grey colour, the key has been
deactivated.

Hidden key with no meaning

Active key

Deactivated key

E-1147.2759.00 5-60 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Calling and Changing the Menus

5.4 Calling and Changing the Menus

Introduction Operating the R&S UP300/350 is menu-guided. The instrument settings
associated with any menu you select are displayed in the function area.
Pressing a function key has one of the following effects:
ƒ Switching functions on/off
ƒ Toggling a setting
ƒ Opening entries or selection fields
ƒ Opening the submenus
The 3 or 4 cursor keys [6] are used for menu navigation.
Calling or
changing menus 1. Press the main menu selection key.

2. Select a menu, e. g. , with the 3 or 4 cursor keys [6].

The menu name is highlighted and the appropriate function is assigned
to the function keys [13].

3. Press the function key in the menu.The key will

appear in the function area.
4. Select the menu with the 3 or 4 cursor keys [6].
The menu name is highlighted and the appropriate function is assigned
to the function keys [13].

Operating Manual, 11/2007 5-61 E-1147.2759.00

Calling and Changing the Menus R&S UP300/350

Note: A function key with a double arrow, e. g. , tells you that pressing
this key will call a submenu.

Calling/Quitting
1. Press the function key in the menu.
submenus
The AVERAGING submenu opens and the new functions are assigned
to the function keys [13].

2. Press the function key in the submenu.

The submenu is closed and the previous functions remain assigned to
the function keys [13].

E-1147.2759.00 5-62 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Setting the Parameters

5.5 Setting the Parameters

Choice Parameters can be set in a number of ways:
of methods
ƒ Direct selection of an instrument function (function key)
ƒ Toggling a setting
ƒ Selecting settings from selection fields
ƒ Entering numerical parameters in entry fields
The numeric keys [12], the main menu selection keys [10], rotary knob [11],
cursor keys [6, 7], function keys [13] and action keys [4, 5] can all be used to
select and enter instrument parameters.

5.5.1 Direct Selection of Instrument Functions

Introduction When you select a menu, various instrument functions are displayed in the
function area. Some instrument functions can be set directly by pressing a
function key.
Example:
Scaling the X axis 1. Press the main menu selection key.
(Ê 6-292) 2. Select the menu with the 3 or 4 cursor keys [6].

3. Press the function key in the menu.

The X axis of the measurement diagram is automatically scaled.

5.5.2 Toggling a Setting

Introduction When a menu is selected, a number of instrument functions will be displayed
in the function area. Some instrument functions can be switched on or off by
a stroke of the function key (toggling).
The function key is highlighted when the instrument function is active.
Example:
Activating/ 1. Press the main menu selection key.
Deactivating the 2. Select the menu with the 3 or 4cursor keys [6].
channel output Ch 1
(Ê 6-104)
3. Press the numeric key to select the channel Ch 1.

4. Press the function key in the menu.

The function key is highlighted and the new setting is saved. After
switching on, the output signal with the currently set parameters is
present at the output [8].

5. To deactivate the channel output Ch 1, press the function key in

the menu.
The function key is no longer highlighted and the output signal is no
longer present at the channel output.

Operating Manual, 11/2007 5-63 E-1147.2759.00

Setting the Parameters R&S UP300/350

5.5.3 Selecting Settings

Introduction When you select a menu, a number of instrument functions are displayed in
the function area. If certain function keys are then pressed, a selection field is
displayed in the diagram area. You can then choose and activate any of the
settings offered for selection.
The function key you select is highlighted.
Example:
Selecting the 1. Press the main menu selection key.
signal coupling 2. Select the menu with the 3 or 4 cursor keys [6].
(Ê 6-219)
3. Press the function key in the menu.
A selection field containing the available settings is displayed. The
default setting is “AC“.

4. Select the signal coupling with the rotary knob [11].

5. Press the ENTER key [5] to confirm the selection field.
The new value is set and saved and the field will be closed.
If you want to keep the old setting, close the selection field with the
ESC/CANCEL key [4] or press the function key again.

Note: If there are more than 12 options available, a scroll bar is displayed on
the right side of the selection field.

E-1147.2759.00 5-64 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Setting the Parameters

5.5.4 Entering Numerical Parameters

Introduction When you select a menu, a number of instrument functions will be displayed
in the function area. If you press certain function keys, an entry field will be
displayed in the menu area.
The function key you select is highlighted.
There are two ways of entering numerical parameters:
ƒ Entry of a number with the numeric keys
ƒ Change of a number with the cursor keys and rotary knob

5.5.4.1 Entry with the Numeric Keys

Example:
Entering a 1. Press the main menu selection key.
signal frequency 2. Select the menu with the 3 or 4 cursor keys [6].
(Ê 6-116)
3. Press the function key in the menu.

4. Select the menu with the 3 or 4 cursor keys [6].

5. Press the function key in the menu.

An entry field containing the current setting is displayed. At the same
time, the function keys are assigned various units of measurement.

Entering 6. Overwrite the old value, e. g. with 21.5 kHz, with the numeric keys [12].
a new value
Ö
Note: If a numeric key is pressed after the entry field is brought up on the
screen, the old value will be erased. However, a complete new value
must now be entered using the numeric keys.
With the SYS/BACK key [3], a value entered using the keyboard can be
deleted again one character at a time.

Operating Manual, 11/2007 5-65 E-1147.2759.00

Setting the Parameters R&S UP300/350

Terminating
7. a) Press the function key to terminate the entry.
entries
The R&S UP300/350 sets the value that has been set numerically using
the new unit. The entry window is closed.

b) Press the key [5] to terminate the entry.

The R&S UP300/350 sets the value that has been set numerically, but
with the old unit. The entry window is closed.

Note: If a parameter is unitless or always has the same unit, you can
terminate the entry with the ENTER key.

c) Press the key [4] to cancel the entry.

The old value is retained. The entry window is closed.

Invalid If the entered value is outside the permissible range, the largest or smallest
parameter entry permissible value is coerced and the message “Value is out of range"
appears in the status line.
Using another unit
1. Press the function key in the menu.
of measure to
display a value An entry field containing the current setting is displayed. At the same
time, the function keys are assigned various units of measurement.

2. Press the function key to display the value in Hz.

Ö
The value is displayed using the new unit. The input window is not
closed.

Note: In the parameter list, values from 1 to 999 are displayed in front of the
decimal point. In other words, if the digit sequence <5000> and the unit <Hz>
are entered, <5.000 kHz> appears in the display.

E-1147.2759.00 5-66 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Setting the Parameters

5.5.4.2 Entry with the Cursor Keys and Rotary Knob

Example:
Entering a signal 1. Press the main menu selection key.
frequency 2. Select the menu with the 3 or 4 cursor keys [6].
(Ê 6-115)
3. Press the function key in the menu.

4. Select the menu with the 3 or 4cursor keys [6].

5. Press the function key in the menu.

An entry field containing the current setting is displayed. At the same
time, the function keys are assigned various units of measurement.

Entering 6. Using the 3 and 4 cursor keys [6], position the cursor on a decimal
a new value, place in the entry field.
e. g. 1.5 kHz
3× Ö
7. a) Press the 6 or 5 cursor keys [7] until you obtain the value you
want.
Pressing the 5 cursor key once increments the value by one; pressing
the 6 cursor key once decrements the value by one.

5× Ö
b) Turn the rotary knob [11] until you obtain the value you want.
Turning clockwise increases the value; turning counter-clockwise
reduces the value.

5× Ö
Note: In both cases, there is a carry associated with incrementation or
decrementation. In other words, if a 9 digit is incremented or a 0 digit
decremented, a carry is added to, or subtracted from the next highest
digit.

Operating Manual, 11/2007 5-67 E-1147.2759.00

Setting the Parameters R&S UP300/350

Terminating
8. a) Press the function key to terminate the entry.
entries
The new unit is displayed and the input window is closed.

b) Press the key [5] to terminate the entry.

The R&S UP300/350 sets the value that has been set numerically but
with the old unit. The entry window is closed.

Note: If a parameter is unitless or always has the same unit, you can set
and terminate the entry only with the ENTER key.

c) Press the key [4] to cancel the entry.

The old value is retained. The entry window is closed.

Invalid If the limit value is reached, the numeric value in the entry window remains
parameter entry the same and is neither increased nor decreased. No error message is
issued.
Using another unit
1. Press the function key in the menu.
of measure to
display a value An entry field containing the current setting is displayed. At the same
time, the function keys are assigned various units of measurement.

2. Press the function key to display the value in Hz.

Ö
The numerically set value is displayed using the new unit. The input
window is not closed.

Note: In the parameter list, values from 1 to 999 are displayed in front of the
decimal point. In other words, if the digit sequence <5000> and the unit <Hz>
are entered, <5.000 kHz> appears in the display.

E-1147.2759.00 5-68 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Overview of all Menus and Functions

5.6 Overview of all Menus and Functions

5.6.1 Generator

5.6.1.1 FUNCTIONS Menu

Function key
assignment

Display the next set of functions.

Sinewave signal (Ê 6-114)

Noise signal (Ê 6-119)

Multi-sinewave signal (Ê 6-122)

Sine burst signal (Ê 6-132)

Two-tone signal for measurement of modulation distortions (Ê 6-138)

Difference frequency signal (Ê 6-144)

Display the previous set of functions.

Polarity test signal (Ê 6-150)

DC voltage component (Ê 6-152)

Sweeped sinewave signal and measured RMS (Ê 6-154)

Sweeped sinewave signal and measured RMS Selective (Ê 6-171)

Sweeped sinewave signal and measured RMS Selective (Ê 6-190)

5.6.1.2 SINE Menu

Function key
assignment

Activate/Deactivate the frequency coupling of the channels. (Ê 6-116)

Enter the signal frequency of the active channel. (Ê 6-115)

Operating Manual, 11/2007 5-69 E-1147.2759.00

Overview of all Menus and Functions R&S UP300/350

Enter the phase difference between the channels. (Ê 6-116)

Enter the signal amplitude. (Ê 6-117)

Enter the reference value. (Ê 6-118)

5.6.1.3 NOISE Menu

Function key
assignment

Select the amplitude distribution function. (Ê 6-120)

Enter the signal amplitude. (Ê 6-120)

Enter the reference value. (Ê 6-118)

5.6.1.4 MULTISINE Menu

Function key
assignment

Enter the number of sinewave tones. (Ê 6-123)

Open the submenu:

Configuration of signal parameters
Exit the submenu.

Enter the frequency. (Ê 6-124)

Enter the start phase. (Ê 6-125)

Enter the relative signal amplitude. (Ê 6-125)

Enter the frequency resolution. (Ê 6-126)

Enter the reference value for the signal. (Ê 6-128)

Activate/Deactivate amplitude modulation. (Ê6-129)

Enter the AM frequency. (Ê 6-130)

Enter the AM modulation depth. (Ê 6-131)

E-1147.2759.00 5-70 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Overview of all Menus and Functions

5.6.1.5 SINE BURST Menu

Function key
assignment

Enter the signal frequency. (Ê 6-133)

Enter the high-level time. (Ê 6-134)

Enter the interval time. (Ê 6-135)

Enter the high-level amplitude. (Ê 6-136)

Enter the low-level amplitude. (Ê 6-137)

Enter the reference value. (Ê 6-118)

5.6.1.6 MOD DIST Menu

Function key
assignment

Enter the useful signal frequency. (Ê 6-140)

Enter the interference signal frequency. (Ê 6-140)

Enter the ratio between interference amplitude and useful amplitude.(Ê 6-142)

Enter the total RMS of the signal. (Ê 6-143)

Enter the reference value. (Ê 6-118)

5.6.1.7 DFD Menu

Function key
assignment

Measurement acc. to IEC 118: Enter the upper DFD frequency. (Ê 6-145)

Measurement acc. to IEC 268: Enter the center frequency. (Ê 6-145)

Enter the difference frequency. (Ê 6-145, 6-147)

Enter the total RMS of the signal. (Ê 6-149)

Operating Manual, 11/2007 5-71 E-1147.2759.00

Overview of all Menus and Functions R&S UP300/350

Enter the reference value. (Ê 6-118)

5.6.1.8 POLARITY TEST Menu

Function key
assignment

Enter the signal amplitude. (Ê 6-151)

Enter the reference value. (Ê 6-118)

5.6.1.9 DC OFFSET Menu

Function key
assignment

Enter the DC offset. (Ê 6-153)

E-1147.2759.00 5-72 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Overview of all Menus and Functions

5.6.1.10 SWEEP RMS Menu

Function key
assignment

Select the sweep mode. (Ê 6-156)

Set the measurement time. (Ê 6-157)

Open the submenu:

Set the sweep parameters for frequency.
Exit the submenu.

Enter the start value. (Ê 6-159)

Enter the stop value. (Ê 6-159)

Select scaling of sweep steps (Lin/Log). (Ê 6-161)

Enter the number of reading points. (Ê 6-161)

Enter the step size. (Ê 6-161)

Enter the measurement delay. (Ê 6-163)

Open the submenu:

Set the sweep parameters for amplitude.
Exit the submenu.

Enter the start value. (Ê 6-165)

Enter the stop value. (Ê 6-165)

Select scaling of sweep steps (Lin/Log). (Ê 6-161)

Enter the number of reading points. (Ê 6-167)

Enter the step size. (Ê 6-167)

Enter the measurement delay. (Ê 6-168)

Activate/Deactivate the filter. (Ê 6-232)

Select the unit for the level display. (Ê 6-169)

Operating Manual, 11/2007 5-73 E-1147.2759.00

Overview of all Menus and Functions R&S UP300/350

5.6.1.11 SWEEP RMS SELECTIVE Menu

Function key
assignment

Select the sweep mode. (Ê 6-156)

Select the measurement bandwidth. (Ê 6-174)

Open the submenu:

Set the sweep parameters for frequency.
Exit the submenu.

Enter the start value. (Ê 6-159)

Enter the stop value. (Ê 6-159)

Select scaling of sweep steps (Lin/Log). (Ê 6-161)

Enter the number of reading points. (Ê 6-161)

Enter the step size. (Ê 6-161)

Enter the measurement delay. (Ê 6-163)

Open the submenu:

Set the sweep parameters for amplitude.
Exit the submenu.

Enter the start value. (Ê 6-165)

Enter the stop value. (Ê 6-165)

Select scaling of sweep steps (Lin/Log). (Ê 6-161)

Enter the number of reading points. (Ê 6-167)

Enter the step size. (Ê 6-167)

Enter the measurement delay. (Ê 6-168)

Activate/Deactivate the filter. (Ê 6-232)

Select the unit for the level display. (Ê 6-169)

E-1147.2759.00 5-74 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Overview of all Menus and Functions

5.6.1.12 SWEEP THD Menu

Function key
assignment

Select the sweep mode. (Ê 6-192)

Select the measurement mode. (Ê 6-193)

Set the measurement time. (Ê 6-195)

Open the submenu:

Set the sweep parameters for frequency.
Exit the submenu.

Enter the start value. (Ê 6-197)

Enter the stop value. (Ê 6-197)

Select scaling of sweep steps (Lin/Log). (Ê 6-198)

Enter the number of reading points. (Ê 6-198)

Enter the step size. (Ê 6-198)

Enter the measurement delay. (Ê 6-201)

Open the submenu:

Set the sweep parameters for amplitude.
Exit the submenu.

Enter the start value. (Ê 6-203)

Enter the stop value. (Ê 6-203)

Select scaling of sweep steps (Lin/Log). (Ê 6-205)

Enter the number of reading points. (Ê 6-206)

Enter the step size. (Ê 6-206)

Enter the measurement delay. (Ê 6-207)

Activate/Deactivate the filter. (Ê 6-232)

Select the unit for the level display. (Ê 6-208)

Operating Manual, 11/2007 5-75 E-1147.2759.00

Overview of all Menus and Functions R&S UP300/350

5.6.1.13 MONITOR Menu

Function key
assignment

Switch the audio monitoring output on/off. (Ê 6-210)

Select the signal source. (Ê 6-211)

Enter the volume. (Ê 6-211)

5.6.1.14 CONFIG Menu

Function key
assignment

Select the generator type (digital) (R&S UP350 only). (Ê 6-101)

Select the bandwidth of the generator. (Ê 6-102)

Select the reference potential of the output signal. (Ê 6-103)

Switch the generator output on/off. (Ê 6-104)

Select the level range switching mode. (Ê 6-105)

Select the generator type (analog) (R&S UP350 only). (Ê 6-101)

Select the sample frequency of the output signal (R&S UP350 only). (Ê 6-107)

Enter the offset of the sample frequency (R&S UP350 only). (Ê 6-108)

Set the validity bit (R&S UP350 only). (Ê 6-108)

Select the word size of the output signal (R&S UP350 only). (Ê 6-109)

Select the interface protocol (R&S UP350 only). (Ê 6-109)

E-1147.2759.00 5-76 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Overview of all Menus and Functions

5.6.2 Analyzer

5.6.2.1 FUNCTIONS Menu

Function key
assignment

Display the next set of functions.

Measure the frequency, DC voltage, and RMS. (Ê 6-228)

Measure the peak value. (Ê 6-237)

Measure the quasi-peak value. (Ê 6-243)

Selective RMS measurement (Ê 6-246)

Frequency-domain display mode of the input signal (Ê 6-251)

Measure distortion (THD, THD+N, SINAD, Noise). (Ê 6-259)

Display the previous set of functions.

Perform the polarity test (Ê 6-267)

Measure the difference frequency distortion. (Ê 6-268)

Measure the phase difference between channels Ch 1 and Ch 2. (Ê 6-272)

Measure modulation distortion. (Ê 6-275)

Protocol analysis (R&S UP350 only) (Ê 6-278)

Measure the sample frequency (R&S UP350 only). (Ê 6-281)

Operating Manual, 11/2007 5-77 E-1147.2759.00

Overview of all Menus and Functions R&S UP300/350

5.6.2.2 FREQUENCY, DC, RMS Menu

Function key
assignment

Select the measurement time. (Ê 6-230)

Select the measurement result display. (Ê 6-232)

(RMS & FREQ, or RMS & DC)
Activate/Deactivate the filter. (Ê 6-232)

Open the submenu:

Set the averaging mode.
Exit the submenu.

Activate/Deactivate the averaging. (Ê 6-233)

Enter the averaging factor. (Ê 6-233)

Select the unit for the level display. (Ê 6-235)

5.6.2.3 PEAK Menu

Function key
assignment

Select the measurement method. (Ê 6-239)

Set the interval time. (Ê 6-240)

Activate/Deactivate the filter. (Ê 6-232)

Select the unit for the level display. (Ê 6-241)

E-1147.2759.00 5-78 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Overview of all Menus and Functions

5.6.2.4 QUASI PEAK Menu

Function key
assignment

Select the interval time. (Ê 6-245)

Activate/Deactivate the filter. (Ê 6-232)

Select the unit for the level display. (Ê 6-241)

5.6.2.5 RMS SELECTIVE Menu

Function key
assignment

Select the tuning mode. (Ê 6-247)

Enter the measurement frequency. (Ê 6-247)

Select the measurement bandwidth. (Ê 6-248)

Activate/Deactivate the filter. (Ê 6-232)

Open the submenu: (Ê 6-265)

Set the POST FFT.
Exit the submenu.

Activate/Deactivate the FFT. (Ê 6-266)

Set the FFT size. (Ê 6-253)

Set the FFT window. (Ê 6-253)

Select the unit for the level display. (Ê 6-266)

Operating Manual, 11/2007 5-79 E-1147.2759.00

Overview of all Menus and Functions R&S UP300/350

5.6.2.6 FFT Menu

Function key
assignment

Set the FFT size. (Ê 6-253)

Set the FFT window. (Ê 6-253)

Activate/Deactivate the filter. (Ê 6-232)

Open the submenu:

Set the averaging mode.
Exit the submenu.

Activate/Deactivate the averaging. (Ê 6-255)

Enter the averaging factor. (Ê 6-255)

Select the unit for the level display. (Ê 6-257)

5.6.2.7 THD Menu

Function key
assignment

Select the measurement mode. (Ê 6-261)

Select the frequency search mode. (Ê 6-262)

Select the measurement time. (Ê 6-264)

Activate/Deactivate the filter. (Ê 6-232)

Open the submenu:

Set the POST FFT.
Exit the submenu.

Activate/Deactivate the FFT. (Ê 6-266)

Set the FFT size. (Ê 6-253)

Set the FFT window. (Ê 6-253)

Select the unit for the level display. (Ê 6-266)

E-1147.2759.00 5-80 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Overview of all Menus and Functions

5.6.2.8 DFD Menu

Function key
assignment

Select the difference frequency distortions (Ê 6-271)

and measurement standard.
Activate/Deactivate the filter. (Ê 6-232)

Open the submenu:

Set the POST FFT.
Exit the submenu.

Activate/Deactivate the FFT. (Ê 6-266)

Set the FFT size. (Ê 6-253)

Set the FFT window. (Ê 6-253)

Select the unit for the level display. (Ê 6-266)

5.6.2.9 PHASE Menu

Function key
assignment

Select the type of signal search. (Ê 6-273)

Operating Manual, 11/2007 5-81 E-1147.2759.00

Overview of all Menus and Functions R&S UP300/350

5.6.2.10 MOD DIST Menu

Function key
assignment

ActivateDeactivate the filter. (Ê 6-232)

Open the submenu:

Set the POST FFT.
Exit the submenu.

Activate/Deactivate the FFT. (Ê 6-266)

Set the FFT size. (Ê 6-253)

Set the FFT window. (Ê 6-253)

Select the unit for the level display. (Ê 6-266)

5.6.2.11 PROTOCOL Menu

Function key
assignment

Enter the measurement time. (Ê 6-280)

5.6.2.12 SAMPLE RATE Menu

Function key
assignment

Enter the measurement time. (Ê 6-280)

E-1147.2759.00 5-82 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Overview of all Menus and Functions

5.6.2.13 FILTER Menu

Function key
assignment

Select filter 1. (Ê 6-283)

Select filter 2. (Ê 6-283)

Select filter 3. (Ê 6-283)

5.6.2.14 CONFIG Menu

Function key
assignment

Select the analyzer type (digital). (Ê 6-215)

Select the bandwidth of the analyzer. (Ê 6-216)

Select the reference potential of the input signal. (Ê 6-217)

Select the signal source. (Ê 6-218)

Select the signal coupling. (Ê 6-219)

Select the measurement range selection mode. (Ê 6-220)

Select the measurement channel. (Ê 6-221)

Select the analyzer type (analog) (R&S UP350). (Ê 6-215)

Select the sample frequency of the input signal (R&S UP350). (Ê 6-222)

Select the input (R&S UP350) (Ê 6-223)

Select the valid number of bits in the input signal (R&S UP350). (Ê 6-223)

Select the measurement channel. (Ê 6-221)

Operating Manual, 11/2007 5-83 E-1147.2759.00

Overview of all Menus and Functions R&S UP300/350

5.6.3 Graph Menu

5.6.3.1 GRAPH MODE Menu

Function key
assignment

Select the display parameters. (Ê 6-287)

Select the display mode. (Ê 6-290)

5.6.3.2 X AXIS Menu

Function key
assignment

Activate automatic display area scaling. (Ê 6-292)

Manual display area scaling:

Enter the upper limit of the display area. (Ê 6-292)
Manual display area scaling:
Enter the lower limit of the display area. (Ê 6-292)
Select the display mode. (Ê 6-299)

5.6.3.3 Y AXIS Menu

Function key
assignment

Activate automatic display area scaling. (Ê 6-296)

Manual display area scaling:

Enter the upper limit of the display area. (Ê 6-296)
Manual display area scaling:
Enter the lower limit of the display area. (Ê 6-296)
Select the display mode. (Ê 6-299)

E-1147.2759.00 5-84 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Overview of all Menus and Functions

5.6.3.4 CURSORS Menu

Function key
assignment

Open the submenu:

Configure cursor 1 on the X axis.
Exit the submenu.

Activate/Deactivate the cursor. (Ê 6-302)

Position the cursor manually. (Ê 6-305)

Assign a cursor to a trace (Ch 1 or Ch 2). (Ê 6-303)

Zoom the display area. (Ê 6-307)

Position a cursor on the maximum value. (Ê 6-303)

Open the submenu:

Configure cursor 2 on the X axis.
Exit the submenu.

Activate/Deactivate the cursor. (Ê 6-302)

Position the cursor manually. (Ê 6-305)

Assign a cursor to a trace (Ch 1 or Ch 2). (Ê 6-303)

Zoom the display area. (Ê 6-307)

Position the cursor on the maximum value. (Ê 6-303)

Open the submenu:

Configure cursor 1 on the Y axis.
Exit the submenu.

Activate/Deactivate the cursor. (Ê 6-310)

Position the cursor manually. (Ê 6-311)

Zoom the display area. (Ê 6-312)

Operating Manual, 11/2007 5-85 E-1147.2759.00

Overview of all Menus and Functions R&S UP300/350

Open the submenu:

Configure cursor 2 on the Y axis.
Exit the submenu.

Activate/Deactivate the cursor. (Ê 6-310)

Position the cursor manually. (Ê 6-311)

Zoom the display area. (Ê 6-312)

E-1147.2759.00 5-86 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Overview of all Menus and Functions

5.6.4 System menu (SYS Menu)

5.6.4.1 PRESET Menu

Function key
assignment

Call the instrument setting. (Ê 6-318)

Select the instrument setting. (Ê 6-318)

Start the remote control manually. (Ê 6-319)

5.6.4.2 STATE Menu

Function key
assignment

Configuration settings of the analyzer and generator. (Ê 6-320)

5.6.4.3 FILE Menu

Function key
assignment

Save a user-defined setting. (Ê 6-323)

Load a user-defined setting. (Ê 6-323)

Print out a screenshot, save the measurement results. (Ê 6-325)

Operating Manual, 11/2007 5-87 E-1147.2759.00

Overview of all Menus and Functions R&S UP300/350

5.6.4.4 CONFIG Menu

Function key
assignment

Set the date and time. (Ê 6-329)

Select an internal or external reference source. (Ê 6-331)

Configure the instrument interfaces. (Ê 6-332)

Set the screen saver mode. (Ê 6-334)

Select an internal or external monitor. (Ê 6-336)

5.6.4.5 SERVICE Menu

Function key
assignment

Perform a selftest. (Ê 6-337)

5.6.4.6 INFO Menu

Function key
assignment

Display the module data. (Ê 6-339)

Display the instrument statistics. (Ê 6-339)

Display the system messages. (Ê 6-340)

5.6.4.7 CALIB Menu

Function key
assignment

Perform the automatic calibration. (Ê 6-341)

E-1147.2759.00 5-88 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Factory Default Settings

6 Working with the R&S UP300/350

This chapter Chapter 6 fully explains all the functions of the audio analyzer, and the
application of these functions. The menus are described in the same
sequence as the procedure for configuring and producing an output signal:
ƒ Factory default settings
ƒ Configuration of the generator
ƒ Configuration of the analyzer
ƒ Graphical display of the measurement results
Further information The operating concept is explained in chapter 5, which also contains an
overview of the menus and functions.
The index at the end of this manual will also help you find the information you
want.

6.1 Factory Default Settings

Switching on for the When the R&S UP300/350 (Ê 3-42) is switched on, the settings used when
first time the instrument was last switched off are restored. When you switch on for the
first time and if the "Factory" setting has been selected as the PRESET
default setting (Ê 6-323), the factory default settings are activated.

Operating Manual, 11/2007 6-89 E-1147.2759.00

Factory Default Settings R&S UP300/350

6.1.1 Generator

Note: All level parameters of the individual generator functions as well as the
frequency at SINE can be set channel independently (Ch 1, Ch 2). These
parameters are listed in two columns in the table below the “Settings”. The
function parameters applying to both channels (Ch 1&2) are listed in one
column.

Function Parameter Settings

Channel Ch 1 Channel Ch 2
SINE f1 = f2 Off
FREQ 1 kHz 1 kHz
AMPL 100 mV (0.1 FS) 100 mV (0.1 FS)
PHASE DIFF. 0 grd
REF. VALUE 1 mV 1 mV

NOISE PDF Rectangular

AMPL 100 mV (0.1 FS) 100 mV (0.1 FS)
REF. VALUE 1 mV 1 mV

MULTISINE NUMBER OF SINE 1

SPACING 100.058 Hz
REF. VALUE 100 mV (0.1 FS) 100 mV (0.1 FS)
AM STATE Off
AM FREQ 10 Hz
AM DEPTH 10 %

SINE BURST GEN FREQ 1 kHz

HIGH LEVEL TIME 500 ms
INTERVAL 1s
HIGH LEVEL AMPL 100 mV (0.1 FS) 100 mV (0.1 FS)
LOW LEVEL AMPL 0 0
REF. VALUE 1 mV 1 mV

MOD DIST UPPER FREQ 7 kHz

LOWER FREQ 60 Hz
AMPL RATIO 4 4
TOTAL RMS 100 mV (0.1 FS) 100 mV (0.1 FS)

E-1147.2759.00 6-90 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Factory Default Settings

Function Parameter Settings

Channel Ch 1 Channel Ch 2
REF. VALUE 1 mV 1 mV

DFD UPPER FREQ 8.100 kHz

MEAN FREQ 8.000 kHz
DIFF FREQ 200 Hz
TOTAL RMS 100 mV (0.1 FS) 100 mV (0.1 FS)
REF. VALUE 1 mV 1 mV

POLARITY TEST PEAK 100 mV (0.1 FS) 100 mV (0.1 FS)

REF. VALUE 1 mV 1 mV

DC OFFSET DC OFFSET 100 mV (0.1 FS) 100 mV (0.1 FS)

SWEEP RMS MODE FREQ SWEEP

MEAS TIME 10 ms
FILTER Off
UNIT V (FS)
REF. VALUE 1 mV
PARAM FREQ
START 10 Hz
STOP 22.139 kHz
POINTS 100
STEP SIZE 223.470 Hz
SPACING Linear
MEAS DELAY 0s
PARAM AMPL
START 100 mV (0.1 FS)
STOP 7.495 V (0.999 FS)
POINTS 100
STEP SIZE 74.7 mV (0.0998)
SPACING Linear
MEAS DELAY 200 ms

SWEEP RMS Sel. MODE FREQ SWEEP

BANDWIDTH 1/3 octave

Operating Manual, 11/2007 6-91 E-1147.2759.00

Factory Default Settings R&S UP300/350

Function Parameter Settings

Channel Ch 1 Channel Ch 2
FILTER Off
UNIT V (FS)
REF. VALUE 1 mV
PARAM FREQ
START 10 Hz
STOP 22.139 kHz
POINTS 100
STEP SIZE 223.470 Hz
SPACING Linear
MEAS DELAY 0s
PARAM AMPL
START 100 mV (0.1 FS)
STOP 7.495 V (0.999 FS)
POINTS 100
STEP SIZE 74.7 mV (0.0998)
SPACING Linear
MEAS DELAY 200 ms

SWEEP THD MODE FREQ SWEEP

MEAS MODE THD (All.Harm.)
HARMONICS
MEAS TIME 10 ms
FILTER Off
UNIT dB
PARAM FREQ
START 10 Hz
STOP 22.139 kHz
POINTS 100
STEP SIZE 223.470 Hz
SPACING Linear
MEAS DELAY 0s
PARAM AMPL
START 100 mV (0.1 FS)
STOP 7.495 V (0.999 FS)
POINTS 100

E-1147.2759.00 6-92 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Factory Default Settings

Function Parameter Settings

Channel Ch 1 Channel Ch 2
STEP SIZE 74.7 mV (0.0998)
SPACING Linear
MEAS DELAY 200 ms

MONITOR OUTPUT Off

SOURCE Generator
VOLUME 20 % 20 %

CONFIG ANALOG BANDWIDTH 22 kHz

COMMON Floating Floating
OUTPUT On On
RANGE MODE Auto Auto

CONFIG DIGITAL SAMPLE RATE 44.1 kHz

FS OFFSET 0 ppm
VALIDITY BIT valid
NO. OF BITS 24 24
PROTOCOL Consumer

Operating Manual, 11/2007 6-93 E-1147.2759.00

Factory Default Settings R&S UP300/350

6.1.2 Analyzer

Note: Some parameters of the analyzer functions (FILTER, CONFIG) can be

set channel independently (Ch 1, Ch 2). These parameters are listed in two
columns in the table below the “Settings”. The function parameters applying
to both channels (Ch 1&2) are listed in one column.

Function Parameter Settings

Channel Ch 1 Channel Ch 2
RMS DC FREQ MEAS TIME Auto fast
FILTER Off
AVG MODE Off
AVG FACTOR 1
UNIT Ch1 V (FS)
UNIT Ch2 V (FS)
REF. VALUE Ch1 1 mV (0.001 FS)
REF. VALUE Ch2 1 mV (0.001 FS)

PEAK MEAS MODE Peak pos

INTERVAL TIME 250 ms
FILTER Off
AVG MODE Off
AVG FACTOR 1
UNIT Ch1 V (FS)
UNIT Ch2 V (FS)
REF. VALUE Ch1 1 mV (0.001 FS)
REF. VALUE Ch2 1 mV (0.001 FS)

QUASI PEAK INTERVAL TIME 3s

FILTER Off
UNIT Ch1 V (FS)
UNIT Ch2 V (FS)
REF. VALUE Ch1 1 mV (0.001 FS)
REF. VALUE Ch2 1 mV (0.001 FS)

RMS SELECTIVE TUNING MODE Auto

CENTER FREQ 1 kHz
BANDWIDTH 1/3 octave

E-1147.2759.00 6-94 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Factory Default Settings

Function Parameter Settings

Channel Ch 1 Channel Ch 2
FILTER Off
POST FFT Off
FFT SIZE 1024
WINDOW TYPE Rife Vincent 2
UNIT Ch1 V (FS)
UNIT Ch2 V (FS)
REF. VALUE Ch1 1 mV (0.001 FS)
REF. VALUE Ch2 1 mV (0.001 FS)

FFT FFT SIZE 1024

WINDOW TYPE Rife Vincent 2
FILTER Off
AVG MODE Off
AVG FACTOR 1
UNIT dBV (dBFS)
REF. VALUE 1 mV

THD MEAS MODE THD (All Harm.)

HARMONICS
FREQ MODE Auto
MEAS TIME Fast
FILTER Off
POST FFT Off
FFT SIZE 1024
WINDOW TYPE Rife Vincent 2
UNIT dB

POLARITY STATUS On

DFD MEAS MODE d2 (IEC 268)

FILTER Off
POST FFT Off
FFT SIZE 1024
WINDOW TYPE Rife Vincent 2
UNIT dB

Operating Manual, 11/2007 6-95 E-1147.2759.00

Factory Default Settings R&S UP300/350

Function Parameter Settings

Channel Ch 1 Channel Ch 2
PHASE MEAS MODE Auto tuning
FREQ 1 kHz

MOD DIST FILTER Off

POST FFT Off
FFT SIZE 1024
WINDOW TYPE Rife Vincent 2
UNIT dB

PROTOCOL MEAS TIME 100 ms

SAMPLE RATE MEAS TIME 100 ms

FILTER FILTER NO. 1 Off Off

FILTER NO. 2 Off Off
FILTER NO. 3 Off Off

CONFIG ANALOG BANDWIDTH 22 kHz

COMMON Floating Floating
INPUT On On
COUPLING AC
RANGE MODE Auto Auto
CHANNEL Ch 1&2

CONFIG DIGITAL SAMPLE RATE 44.1 kHz

INPUT S/P DIF
NO. OF BITS 24 24
CHANNEL Ch 1&2

E-1147.2759.00 6-96 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Factory Default Settings

6.1.3 Graph

Function Parameter Settings

GRAPH MODE GRAPH TYPE Spectrum
GRAPH MODE Overwrite
X AXIS AUTO SCALING On
(MAX,MIN,LOG)
Y AXIS AUTO SCALING On
(MAX,MIN,LOG)
CURSORS X1, X2, STATUS Off
POSITION -
LOCK TO Ch1&2
PLOT
ZOOM -
FIND -
Y1,Y2 STATUS Off
POSITION -
ZOOM -

6.1.4 System

Function Parameter Settings

PRESET PRESET FACTORY
FILE PRINT HP DeskJet mono
CONFIG REFERENCE Intern
USB MASTER AUTO
MONITOR Intern

Operating Manual, 11/2007 6-97 E-1147.2759.00

Generator R&S UP300/350

6.2 Generator
Introduction The generator is used to generate all the signals required for the audio
measurements. These signal functions can be generated in an analog or
digital form (R&S UP350 only). Acoustic analysis of the output signal is pos-
sible at the audio monitoring output.
Activating the 1. The instrument has to be in local mode.
Generator menu 2. Close the SYS menu if opened.
3. Close every entry field if opened.

4. Press the main menu selection key.

The Generator menu is displayed:

Menus for The menus used to set the generator functions are displayed in the menu
configuring and area (Ê 6-112).
setting output
parameters
Select the signal functions. (Ê 6-110)

Reservation for parameter menu of the 1st activated function

Reservation for parameter menu of the 2nd activated function

Reservation for parameter menu of the 3rd activated function

Configure the monitor output. (Ê 6-209)

Configure the output parameters. (Ê 6-99)

E-1147.2759.00 6-98 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Generator

6.2.1 Configuring Generator Parameters (CONFIG)

Description The CONFIG menu is used for basic configuration of the generator. The
following settings are made in the CONFIG menu:
ƒ Switchover between the analog and digital generator (R&S UP350 only)
ƒ Configuration of parameters for digital interface (R&S UP350 only)
ƒ Switchover between bandwidths (sample rate)
ƒ Activation/Deactivation of analog generator output
ƒ Configuration of output
ƒ Selection of range switching and setting of level range
Selecting the Use the 3 or 4 cursor keys to select the menu.
CONFIG Menu
The menu name is highlighted and the function keys [13] are assigned
the appropriate function.
Analog generator

Function key
assignment

Select the generator type (digital) (R&S UP350 only). (Ê 6-101)

Select the bandwidth of the generator. (Ê 6-102)

Select the reference potential of the output signal. (Ê 6-103)

Switch the generator output on/off. (Ê 6-104)

Select the level range switching mode. (Ê 6-105)

Operating Manual, 11/2007 6-99 E-1147.2759.00

Generator R&S UP300/350

Digital generator
(R&S UP350 only)

Function key
assignment

Select the generator type (analog). (Ê 6-101)

Select the sample frequency of the output signal. (Ê 6-107)

Enter the sample frequency offset. (Ê 6-108)

Set the validity bit. (Ê 6-108)

Select the valid number of bits in the input signal. (Ê 6-109)

Select the interface protocol. (Ê 6-109)

E-1147.2759.00 6-100 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Generator

6.2.1.1 Selecting the Generator Type – Analog/Digital (R&S UP350 only)

Introductions The analog generator and the digital generator have separate parameter
sets. When the generator type is changed, the new generator with the
currently selected measurement functions and the stored parameters of the
old generator type is started.
Note: The setting is always valid for both channels (Ch 1&2).
Selecting the
Press the function key in the menu.
Analog generator
The instrument is in the analog mode. You can then use all the function
keys which appear to configure the output parameters. If the status line
shows “GENERATOR – ANALOG”, the instrument is in the analog mode.

Selecting the
Press the function key in the menu.
Digital generator
The instrument is in the digital mode. You can then use all the function
keys which appear to configure the output parameters. If the status line
shows “GENERATOR–DIGITAL”, the instrument is in the digital mode.

Operating Manual, 11/2007 6-101 E-1147.2759.00

Generator R&S UP300/350

6.2.1.2 Analog Generator

6.2.1.2.1 Selecting the Generator Bandwidth

Use Switching the bandwidth changes the sample rate of the signal. Since the
properties of the digital filters have become less favourable as the sample
rate increases, you should select the lowest possible bandwidth for your
specific application.
The R&S UP300/350 provides the following bandwidths for the analog
generator:
ƒ 22 kHz
ƒ 40 kHz
ƒ 80 kHz
Note: The setting is always valid for both channels (Ch 1&2).
Selecting the
3. Press the function key in the menu.
bandwidth
A selection field containing the available settings is displayed. The
default setting is “22 kHz “.

4. Use the rotary knob [11] to select a setting.

5. Press the ENTER key [5] to close the selection field.
The new setting is stored and displayed in the parameter field.

Ch 1&2

E-1147.2759.00 6-102 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Generator

6.2.1.2.2 Selecting the Reference Potential of the Output Signal

Use To prevent hum pick-up caused by grounding loops, the test setup must not
have multiple grounding points. Instead, only one point of the test setup
should be connected to the housing ground. Depending on the application,
you can select the following reference potentials for the output signal of the
generator (input signal of the analyzer, Ê 6-217):
ƒ Grounded
Refering to the housing potential
ƒ Floating
"Electronically floating"
Selecting 1. Press the numeric keys 1, 2, or 3 to select channel Ch 1, Ch 2, or both
the channel channels Ch 1&2.
The selected channel is displayed in green in the channel display.

Selecting the
2. Press the function key in the menu.
reference potential
A selection field containing the available settings is displayed. The
default setting is “floating“.

3. Use the rotary knob [11] to select a setting.

4. Press the ENTER key [5] to close the selection field.
The new setting is stored and displayed in the parameter field.

Ch 1 Ch 2

Operating Manual, 11/2007 6-103 E-1147.2759.00

Generator R&S UP300/350

6.2.1.2.3 Activating/Deactivating the Generator Output

Use To make the output signal with all configured functions and parameters
available at the output, you must first switch on the generator output.
Selecting 1. Press the numeric keys 1, 2, or 3 to select channel Ch 1, Ch 2, or both
the channel channels Ch 1&2.
The selected channel is displayed in green in the channel display.

Activating
2. Press the function key in the menu.
the generator output
The function key is highlighted and the new setting is stored. After the
generator output is switched on, the configured output signal is available
at the output [8].
The current status is displayed in the parameter field.

Ch 1 Ch 2

Deactivating
3. Press the function key in the menu.
the generator output
The function key is no longer highlighted. No signal is available at the
output.
The current status is displayed in the parameter field.

Ch 1 Ch 2

E-1147.2759.00 6-104 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Generator

6.2.1.2.4 Selecting the Type of the Level Range Switchover

Use By selecting the level range switching mode, you determine how the output
voltage is to be adjusted at the output amplifier of the generator:
ƒ Auto
The internal signal paths are optimally driven; the output voltage is
always adjusted using the attenuators. This provides the best noise and
THD values for measurements with a constant level (e.g. THD+N
measurement).
ƒ Fixed
The signal path is adjusted to the specified maximum voltage. The actual
output voltage is adjusted only by scaling the digital values on the D/A
converter. This provides faster level changes and better settling.
Interference during switching operations is prevented but this may in
some cases have a negative effect on the signal-to-noise ratio.
Selecting 1. Press the numeric keys 1, 2, or 3 to select channel Ch 1, Ch 2, or both
the channel channels Ch 1&2.
The selected channel is displayed in green in the channel display.

Selecting the type of

2. Press the function key in the menu.
level range
switchover A selection field containing the available settings is displayed. The
default setting is “Auto“.

3. Use the rotary knob [11] to select a setting.

4. Press the ENTER key [5] to close the selection field.
The new setting is stored and displayed in the parameter field.

Ch 1 Ch 2

Operating Manual, 11/2007 6-105 E-1147.2759.00

Generator R&S UP300/350

Entering the After you have selected the “Fixed” level setting, an entry field with the
level range current level range pops up. The default setting is “7.071 V“. At the same
(at level setting time, the function keys are assigned various units of measurement.
“Fixed“)

5. Enter a new value that corresponds to the maximum RMS voltage that
can be set (Ê 5-65).
The permissible entry range is:
0 V ≤ RANGE VALUE ≤ 7.5 V
The new setting is stored and displayed in the parameter field. The
entered value is used for interval selection of the level range.

Ch 1 Ch 2

E-1147.2759.00 6-106 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Generator

6.2.1.3 Digital Generator (R&S UP350 only)

6.2.1.3.1 Selecting the Sample Frequency of the Output Signal

Use The sample frequencies for digital audio interfaces are standardized. When
you select a sample frequency, all of the parameters in the digital generator
are adapted to this frequency.
By entering the sample frequency, you also determine the maximum
generator frequency fmax. You can select the following sample frequencies:
ƒ 32 kHz (fmax = 14.51 kHz)
ƒ 44.1 kHz (fmax = 19.999 kHz)
ƒ 48 kHz (fmax = 21.768 kHz)
ƒ 96 kHz (fmax = 43.536 kHz)
ƒ 192 kHz (fmax = 87.07 kHz)
Note: The setting is always valid for both channels (Ch 1&2).
Selecting the
1. Press the function key in the menu.
sample frequency
A selection field containing the available settings is displayed. The
default setting is “44.1 kHz“.

2. Use the rotary knob [11] to select a setting.

3. Press the ENTER key [5] to close the selection field.
The new setting is stored and displayed in the parameter field.

Ch 1&2

Operating Manual, 11/2007 6-107 E-1147.2759.00

Generator R&S UP300/350

6.2.1.3.2 Entering the Sample Frequency Offset

Use Using the Rate Offset parameter, you can shift the sample frequency in
relation to the nominal value.
Note: The setting is always valid for both channels (Ch 1&2).
Entering the
1. Press the function key in the menu.
rate offset
An entry field containing the currently applicable setting is displayed. The
default setting is “0 ppm“.

2. Enter a new value (Ê 5-65).

The permissible entry range is:
-1000 ppm ≤ RATE OFFSET ≤ 1000 ppm
The new setting is stored and displayed in the parameter field.

Ch 1&2

6.2.1.3.3 Setting the Validity Bit

Use Using the validity bit, you can set the validity identification within the AES
EBU data stream:
ƒ Valid
The validity bit has been set.
ƒ Invalid
The validity bit has not been set.
Note: The setting is always valid for both channels (Ch 1&2).
Selecting the
1. Press the function key in the menu.
validity bit
A selection field containing the available settings is displayed. The
default setting is “valid“.

2. Use the rotary knob [11] to select a setting.

3. Press the ENTER key [5] to close the selection field.
The new setting is stored and displayed in the parameter field.

Ch 1&2

E-1147.2759.00 6-108 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Generator

6.2.1.3.4 Selecting the Valid Number of Bits in the Output Signal

Use Use the word size to determine the resolution of the output signal. You can
generate word sizes between 16 and 24 bits.
Selecting 1. Press the numeric keys 1, 2, or 3 to select channel Ch 1, Ch 2, or both
the channel channels Ch 1&2.
The selected channel is displayed in green in the channel display.

Selecting the
2. Press the function key in the menu.
word size
A selection field containing the available settings is displayed. The
default setting is “24 bits“.

3. Use the rotary knob [11] to select a setting.

4. Press the ENTER key [5] to close the selection field.
The new setting is stored and displayed in the parameter field.

Ch 1 Ch 2

6.2.1.3.5 Selecting the Interface Protocol

Use There are two standardized interface protocols: consumer and professional.
They differ with respect to the meaning of the status bit information. Selecting
the correct protocol ensures that the data from the DUT is interpreted
correctly.
Note: The setting is always valid for both channels (Ch 1&2). The channel
status data are listed in chapter 6.3.2.2.11 (Ê 6-278).
Selecting the
1. Press the function key in the menu.
protocol
A selection field containing the available settings is displayed. The
default setting is “Consumer“.

2. Use the rotary knob [11] to select a setting.

3. Press the ENTER key [5] to close the selection field.
The new setting is stored and displayed in the parameter field.

Ch 1&2

Operating Manual, 11/2007 6-109 E-1147.2759.00

Generator R&S UP300/350

6.2.2 Setting the Generator Signal Type (FUNCTIONS)

Description In the FUNCTIONS menu, you can select the generator signal. The selected
function is displayed in a vacant field in the menu bar and is available as a
menu key to allow you modifying the function parameters. At the same time,
the appropriate function is activated in the generator.
One signal type can be activated in combination with NOISE and
DC OFFSET. All other function keys are deactivated (displayed in gray).
When you have selected a function in the menu bar, the list of available
signal parameters appears on the screen (Ê 6-112).
Selecting the Select the menu with the 3 or 4 cursor keys.
FUNCTIONS menu
The menu name is highlighted and the function keys [13] are assigned
the appropriate function.

The 1st function key

assignment
Display the next set of functions.

Sinewave signal (Ê 6-114)

Noise signal (Ê 6-119)

Multi-sinewave signal (Ê 6-122)

Sine burst signal (Ê 6-132)

Two-tone signal for measurement of modulation distortions (Ê 6-138)

Difference frequency signal (Ê 6-144)

E-1147.2759.00 6-110 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Generator

The 2nd function key

assignment
Display the previous set of functions.

Polarity test signal (Ê 6-150)

DC voltage component (Ê 6-152)

Sweeped sinewave signal and measured RMS (Ê 6-154)

Sweeped sinewave signal and measured RMS SELECTIVE (Ê 6-171)

Sweeped sinewave signal and measured THD (Ê 6-190)

Operating Manual, 11/2007 6-111 E-1147.2759.00

Generator R&S UP300/350

6.2.2.1 Selecting Generator Functions

Switching on 1. Press a function key for a generator function in the menu.

the function
A new menu item (e.g. SINE) appears in the menu area:

You can select a maximum of 3 functions at a time. Only one signal type
can be activated in combination with NOISE and DC OFFSET. All other
function keys are deactivated (displayed in gray).

Switching off 2. Press the function key for the desired function in the menu.
the function
The menu item disappears from the menu area.

E-1147.2759.00 6-112 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Generator

6.2.2.2 Configuring Signal Parameters

Use In the FUNCTIONS menu, you can select the generator signal. The selected
function is displayed in a vacant field in the menu bar and is available as a
menu key to allow you modifying the function parameters. At the same time,
the appropriate function is activated in the generator.
When you have selected a function in the menu bar, the list of available
signal parameters (e.g. SINE) appears on the screen (Ê 6-114).

Settings for the All level parameters of the individual generator functions can be set
selected channel channel independently (Ch 1, Ch 2), or simultaneously in both channels
(Ch 1&2). These parameters are listed in two columns in the parameter field.
The function parameters applying to both channels (Ch 1&2) are listed in one
column.
To get an overview, refer to the factory default settings (Ê 6-89).

Operating Manual, 11/2007 6-113 E-1147.2759.00

Generator R&S UP300/350

6.2.2.2.1 SINE (Sinewave Signal)

Description In the SINE Menu, you can set the function parameters for the
sinewave signal.

Selecting the 1. Call the generator SINE function (Ê 6-112).

SINE menu 2. Select the menu with the 3 or 4 cursor keys.
The menu name is highlighted and the function keys [13] are assigned
the appropriate function.

Function key
assignment
Activate/Deactivate frequency coupling of the channels. (Ê 6-116)

Enter the signal frequency of the active channel. (Ê 6-115)

Enter the phase difference between the channels. (Ê 6-116)

Enter the signal amplitude. (Ê 6-117)

Enter the reference value. (Ê 6-118)

Note: The function key is only available if the frequency coupling of

the channels is activated (Ê 6-116).

E-1147.2759.00 6-114 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Generator

Entering the Signal Frequency

Use You can enter the signal frequency for the selected channel.
Selecting 1. Press the numeric keys 1, 2, or 3 to select channel Ch 1, Ch 2, or both
the channel channels Ch 1&2.
The selected channel is displayed in green in the channel display.

Note: You can also activate the frequency coupling of the channels
(Ê 6-116). The setting is always valid for both channels.
Entering the
2. Press the function key in the menu.
signal frequency
An entry field containing the currently applicable setting is displayed. The
default setting is “1 kHz“. At the same time, the function keys [13] are
assigned various units of measurement.

3. Enter a new value (Ê 5-65).

The permissible entry range is:
0.001 Hz ≤ FREQ ≤ fmax
within: fmax - maximum frequency of generator type (Ê 6-107)
The new setting is stored and displayed in the parameter field.

Ch 1 Ch 2

Operating Manual, 11/2007 6-115 E-1147.2759.00

Generator R&S UP300/350

Activating/Deactivating Channel Frequency Couplings

Use An exact phase relationship between two signals can only be defined if the
frequency settings for channels Ch 1 and Ch 2 are identical.
Activating channel
Press the function key in the menu.
frequency couplings
The function key is highlighted.
The setting is always valid for both channels.
Deactivating
Press the function key in the menu.
channel frequency
couplings The associated function key is no longer highlighted and coupling of
the frequency setting is deactivated. The previous frequency setting of
channel Ch 2 is reactivated again. However, it is again possible to set the
frequencies separately for each channel.

Entering the Phase Difference between Channels

Note: The PHASE DIFF. function key is only available if the function key
f1=f2 is activated (Ê 6-116) because the phase shift is only possible for
signals of the same frequency.

Use The signal phase in channel Ch2 can be offset by entering a phase difference
with respect to channel Ch 1 (0°). The channel Ch 1 serves as the reference.
Activating channel
1. Press the function key in the menu.
frequency couplings
The function key is highlighted.
The setting is always valid for both channels.
Entering the
2. Press the function key in the menu.
phase difference
An entry field containing the currently applicable setting is displayed. The
default setting is “0 grd“.

3. Enter a new value (Ê 5-65).

The permissible entry range is:
-180 grd ≤ PHASE DIFF ≤ +180 grd
The new setting is stored and displayed in the parameter field.

E-1147.2759.00 6-116 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Generator

Entering the Signal Amplitude

Use You can enter the amplitude of the output signal as an RMS value.
Selecting 1. Press the numeric keys 1, 2, or 3 to select channel Ch 1, Ch 2, or both
the channel channels Ch 1&2.
The selected channel is displayed in green in the channel display.

Entering the
2. Press the function key in the menu.
signal amplitude
An entry field containing the currently applicable setting is displayed. The
default setting is “100 mV (0.1 FS)”. At the same time, the function keys
[13] are assigned various units of measurement.
Analog Digital

3. Enter a value (Ê 5-65) and complete the entry by selecting a unit of

measurement (function key).
The permissible entry range is:
0 ≤ AMPL ≤ 7.495 V (Analog)
0 ≤ AMPL ≤ 0.9999 FS (Digital)
The new setting is stored and displayed in the parameter field.

Ch 1 Ch 2
(Analog)
(Digital)

Note: The maximum limit of signal amplitude applies if only the

SINE generator function is set. If other generator functions (e.g. DC
OFFSET, NOISE) are activated, their amplitude will also be taken into
consideration and the maximum signal amplitude decreases accordingly.

Operating Manual, 11/2007 6-117 E-1147.2759.00

Generator R&S UP300/350

Entering the Reference Value

Entering the
1. Press the function key in the current measurement menu.
reference value
An entry field containing the currently applicable setting is displayed. The
default setting is "1.000 mV (0.001 FS) ". At the same time, the
function keys are assigned various units of measurement.
Analog Digital

4. Enter a new value (Ê 5-65).

The permissible entry range is:
1 µV ≤ REF. VALUE ≤ 100 V (Analog)
0.001 FS ≤ REF. VALUE ≤ 0.999 FS (Digital)
The new setting is stored and displayed in the parameter field.
Analog

Digital

E-1147.2759.00 6-118 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Generator

6.2.2.2.2 NOISE (Noise Signal)

Description In the SINE menu you can set the function parameters for the noise signal.

Selecting the 1. Call the generator NOISE function (Ê 6-112).

NOISE menu 2. Select the menu with the 3 or 4 cursor keys.
The menu name is highlighted and the function keys [13] are assigned
the appropriate function.

Function key
assignment
Select the amplitude distribution function. (Ê 6-120)

Enter the signal amplitude. (Ê 6-120)

Enter the reference value. (Ê 6-118)

Operating Manual, 11/2007 6-119 E-1147.2759.00

Generator R&S UP300/350

Selecting the Amplitude Distribution Function

Use You can select the following amplitude distribution functions for the noise
signal:
ƒ Gaussian
Gaussian distribution functions (Gaussian factor = 5),
crest factor = 3.873
ƒ Rectangular
Rectangular distribution functions, most favourable ratio between the
RMS and peak value (crest factor = 1.732)
ƒ Triangular
Triangular distribution functions, crest factor = 2.450
Note: The setting is always valid for both channels (Ch 1&2).
Selecting the
1. Press the function key in the menu.
amplitude
distribution function A selection field containing the available settings is displayed. The
default setting is “Rectangular“.

2. Use the rotary knob [11] to select a setting.

3. Press the ENTER key [5] to close the selection field.
The new setting is stored and displayed in the parameter field.

Ch 1&2

Entering the Signal Amplitude

Use You can enter the amplitude of the output signal as an RMS value. Here, the
maximum value depends on the amplitude distribution functions.
Selecting 1. Press the numeric keys 1, 2, or 3 to select channel Ch 1, Ch 2, or both
the channel channels Ch 1&2.
The selected channel is displayed in green in the channel display.

Entering the
2. Press the function key in the menu.
signal amplitude
An entry field containing the currently applicable setting is displayed. The
default setting is “100 mV (0.1 FS)“. At the same time, the function keys
are assigned various units of measurement.

E-1147.2759.00 6-120 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Generator

Analog Digital

3. Enter a new value (Ê 5-65) and complete the entry by selecting a unit of
measurement (function key).
The permissible entry range depends on the distribution function
(Ê 6-120):
Analog:
0 ≤ RMS ≤ 2.736 V (Gaussian)
0 ≤ RMS ≤ 6.119 V (Rectangular)
0 ≤ RMS ≤ 4.327 V (Triangular)
Digital:
0 ≤ RMS ≤ 0.3647 FS (Gaussian)
0 ≤ RMS ≤ 0.8156 FS (Rectangular)
0 ≤ RMS ≤ 0.5767 FS (Triangular)
The new setting is stored and displayed in the parameter field.

Ch 1 Ch 2
(Analog)
(Digital)

Note: The maximum limit of signal amplitude applies if only the NOISE
generator function is set. If other generator functions (e.g. SINE,
DC OFFSET) are activated, their amplitude will also be taken into
consideration and the maximum signal amplitude decreases accordingly.

Operating Manual, 11/2007 6-121 E-1147.2759.00

Generator R&S UP300/350

6.2.2.2.3 MULTISINE (Multitone Signal)

Description In the MULTISINE menu, you can set the function parameters for the
multi-tone signal. This signal may consist of up to 17 sinewave tones with
selectable relative amplitude.

Selecting the 1. Call the generator MULTISINE function (Ê 6-112).

MULTISINE menu 2. Select the menu with the 3 or 4 cursor keys.
The menu name is highlighted and the function keys [13] are assigned
the appropriate function.

Function key
assignment
Enter the number of sinewave tones. (Ê 6-123)

Open the submenu: (Ê 6-123)

Configuration of signal parameters
Enter the frequency resolution. (Ê 6-126)

Enter the reference value for the sum of all amplitudes. (Ê 6-128)

Activate/Deactivate amplitude modulation. (Ê 6-129)

Enter the AM frequency. (Ê 6-130)

Enter the AM modulation depth. (Ê6-131)

E-1147.2759.00 6-122 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Generator

Entering the Number of Sinewave Tones

Use You can enter up to 17 sinewave tones with selectable relative amplitude.
Note: The setting is always valid for both channels (Ch 1&2).
Entering the number
1. Press the function key in the menu.
An entry field containing the currently applicable setting is displayed. The
default setting is “1“.

2. Enter a new value, e.g. 7 (Ê 5-65).

The permissible entry range is:
1 ≤ NUMBER OF SINE ≤ 17
The new setting is stored and displayed in the parameter field.

Ch 1&2

Configuring the Signal Parameters

Description In the COMPONENT LIST menu, you can configure the parameters for the
individual signal components (sinewave tones).
Selecting the
Press the function key in the menu.
COMPONENT LIST
submenu The menu name is highlighted and the function keys [13] are assigned
the appropriate function. The current sinewave tones together with the
frequency, phase, and relative amplitude are displayed in the parameter
field.

Function key
assignment
Exit the submenu.

Enter the frequency. (Ê 6-124)

Enter the start phase. (Ê 6-125)

Enter the relative signal amplitude. (Ê 6-125)

Operating Manual, 11/2007 6-123 E-1147.2759.00

Generator R&S UP300/350

Entering the Frequency

Use You can enter the frequency of the individual signal components. The entered
value will be automatically adjusted because the frequency has to be an
integer multiple of the frequency resolution (spacing, Ê 6-126).
The individual frequencies can be spaced as closely as required or can even
overlap (the frequency resolution must, however, be taken into consideration
in all cases).
Note: The setting is always valid for both channels (Ch 1&2).
Selecting the 1. Select a signal component in the parameter field using the 6 or 5
signal component cursor keys.
The line (signal component) is highlighted.

Entering the
2. Press the function key in the submenu.
frequency
An entry field containing the currently applicable setting is displayed. The
default setting is “1000.576 Hz“. At the same time, the function keys are
assigned various units of measurement.

3. Enter a new value (Ê 5-65).

The permissible entry range is:
fSpacing ≤ FREQ ≤ fmax
within: fSpacing - spacing for frequency setting (Ê 6-126)
fmax - maximum frequency of generator type (Ê 6-107)
The new setting is stored and displayed in the parameter field.

Ch 1&2

E-1147.2759.00 6-124 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Generator

Entering the Phase

Use The multi-sinewave is generated by periodically playing back a sequence of

signals at a repetition frequency which corresponds to the frequency
resolution (spacing). All sinewave tones have the entered phase position at
the beginning of the sequence.
The mutual phase position of the individual components influences the crest
factor. You can change the crest factor by selecting the appropriate phase.
Note: The setting is always valid for both channels (Ch 1&2).
Selecting the 1. Select a signal component in the parameter field using the 6 or 5
signal component cursor keys.
The line (signal component) is highlighted.

Entering the phase

2. Press the function key in the submenu.
An entry field containing the currently applicable setting is displayed. The
default setting is “0 grd“.

3. Enter a new value (Ê 5-65).

The permissible entry range is:
-180 grd < PHASE < +179.9 grd
The new setting is stored and displayed in the parameter field.

Ch 1&2

Entering the Relative Signal Amplitude

Use You can enter the amplitude ratio of the individual signal components in dBr
refering to the reference value (Ê 6-128).
Note: The setting is always valid for both channels (Ch 1&2).
Selecting the 1. Select a signal component in the parameter field using the 6 or 5
signal component cursor keys.
The line (signal component) is highlighted.

Operating Manual, 11/2007 6-125 E-1147.2759.00

Generator R&S UP300/350

Entering the relative

2. Press the function key in the submenu.
signal amplitude
An entry field containing the currently applicable setting is displayed. The
default setting is “0 dBr“.

3. Enter a new value (Ê 5-65).

The permissible entry range depends on the reference value (Ê 6-128)
and the total signal amplitude (Ê 1-11).
The new setting is stored and displayed in the parameter field.

Ch 1&2

Entering the Frequency Resolution

Use Use the frequency resolution to determine the smallest step size for the
frequency setting (Ê 6-124) of the individual signal components. All frequen-
cies will be automatically adjusted to an integer multiple of the
frequency resolution.
Note: The setting is always valid for both channels (Ch 1&2).
Entering the
1. Press the function key in the menu.
frequency resolution
An entry field containing the currently applicable setting is displayed. The
default setting is “100.058 Hz“. At the same time, the function keys [13]
are assigned various units of measurement.

E-1147.2759.00 6-126 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Generator

2. Enter a new value (Ê 5-65).

The permissible entry range is:
2.4 Hz < SPACING < 12200 Hz BW = 22 kHz
4.8 Hz < SPACING < 24400 Hz BW = 40 kHz
9.6 Hz < SPACING < 48800 Hz BW = 80 kHz
1.56 Hz < SPACING < 8000 Hz Fs = 32 kHz
2.154 Hz < SPACING < 11025 Hz Fs = 44.1 kHz
2.344 Hz < SPACING < 12000 Hz Fs = 48 kHz
4.688 Hz < SPACING < 24000 Hz Fs = 96 kHz
9.375 Hz < SPACING < 48000 Hz Fs = 192 kHz

The new setting is stored and displayed in the parameter field.

Ch 1&2

Operating Manual, 11/2007 6-127 E-1147.2759.00

Generator R&S UP300/350

Entering the Reference Value for the Individual Amplitudes

Use You can enter the amplitudes of the individual signal components in dBr
(a[dBr]), refering to the reference value (Vref). The absolute
amplitude of each component (Vabs) is derived from:
a[ dBr ]
Vabs = Vref ∗ 10 20

Selecting 1. Press the numeric keys 1, 2, or 3 to select channel Ch 1, Ch 2, or both

the channel channels Ch 1&2.
The selected channel is displayed in green in the channel display.

Entering the
2. Press the function key in the menu.
reference value
An entry field containing the currently applicable setting is displayed. The
default setting is “100 mV (0.1 FS)”. At the same time, the function keys
[13] are assigned various units of measurement.
Analog Digital

3. Enter a new value (Ê 5-65) and complete the entry by selecting a unit of
measurement (function key).
The permissible entry range depends on the total signal amplitude
(Ê 1-15).
The new setting is stored and displayed in the parameter field.

Ch 1 Ch 2
(Analog)
(Digital)

Note: The maximum limit of signal amplitude applies if only the

MULTISINE generator function is set. If other generator functions (e.g. DC
OFFSET, NOISE) are activated, their amplitude will also be taken into
consideration and the maximum signal amplitude decreases accordingly.

E-1147.2759.00 6-128 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Generator

Activating/Deactivating the Amplitude Modulation

Use In order to make the amplitude modulation (AM) with the multi-tone signal
available at the output, you must first activate the amplitude modulation.
The AM is deactivated in the factory default settings.
Selecting 1. Press the numeric keys 1, 2, or 3 to select channel Ch 1, Ch 2, or both
the channel channels Ch 1&2.
The selected channel is displayed in green in the channel display.

Activating the AM
2. Press the function key in the menu.
The function key is highlighted and the new setting is stored. After
amplitude modulation is activated, the multi-tone signal is modulated with
respect to amplitude.
The current status is displayed in the parameter field.

Ch 1 Ch 2

Deactivating the AM
3. Press the function key in the menu.
The function key is no longer highlighted. The multi-tone signal is
unmodulated.
The current status is displayed in the parameter field.

Ch 1 Ch 2

Operating Manual, 11/2007 6-129 E-1147.2759.00

Generator R&S UP300/350

Entering the AM Frequency

Use You can enter a specific modulation frequency for amplitude modulation of
the multi-tone signal.
Note: The setting is always valid for both channels (Ch 1&2).
Entering the
1. Press the function key in the menu.
AM frequency
An entry field containing the currently applicable setting is displayed. The
default setting is “10 Hz“.

2. Enter a new value (Ê 5-65).

The permissible entry range is:
0.001 Hz < AM FREQ < 22 kHz (BW 22 kHz)
0.001 Hz < AM FREQ < 40 kHz (BW 40 kHz)
0.001 Hz < AM FREQ < 80 kHz (BW 80 kHz)
0.001 Hz < AM FREQ < 14.51 kHz (Fs = 32 kHz)
0.001 Hz < AM FREQ < 19.999 kHz (Fs = 44.1 kHz)
0.001 Hz < AM FREQ < 21.768 kHz (Fs = 48 kHz)
0.001 Hz < AM FREQ < 43.536 kHz (Fs = 96 kHz)
0.001 Hz < AM FREQ < 87.072 kHz (Fs = 192 kHz)

The new setting is stored and displayed in the parameter field.

Ch 1&2

E-1147.2759.00 6-130 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Generator

Entering the AM Modulation Depth

Use The AM modulation depth (m) describes the ratio from the maximum to the
minimum amplitude (A) of the modulated signal.
A max − A min
m=
A max + A min

Selecting 1. Press the numeric keys 1, 2, or 3 to select channel Ch 1, Ch 2, or both

the channel channels Ch 1&2.
The selected channel is displayed in green in the channel display.

Entering the AM
2. Press the function key in the menu.
modulation depth
An entry field containing the currently applicable setting is displayed. The
default setting is “10 %“.

3. Enter a new value (Ê 5-65).

The permissible entry range is:
0 % ≤ AM DEPTH ≤ 99.8 %
The new setting is stored and displayed in the parameter field.

Ch 1 Ch 2

Operating Manual, 11/2007 6-131 E-1147.2759.00

Generator R&S UP300/350

6.2.2.2.4 SINE BURST (Sine Burst Signal)

Description In the SINE BURST menu, you can set the function parameters for the sine
burst signal. This is a sinewave signal which switches periodically between
high and low levels.
Selecting the 1. Call the generator SINE BURST function (Ê 6-112).
SINE BURST menu 2. Select the menu with the 3 or 4 cursor keys.
The menu name is highlighted and the function keys [13] are assigned
the appropriate function.

Function key
assignment
Enter the signal frequency. (Ê 6-133)

Enter the high-level time. (Ê 6-134)

Enter the interval time. (Ê 6-135)

Enter the high-level amplitude. (Ê 6-136)

Enter the low-level amplitude. (Ê 6-137)

Enter the reference value. (Ê 6-118)

E-1147.2759.00 6-132 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Generator

Entering the Signal Frequency

Use You can enter a specific frequency for the sine burst signal.
Note: The setting is always valid for both channels (Ch 1&2).
Entering the
1. Press the function key in the menu.
signal frequency
An entry field containing the currently applicable setting is displayed. The
default setting is “1 kHz“. At the same time, the function keys [13] are
assigned various units of measurement.

2. Enter a new value (Ê 5-65).

The permissible entry range is:
10 Hz ≤ GEN FREQ ≤ fmax
within: fmax - maximum frequency of generator type (Ê 6-107)
The new setting is stored and displayed in the parameter field.

Ch 1&2

Operating Manual, 11/2007 6-133 E-1147.2759.00

Generator R&S UP300/350

Entering the High-Level Time

Use Use the high-level time (burst duration) to determine the time during which
the sinewave has its high level.
Note: The setting is always valid for both channels (Ch 1&2).
Entering the
1. Press the function key in the menu.
high-level time
An entry field containing the currently applicable setting is displayed. The
default setting is “500 ms“. At the same time, the function keys [13] are
assigned various units of measurement.

2. Enter a new value (Ê 5-65).

The permissible entry range is:
0.001 s ≤ HIGH LEVEL TIME ≤ 60 s
The new setting is stored and displayed in the parameter field.

Ch 1&2

E-1147.2759.00 6-134 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Generator

Entering the Interval Time

Use Using the interval time, you define the overall time of the sine burst signal
(high-level time + low-level time).
Note: The setting is always valid for both channels (Ch 1&2).
Entering the
1. Press the function key in the menu.
interval time
An entry field containing the currently applicable setting is displayed. The
default setting is “1 s“. At the same time, the function keys [13] are
assigned various units of measurement.

2. Enter a new value (Ê 5-65).

The permissible entry range is:
HIGH LEVEL TIME ≤ INTERVAL ≤ 60 s
The new setting is stored and displayed in the parameter field.

Ch 1&2

Operating Manual, 11/2007 6-135 E-1147.2759.00

Generator R&S UP300/350

Entering the High-Level Amplitude

Use Use the high-level amplitude to determine the sinewave amplitude during the
high-level time (burst duration).
Selecting 1. Press the numeric keys 1, 2, or 3 to select channel Ch 1, Ch 2, or both
the channel channels Ch 1&2.
The selected channel is displayed in green in the channel display.

Entering the
2. Press the function key in the menu.
high-level amplitude
An entry field containing the currently applicable setting is displayed. The
default setting is “100 mV (0.1 FS)”. At the same time, the function keys
[13] are assigned various units of measurement.
Analog Digital

3. Enter a new value (Ê 5-65).

The permissible entry range is:
LOW LEVEL AMPL ≤ HIGH LEVEL AMPL ≤ 7.495 V (Analog)
LOW LEVEL AMPL ≤ HIGH LEVEL AMPL ≤ 0.9999 FS (Digital)
The new setting is stored and displayed in the parameter field.

Ch 1 Ch 2
(Analog)
(Digital)

Note: The maximum limit of signal amplitude applies if only the SINE BURST
generator function is set. If other generator functions (e.g. DC
OFFSET, NOISE) are activated, their amplitude will also be taken into
consideration and the maximum signal amplitude decreases accordingly.

E-1147.2759.00 6-136 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Generator

Entering the Low-Level Amplitude

Use You use the low-level amplitude to determine the sinewave amplitude during
the low-level time.
Selecting 1. Press the numeric keys 1, 2, or 3 to select channel Ch 1, Ch 2, or both
the channel channels Ch 1&2.
The selected channel is displayed in green in the channel display.

Entering the
low-level amplitude 2. Press the function key in the menu.
An entry field containing the currently applicable setting is displayed. The
default setting is “0 V (0 FS)”. At the same time, the function keys are
assigned various units of measurement.
Analog Digital

3. Enter a new value (Ê 5-65).

The permissible entry range is:
0 ≤ LOW LEVEL AMPL ≤ HIGH LEVEL AMPL
The new setting is stored and displayed in the parameter field.

Ch 1 Ch 2
(Analog)
(Digital)

Operating Manual, 11/2007 6-137 E-1147.2759.00

Generator R&S UP300/350

6.2.2.2.5 MOD DIST (Two-Tone Signal in Accordance with IEC)

Description In the MOD DIST menu, you can set the function parameters for the two-tone
signal. The two-tone signal is produced by superimposing 2 sinewave
signals: low-frequency interference signal and high-frequency useful signal.
The interference signal is 1 to 10 times larger than the useful signal.

The signal is used for intermodulation measurements as defined by SMPTE

(Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers) and for modulation
factor analysis according to DIN IEC 268-3.
Recommendation of DIN IEC 268-3:
Interference signal f1 is between 0.5 and 1.5 octaves above the lower limit
frequency fu of the DUT:
fu + 0.5 octaves = f1 = fu + 1.5 octaves
Useful signal f2 is between 0.5 and 1.5 octaves below the upper limit
frequency fo of the DUT:
fo - 1.5 octaves = f2 = fo - 0.5 octaves
f2 = 8 x f1
SMPTE standard:
Interference signal: f1 = 60 Hz
Useful signal: f2 = 7 kHz
Amplitude ratio of interference signal to useful signal:
4:1 (SMPTE standard); 10:1 also possible according to DIN

E-1147.2759.00 6-138 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Generator

Selecting the 1. Call the generator MOD DIST function (Ê 6-112).

MOD DIST menu 2. Select the menu with the 3 or 4 cursor keys.
The menu name is highlighted and the function keys [13] are assigned
the appropriate function.

Function key
assignment
Enter the useful signal frequency. (Ê 6-140)

Enter the interference signal frequency. (Ê 6-140)

Enter the ratio between interference amplitude and useful amplitude.(Ê 6-142)

Enter the total RMS of the signal. (Ê 6-143)

Enter the reference value. (Ê 6-118)

Note: To be able to measure the intermodulation for MOD DIST, you must
set an appropriate measurement function in the Analyzer menu (Ê 6-275).

Operating Manual, 11/2007 6-139 E-1147.2759.00

Generator R&S UP300/350

Entering Frequencies of the Two-Tone Signal

Use The two-tone signal is produced by superimposing 2 sinewave signals:

low-frequency interference signal and high-frequency useful signal. You can
change the frequencies of the interference and useful signals to allow
measurements to be performed to various standards.
Note: The setting is always valid for both channels (Ch 1&2).
Entering the useful
1. Press the function key in the menu.
signal frequency
(UPPER FREQ) An entry field containing the currently applicable setting is displayed. The
default setting is “7 kHz“. At the same time, the function keys [13] are
assigned various units of measurement.

2. Enter a new value (Ê 5-65).

The permissible entry range is:
8 * LF ≤ UPPER FREQ ≤ fmax – 2 * LF
within: fmax - maximum frequency of generator type (Ê 6-107)
The new setting is stored and displayed in the parameter field.

Ch 1&2

E-1147.2759.00 6-140 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Generator

Entering the
3. Press the function key in the menu.
interference signal
frequency An entry field containing the currently applicable setting is displayed. The
(LOWER FREQ) default setting is “60 Hz“. At the same time, the function keys [13] are
assigned various units of measurement.

4. Enter a new value (Ê 5-65).

The permissible entry range is:
30 Hz ≤ LOWER FREQ ≤ (UPPER FREQUENCY)/8
The new setting is stored and displayed in the parameter field.

Ch 1&2

Operating Manual, 11/2007 6-141 E-1147.2759.00

Generator R&S UP300/350

Entering the Ratio Between Interference and Useful Amplitude

Use You can change the ratio between interference and useful amplitude to allow
measurements to be performed to various standards.
Selecting 1. Press the numeric keys 1, 2, or 3 to select channel Ch 1, Ch 2, or both
the channel channels Ch 1&2.
The selected channel is displayed in green in the channel display.

Entering the ratio

2. Press the function key in the menu.
An entry field containing the currently applicable setting is displayed. The
default setting is “4“.

3. Enter a new value (Ê 5-65).

The permissible entry range is:
1 ≤ AMPL RATIO ≤ 10
The new setting is stored and displayed in the parameter field.

Ch 1 Ch 2

E-1147.2759.00 6-142 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Generator

Entering the Total Signal RMS

Use The total voltage is divided between the useful and interference signal in the
(selectable) ratio. The maximum voltage setting is limited by the maximum
peak value. As a result, the limits for the user-selectable RMS depend on the
amplitude ratio.
Selecting 1. Press the numeric keys 1, 2, or 3 to select channel Ch 1, Ch 2, or both
the channel channels Ch 1&2.
The selected channel is displayed in green in the channel display.

Entering the
2. Press the function key in the menu.
total signal RMS
An entry field containing the currently applicable setting is displayed. The
default setting is “100 mV (0.1 FS)”. At the same time, the function keys
[13] are assigned various units of measurement.
Analog Digital

3. Enter a new value (Ê 5-65).

The permissible entry range depends on amplitude ratio:
0 ≤ TOTAL RMS ≤ 5.299 V (Analog)
0 ≤ TOTAL RMS ≤ 0.7063 FS (Digital)
The new setting is stored and displayed in the parameter field.

Ch 1 Ch 2
(Analog)
(Digital)

Note: The maximum limit of signal amplitude applies if only the SINE MOD
DIST generator function is set. If other generator functions (e.g. DC OFFSET,
NOISE) are activated, their amplitude will also be taken into
consideration and the maximum signal amplitude decreases accordingly.

Operating Manual, 11/2007 6-143 E-1147.2759.00

Generator R&S UP300/350

6.2.2.2.6 DFD (Difference Frequency Signal)

Description In the DFD menu, you can set the function parameters for the difference
frequency signal. The signal consists of two very close sinewave signals of
the same amplitude.

The signal is used for intermodulation measurements according to IEC 118

and IEC 268 (Ê 6-268).
Selecting the 1. Call the generator DFD function (Ê 6-112).
DFD menu 2. Select the menu with the 3 or 4 cursor keys.
The menu name is highlighted and the function keys [13] are assigned
the appropriate function.

Function key
assignment
Measurement acc. to IEC 118: Enter the upper DFD frequency. (Ê 6-145)

Measurement acc. to IEC 268: Enter the center frequency. (Ê 6-147)

Enter the difference frequency. (Ê 6-145, 6-147)

Enter the total RMS of the signal. (Ê 6-149)

Enter the reference value. (Ê 6-118)

Note: To be able to measure the intermodulation for DFD, you must set an
appropriate measurement function in the Analyzer menu (Ê 6-268).

E-1147.2759.00 6-144 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Generator

Entering Frequencies for Measurements in Accordance with IEC 118

Use For measurements according to IEC 118 (Ê 6-145), enter the frequency
parameters of the sinewave signals under the upper DFD frequency and
difference frequency.
Note: The setting is always valid for both channels (Ch 1&2).
Entering the
1. Press the function key in the menu.
upper DFD
frequency An entry field containing the currently applicable setting is displayed. The
default setting is “8.1 kHz“. At the same time, the function keys [13] are
assigned various units of measurement.

2. Enter a new value (Ê 5-65).

The permissible entry range is:
DIFF FREQ ≤ UPPER FREQ ≤ fmax
within: fmax - maximum frequency of generator type (Ê 6-107)
The new setting is stored and displayed in the parameter field.

Ch 1&2

Operating Manual, 11/2007 6-145 E-1147.2759.00

Generator R&S UP300/350

Entering the
3. Press the function key in the menu.
difference frequency
An entry field containing the currently applicable setting is displayed. The
default setting is “200 Hz“. At the same time, the function keys [13] are
assigned various units of measurement.

4. Enter a new value (Ê 5-65).

The permissible entry range depends on the bandwidth (Ê 6-107).
The new setting is stored and displayed in the parameter field.

Ch 1&2

E-1147.2759.00 6-146 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Generator

Entering Frequencies for Measurements in Accordance with IEC 268

Use For measurements according to IEC 268 (Ê 6-147), enter the frequency
parameters of the sinewave signals under the center frequency and
difference frequency.
Note: The setting is always valid for both channels (Ch 1&2).
Entering the
1. Press the function key in the menu.
center frequency
An entry field containing the currently applicable setting is displayed. The
default setting is “8 kHz“. At the same time, the function keys [13] are
assigned various units of measurement.

2. Enter a new value (Ê 5-65).

The permissible entry range is:
DIFF FREQ / 2 ≤ MEAN FREQ ≤ fmax – DIFF FREQ / 2
within: fmax - maximum frequency of generator type (Ê 6-107)
The new setting is stored and displayed in the parameter field.

Ch 1&2

Operating Manual, 11/2007 6-147 E-1147.2759.00

Generator R&S UP300/350

Entering the
3. Press the function key in the menu.
difference frequency
An entry field containing the currently applicable setting is displayed. The
default setting is “200 Hz“. At the same time, the function keys [13] are
assigned various units of measurement.

4. Enter a new value (Ê 5-65).

The permissible entry range depends on the bandwidth (Ê 6-107).
The new setting is stored and displayed in the parameter field.

Ch 1&2

E-1147.2759.00 6-148 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Generator

Entering the Total Signal RMS

Use You can enter the amplitude of the sinewave signals as a total RMS.
Selecting 1. Press the numeric keys 1, 2, or 3 to select channel Ch 1, Ch 2, or both
the channel channels Ch 1&2.
The selected channel is displayed in green in the channel display.

Entering the
2. Press the function key in the menu.
total RMS
An entry field containing the currently applicable setting is displayed. The
default setting is “100 mV (0.1 FS)”. At the same time, the function keys
[13] are assigned various units of measurement.
Analog Digital

3. Enter a new value (Ê 5-65).

The permissible entry range is:
0 ≤ TOTAL RMS ≤ 5.3 V (Analog)
0 ≤ TOTAL RMS ≤ 0.7063 FS (Digital)
The new setting is stored and displayed in the parameter field.

Ch 1 Ch 2
(Analog)
(Digital)

Note: The maximum limit of signal amplitude applies if only the SINE MOD
DFD generator function is set if other generator functions (e.g. DC
OFFSET, NOISE) are activated, their amplitude will also be taken into
consideration and the maximum signal amplitude decreases accordingly.

Operating Manual, 11/2007 6-149 E-1147.2759.00

Generator R&S UP300/350

6.2.2.2.7 POLARITY TEST (Polarization Test Signal)

Description In the POLARITY TEST menu, you can set the function parameters for the
polarity test signal. This signal is a special SINE2 BURST signal and is used
to check if the polarity is reversed by the DUT.

Selecting the 1. Call the generator POLARITY TEST function (Ê 6-112).

POLARITY TEST 2. Select the menu with the 3 or 4 cursor keys.
menu
The menu name is highlighted and the function keys [13] are assigned
the appropriate function.

Function key
assignment
Enter the signal amplitude. (Ê 6-151)

Enter the reference value. (Ê 6-118)

Note: To perform a polarity test, you have to set the relevant measurement
function in the Analyzer menu (Ê 6-267).

E-1147.2759.00 6-150 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Generator

Entering the Signal Amplitude

Use You can set the amplitude of the polarity test signal.
Selecting 1. Press the numeric keys 1, 2, or 3 to select channel Ch 1, Ch 2, or both
the channel channels Ch 1&2.
The selected channel is displayed in green in the channel display.

Entering the
2. Press the function key in the menu.
peak
An entry field containing the currently applicable setting is displayed. The
default setting is “100 mV (0.1 FS)”. At the same time, the function keys
[13] are assigned various units of measurement.
Analog Digital

3. Enter a new value (Ê 5-65).

The permissible entry range is:
0 ≤ PEAK ≤ 10.6 V (Analog)
0 ≤ PEAK ≤ 0.9999 FS (Digital)
The new setting is stored and displayed in the parameter field.

Ch 1 Ch 2
(Analog)
(Digital)

Operating Manual, 11/2007 6-151 E-1147.2759.00

Generator R&S UP300/350

6.2.2.2.8 DC OFFSET (DC Voltage Component)

Description In the DC OFFSET menu, you can set a DC voltage component at the
generator output.
Note: The DC Offset function is only effective if combined with a signal
function (e.g. SINE).
Selecting the 1. Call the generator DC OFFSET function (Ê 6-112).
DC OFFSET menu 2. Select the menu with the 3 or 4 cursor keys.
The menu name is highlighted and the function key [13] is
assigned the appropriate function.

Function key
assignment
Enter the DC offset. (Ê 6-153)

E-1147.2759.00 6-152 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Generator

Entering the DC Offset Voltage Component

Use All generator functions can be combined with a DC voltage component.

Selecting 1. Press the numeric keys 1, 2, or 3 to select channel Ch 1, Ch 2, or both
the channel channels Ch 1&2.
The selected channel is displayed in green in the channel display.

Entering the
2. Press the function key in the menu.
DC offset
An entry field containing the currently applicable setting is displayed. The
default setting is “100 mV (0.1 FS)”. At the same time, the function keys
[13] are assigned various units of measurement.
Analog Digital

3. Enter a new value (Ê 5-65).

The permissible entry range is:
-10.6 V ≤ DC OFFSET ≤ 10.6 V (Analog)
-0.9999 FS ≤ DC OFFSET ≤ 0.9999 FS (Digital)
The new setting is stored and displayed in the parameter field.

Ch 1 Ch 2
(Analog)
(Digital)

Note: The DC Offset function is only effective if combined with a signal

function (e.g. SINE). In this case, the maximum signal amplitude of the DC
OFFSET function depends on the amplitude of the other generator function;
the maximum signal amplitude decreases accordingly.

Operating Manual, 11/2007 6-153 E-1147.2759.00

Generator R&S UP300/350

6.2.2.2.9 SWEEP RMS

Description You can set the function parameters for a swept sinewave signal in the
SWEEP RMS menu. Frequency and/or amplitude may change in this case.
The associated measurement function RMS is automatically activated in the
analyzer.
Note: The sweep can be combined with only a few analyzer functions (Peak,
Quasi peak). You have to switch off all other analyzer functions before you
can activate the sweep. In some applications it is useful to set the
analyzer range mode to “Fixed” (Ê 6-220) to speed up the measurement and
to reduce the settling time with AC coupling.
Selecting the 1. Call the generator SWEEP RMS function (Ê 6-112).
SWEEP RMS menu 2. Select the menu with the 3 or 4 cursor keys.
The menu name is highlighted and the function keys [13] are assigned
the appropriate function.

Function key
assignment
Select the sweep mode. (Ê 6-156)

Set the measurement time. (Ê 6-157)

Open the submenu: (Ê 6-158)

Set the sweep parameters for frequency.
Open the submenu: (Ê 6-164)
Set the sweep parameters for amplitude.
Activate/Deactivate the filter. (Ê 6-232)

Select the unit for level display. (Ê 6-169)

E-1147.2759.00 6-154 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Generator

Displaying and Graphical display

analyzing
• Switch the DUT between the generator [8] and analyzer [9], or switch
measurement
the Generator output to Analyzer input internally (Ê 6-218).
results
• Select the CURVE PLOT display mode in the Graph menu (Ê 6-288).
• Press the numeric key 4 to start sweeping (Ê 6-285).
A measurement diagram with the sweep parameters is shown in the
display area.

Note: In the Graph menu, you can change the graphic display area
(Ê 6-288) and analyze the trace using the cursors (Ê 6-300). For
activating the cursors you must stop the sweep.
List of measurement values
• Switch the DUT between the generator [8] and analyzer [9], or switch
the Generator output to Analyzer input internally (Ê 6-218).
• Select the LIST OF VALUES display mode in the Graph menu
(Ê 6-288).
• Press the numeric key 4 to start sweeping (Ê 6-285).
The frequency and level values of the sweep are displayed.

Operating Manual, 11/2007 6-155 E-1147.2759.00

Generator R&S UP300/350

Selecting the Sweep Mode

Use You can select the parameters for sweeping:

ƒ FREQ SWEEP
The generator sweeps the frequency at fixed amplitude. The
measured RMS level versus the FREQ generator frequency is displayed.

ƒ AMPL SWEEP
The generator sweeps the amplitude at a fixed frequency. The
measured RMS level versus the AMPL generator amplitude is displayed.

ƒ FREQ&AMPL SWEEP
The generator sweeps the frequency at different amplitudes. The
measured RMS level versus the FREQ generator frequency is
displayed.

Note: The setting is always valid for both channels (Ch 1&2).

E-1147.2759.00 6-156 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Generator

Selecting the
sweep mode 1. Press the function key in the menu.
A selection field containing the available settings is displayed. The
default setting is “FREQ SWEEP “.

2. Use the rotary knob [11] to select a setting.

3. Press the ENTER key [5] to close the selection field.
The new setting is stored and displayed in the display area.

Ch 1&2

Setting the Measurement Time

Use You can set the measurement time dependent on the task.
Note: The setting is always valid for both channels (Ch 1&2).
Setting the
measurement time 1. Press the function key in the menu.
An entry field containing the currently applicable setting is displayed. The
default setting is “10 ms“. At the same time, the function keys [13] are
assigned various units of measurement.

2. Enter a new value (Ê 5-65).

The permissible entry range is:
1 ms ≤ MEAS TIME ≤ 10 s
The new setting is stored and displayed in the parameter field.

Ch 1&2

Operating Manual, 11/2007 6-157 E-1147.2759.00

Generator R&S UP300/350

Setting the Sweep Parameters for Frequency

Description You can set the sweep parameters for frequency in the PARAM FREQ sub-
menu.
Selecting the
PARAM FREQ Press the function key in the menu.
submenu The submenu is opened and the function keys [13] are assigned the
appropriate function.

Function key
assignment
Exit the submenu.

Enter the start value. (Ê 6-159)

Enter the stop value. (Ê 6-159)

Select scaling of sweep steps (Lin/Log). (Ê 6-161)

Enter the number of reading points. (Ê 6-161)

Enter the step size. (Ê 6-161)

Enter the measurement delay. (Ê 6-163)

Note: With the AMPL SWEEP sweep mode (Ê 6-156), only the and

function keys are available. By using the key, you can enter a

frequency value; determines the start delay of a new sweep.

E-1147.2759.00 6-158 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Generator

Entering the Frequency Range

Use
To set the frequency range, enter the start and stop values of
the frequency sweep.
Entering the
1. Press the function key in the submenu.
start value
An entry field containing the currently applicable setting is displayed. The
default setting is “10 Hz“. At the same time, the function keys [13] are
assigned various units of measurement.

2. Enter a new value (Ê 5-65).

The permissible entry range is:
10 Hz ≤ Start ≤ fmax
within: fmax - maximum frequency of generator type (Ê 6-107)
The new setting is stored and displayed in the parameter field.

Note: If the start value is higher than the stop value, the stop value is
adjusted automatically.

Operating Manual, 11/2007 6-159 E-1147.2759.00

Generator R&S UP300/350

Entering the
3. Press the function key in the submenu.
stop value
An entry field containing the currently applicable setting is displayed. The
default setting is “22.139 kHz“. At the same time, the function keys [13]
are assigned various units of measurement.

4. Enter a new value (Ê 5-65).

The permissible entry range is:
10 Hz ≤ Stop ≤ fmax
within: fmax - maximum frequency of generator type (Ê 6-107)
The new setting is stored and displayed in the parameter field.

Note: If the start value is higher than the stop value, the start value is
adjusted automatically.

E-1147.2759.00 6-160 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Generator

Selecting the Spacing of Sweep Steps (Lin/Log)

Use The spacing of the sweep points can be selected. You can decide if the dis-
tance between the valus set one after another is in Linear or Logarithmic
steps.
Selecting the
1. Press the function key in the corresponding or
Spacing
submenu.
A selection field containing the available settings is displayed. The
default setting is “Linear“.

2. Use the rotary knob [11] to select a setting.

3. Press the ENTER key [5] to close the selection field.
The new setting is stored and displayed in the parameter field.

Entering the Frequency Resolution

Use You can enter the frequency resolution in two different ways:
ƒ POINTS
Enter the number of reading points.
Based on the frequency range, the generator calculates the position of
the reading points and automatically determines the step size.
ƒ STEP SIZE
Enter the step size.
Based on the frequency range, the generator calculates the number of
reading points and automatically determines their position.
The first possibility:
1. Press the function key in the submenu.
Entering the number
of reading points An entry field containing the currently applicable setting is displayed. The
default setting is “100“.

2. Enter a new value (Ê 5-65).

The permissible entry range depends on the frequency range; with
maximum frequency range it is:
2 ≤ POINTS ≤ 1024
The new setting is stored and displayed in the parameter field.

Operating Manual, 11/2007 6-161 E-1147.2759.00

Generator R&S UP300/350

The second
3. Press the function key in the submenu.
possibility:
Entering the step In case of linear spacing, the default setting is “224 Hz“. At the same
size time, the function keys [13] are assigned various units of measurement.
In case of logaritmic spacing, the factor for step size is used.

4. Enter a new value (Ê 5-65).

The permissible entry range depends on the frequency range; with
maximum frequency range it is:
Linear spacing:
(START-STOP)/1023 ≤ STEP SIZE ≤ fmax
Logarithmic spacing:
(STOP/START)/1023 ≤ STEP SIZE ≤ STOP/START
The new setting is stored and displayed in the parameter field.

E-1147.2759.00 6-162 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Generator

Entering the Measurement Delay

Use You can set a delay for the level measurement. This delay refers to the
waiting period between the frequency setting and the start of the amplitude
measurement.
Entering the
1. Press the function key in the menu.
measurement delay
An entry field containing the currently applicable setting is displayed. The
default setting is ”0 ms“.

2. Enter a new value (Ê 5-65).

The permissible entry range is:
0 ms ≤ MEAS DELAY ≤ 5 s
The new setting is stored and displayed in the parameter field.

Operating Manual, 11/2007 6-163 E-1147.2759.00

Generator R&S UP300/350

Setting the Amplitude Sweep Parameters

Description You can set the sweep parameters for the amplitude in the PARAM AMPL
submenu.
Selecting the
Press the function key in the menu.
PARAM AMPL
submenu The submenu name is opened and the function keys [13] are assigned
the appropriate function.

Function key
assignment
Exit the submenu.

Enter the start value. (Ê 6-165)

Enter the stop value. (Ê 6-165)

Select scaling of sweep steps (Lin/Log). (Ê 6-161)

Enter the number of reading points. (Ê 6-167)

Enter the step size. (Ê 6-167)

Enter the measurement delay. (Ê 6-168)

Note: With the FREQ SWEEP sweep mode (Ê 6-156), only the and

function keys are available. By using the key, you can enter

an amplitude value; determines the start delay of a new sweep.

E-1147.2759.00 6-164 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Generator

Entering the Amplitude Range

Use
To set the amplitude range, enter the and values of the
amplitude sweep.
Entering the
1. Press the function key in the submenu.
start value
An entry field containing the currently applicable setting is displayed. The
default setting is “100 mV (0.1 FS)”. At the same time, the function keys
[13] are assigned various units of measurement.
Analog Digital

2. Enter a new value (Ê 5-65).

The permissible entry range is:
1 µV ≤ Start ≤ VStop (Analog)
0.0001 FS ≤ Start ≤ VStop (Digital)
-140 dBFS ≤ Start ≤ VStop (Digital)
within: VStop - stop value of amplitude sweep (Ê below)
The new setting is stored and displayed in the parameter field.
Analog

Digital

Entering the
3. Press the function key in the submenu.
stop value
An entry field containing the currently applicable setting is displayed. The
default setting is “7.495 V (0.9999 FS)”. At the same time, the function
keys are assigned various units of measurement.

Operating Manual, 11/2007 6-165 E-1147.2759.00

Generator R&S UP300/350

Analog Digital

4. Enter a new value (Ê 5-65).

The permissible entry range is:
VStart ≤ Stop ≤ 7.495 V (Analog)
VStart ≤ Stop ≤ 0.9999 FS (Digital)
within: VStart - stop value of amplitude sweep (Ê above)
The new setting is stored and displayed in the parameter field.
Analog

Digital

Selecting the Spacing of Sweep Steps (Lin/Log)

Use The spacing of the sweep points can be selected. You can decide if the dis-
tance between the valus set one after another is in Linear or Logarithmic
steps.
Selecting the
1. Press the function key in the corresponding or
Spacing
submenu.
A selection field containing the available settings is displayed. The
default setting is “Linear“.

2. Use the rotary knob [11] to select a setting.

3. Press the ENTER key [5] to close the selection field.
The new setting is stored and displayed in the parameter field.

E-1147.2759.00 6-166 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Generator

Entering the Amplitude Resolution

Use You can enter the amplitude resolution in two different ways:
ƒ POINTS
Enter the number of reading points.
Based on the amplitude range, the generator calculates the position of
the reading points and automatically determines the step size.
ƒ STEP SIZE
Enter the step size.
Based on the amplitude range, the generator calculates the number of
reading points and automatically determines their position.
The first possibility:
1. Press the function key in the submenu.
Entering the number
of reading points An entry field containing the currently applicable setting is displayed. The
default setting is “100“.

2. Enter a new value (Ê 5-65).

The permissible entry range depends on the sweep mode; with
maximum amplitude range it is:
2 ≤ POINTS ≤ 10 for concatenated sweep
2 ≤ POINTS ≤ 1024 for amplitude sweep
The new setting is stored and displayed in the parameter field.

The second
3. Press the function key in the submenu.
possibility:
Entering the step An entry field containing the currently applicable setting is displayed. The
size default setting is “74.7 mV (0.9998 FS)”. At the same time, the function
keys [13] are assigned various units of measurement.
Analog Digital

Operating Manual, 11/2007 6-167 E-1147.2759.00

Generator R&S UP300/350

4. Enter a new value (Ê 5-65).

The permissible entry range depends on the amplitude range; with
maximum amplitude range and linear spacing it is:
8 mV ≤ STEP SIZE ≤ 7.494 V (Analog)
0.0010 FS ≤ STEP SIZE ≤ 0.9980 FS (Digital)
The new setting is stored and displayed in the parameter field.
Analog

Digital

Entering the Measurement Delay

Use You can set a delay for the level measurement. This delay refers to the
waiting time between the amplitude setting and the start of the amplitude
measurement.
Entering the
1. Press the function key in the menu.
measurement delay
An entry field containing the currently applicable setting is displayed. The
default setting is ”200 ms“.

2. Enter a new value (Ê 5-65).

The permissible entry range is:
0 ms ≤ MEAS DELAY ≤ 5 s
The new setting is stored and displayed in the parameter field.

E-1147.2759.00 6-168 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Generator

Selecting the Unit for the Level Display

Use All measurements that return results with dimensions can be displayed either
as absolute measurements or relative to a reference value. If you select the
relative unit (dBr, dBrFS), the measurement result is displayed taking the
entered reference value into consideration.
Selecting a unit
1. Press the function key in the menu.
A selection field containing the available settings is displayed. The
default setting is “V (FS)”.
Analog Digital

2. Use the rotary knob [11] to select a setting.

3. Press the ENTER key [5] to close the selection field.
The new setting is stored and displayed in the display area.
Analog

Digital

Selecting the If you have selected the relative unit (dBr, dBrFS), a selection field
reference value containing various reference values appears.
ƒ Value
Manual reference value entry (Ê below)
ƒ Cursor X1
The current Y-coordinate value of the X1 cursor is stored and used
as the reference value for other measurements.
ƒ Cursor X2
The current Y-coordinate value of the X2 cursor is stored and used
as the reference value for other measurements.
The default setting is “Value“.

4. Use the rotary knob [11] to select a setting.

5. Press the ENTER key [5] to close the selection field.
The new setting is stored and displayed in the display area.

Operating Manual, 11/2007 6-169 E-1147.2759.00

Generator R&S UP300/350

Entering the After you have selected the “Value” setting, an entry field with the current
reference value reference value pops up. The default setting is “1 mV (0.001 FS)”. At the
manually same time, the function keys are assigned various units of measurement.

Analog Digital

6. Enter a new value (Ê 5-65).

The permissible entry range is:
1 µV ≤ REF. VALUE ≤ 100 V (Analog)
0.001 FS ≤ REF. VALUE ≤ 0.999 FS (Digital)
-120 dBFS ≤ REF. VALUE ≤ -0.001 dBFS (Digital)
The new setting is stored and displayed in the parameter field.
Analog

Digital

E-1147.2759.00 6-170 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Generator

6.2.2.2.10 SWEEP RMS SELECTIVE

Description You can set the function parameters for a swept sinewave signal in the
SWEEP RMS SELECTIVE menu. Frequency and/or amplitude may change
in this case. The associated measurement function is automatically activated
in the analyzer.
Note: The sweep can be combined with only a few analyzer functions (Peak,
Quasi peak, RMS/Freq). You have to switch off all other analyzer functions
before you can activate the sweep. In some applications, it is useful to set the
analyzer range mode to “Fixed” (Ê 6-220) to speed up the measurement and
to reduce the settling time with AC coupling.
Selecting the 1. Call the generator SWEEP RMS SELECTIVE function (Ê 6-112).
SWEEP RMS 2. Select the menu with the 3 or 4 cursor keys.
SELECTIVE menu
The menu name is highlighted and the function keys [13] are assigned
the appropriate function.

Function key
assignment
Select the sweep mode. (Ê 6-156)

Select the measurement bandwidth. (Ê 6-174)

Open the submenu: (Ê 6-158)

Set the sweep parameters for frequency.
Open the submenu: (Ê 6-164)
Set the sweep parameters for amplitude.
Activate/Deactivate the filter. (Ê 6-232)

Select the unit for the level display. (Ê 6-188)

Operating Manual, 11/2007 6-171 E-1147.2759.00

Generator R&S UP300/350

Displaying and Graphical display

analyzing
• Switch the DUT between the generator [8] and analyzer [9], or switch
measurement
the Generator output to Analyzer input internally (Ê 6-218).
results
• Select the CURVE PLOT display mode in the Graph menu (Ê 6-288).
• Press the numeric key 4 to start sweeping (Ê 6-285).
A measurement diagram with the sweep parameters is shown in the
display area.

Note: In the Graph menu you can change the graphic display area
(Ê 6-288) and analyze the trace using the cursors (Ê 6-300). For
activating the cursors, you must stop the sweep.
List of measurement values
• Switch the DUT between the generator [8] and analyzer [9], or switch
the Generator output to Analyzer input internally (Ê 6-218).
• Select the LIST OF VALUES display mode in the Graph menu
(Ê 6-288).
• Press the numeric key 4 to start sweeping (Ê 6-285).
The frequency and level values of the sweep are displayed.

E-1147.2759.00 6-172 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Generator

Selecting the Sweep Mode

Use You can select the parameters for sweeping:

ƒ FREQ SWEEP
The generator sweeps the frequency at fixed amplitude. The
measured RMS SELECTIVE level versus the FREQ generator frequency
is displayed.

ƒ AMPL SWEEP
The generator sweeps the amplitude at a fixed frequency. The
measured RMS SELECTIVE level versus the AMPL generator amplitude
is displayed.

ƒ FREQ&AMPL SWEEP
The generator sweeps the frequency at different amplitudes. The
measured RMS SELECTIVE level versus the FREQ generator
frequency is displayed.

Note: The setting is always valid for both channels (Ch 1&2).

Operating Manual, 11/2007 6-173 E-1147.2759.00

Generator R&S UP300/350

Selecting the
1. Press the function key in the menu.
sweep mode
A selection field containing the available settings is displayed. The
default setting is “FREQ SWEEP “.

2. Use the rotary knob [11] to select a setting.

3. Press the ENTER key [5] to close the selection field.
The new setting is stored and displayed in the display area.

Ch 1&2

Selecting the Measurement Bandwidth

Use You can select different measurement bandwidths:

• 1%
The Bandwidth is 1 % of the centre frequency.
• 3%
The Bandwidth is 3 % of the centre frequency.
• 1/12 octave
The Bandwidth is 1/12 octave (5.77 %) of the centre frequency.
• 1/3 octave
The Bandwidth is 1/3 octave (23.15 %) of the centre frequency.
• Rel.Value
The Bandwidth is the entered Value of the centre frequency [%].
• Abs. Value
The Bandwidth is constant, refering to the entered Value in Hz.
Note: The setting is always valid for both channels (Ch 1&2). The bandwidth
used for measurement is always higher than or equal 10 Hz, independent of
customer bandwitdh settings.

Selecting the
1. Press the function key in the menu.
measurement
bandwidth A selection field containing the available settings is displayed. The
default setting is “1/3 octave“.

2. Use the rotary knob [11] to select a setting.

3. Press the ENTER key [5] to close the selection field.
The new setting is stored and displayed in the parameter field.

Ch 1&2

E-1147.2759.00 6-174 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Generator

Entering the After you have selected the “Rel. Value” item, an entry field with the
relative bandwidth current relative bandwidth size pops up. The default setting is “1%“.
manually

4. Enter a new value (Ê 5-65).

The permissible entry range is:
0.001 % ≤ REL. BANDWIDTH ≤ 100 %
The new setting is stored and displayed in the parameter field.

Ch 1&2

Entering the After you have selected the “Abs. Value” item, an entry field with the
absolute bandwidth current absolute bandwidth size pops up. The default setting is “100 Hz“.
At the same time, the function keys are assigned various units of
measurement.

5. Enter a new value (Ê 5-65).

The permissible entry range is:
10 Hz ≤ ABS. BANDWIDTH ≤ fs * 0.1 Hz
within: fs - the lower value of the current generator´s and
analyzor´s sampling frequencies in [Hz]

The new setting is stored and displayed in the parameter field.

Ch 1&2

Operating Manual, 11/2007 6-175 E-1147.2759.00

Generator R&S UP300/350

Setting the Sweep Parameters for Frequency

Description You can set the sweep parameters for the frequency in the PARAM FREQ
submenu.
Selecting the
Press the function key in the menu.
PARAM FREQ
submenu The submenu is opened and the function keys [13] are assigned the
appropriate function.

Function key
assignment
Exit the submenu.

Enter the start value. (Ê 6-159)

Enter the stop value. (Ê 6-159)

Select scaling of sweep steps (Lin/Log). (Ê 6-161)

Enter the number of reading points. (Ê 6-161)

Enter the step size. (Ê 6-161)

Enter the measurement delay. (Ê 6-163)

Note: With the AMPL SWEEP sweep mode (Ê 6-156), only the and

function keys are available. By using the key, you can enter a

frequency value; determines the start delay of a new sweep.

E-1147.2759.00 6-176 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Generator

Entering the Frequency Range

Use
To set the frequency range, enter the start and stop values of
the frequency sweep.
Entering the
1. Press the function key in the submenu.
start value
An entry field containing the currently applicable setting is displayed. The
default setting is “11 Hz“. At the same time, the function keys [13] are
assigned various units of measurement.

2. Enter a new value (Ê 5-65).

The permissible entry range is:
BW/2 ≤ Start ≤ fmax – BW/2
within: fmax - maximum frequency of generator type (Ê 6-107)
The new setting is stored and displayed in the parameter field.

Note: If the start value is higher than the stop value, the stop value is
adjusted automatically.

Operating Manual, 11/2007 6-177 E-1147.2759.00

Generator R&S UP300/350

3. Press the function key in the submenu.

An entry field containing the currently applicable setting is displayed. The
default setting is “19.846 kHz“. At the same time, the function keys [13]
are assigned various units of measurement.

Entering the
stop value

4. Enter a new value (Ê 5-65).

The permissible entry range is:
BW/2 ≤ Start ≤ fmax - BW/2
within: fmax - maximum frequency of generator type (Ê 6-107)
The new setting is stored and displayed in the parameter field.

Note: If the start value is higher than the stop value, the start value is
adjusted automatically.

E-1147.2759.00 6-178 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Generator

Selecting the Spacing of Sweep Steps (Lin/Log)

Use The spacing of the sweep points can be selected. You can decide if the
distance between the values set one after another is in
Linear or Logarithmic steps.
Selecting the
1. Press the function key in the corresponding or
Spacing
submenu.
A selection field containing the available settings is displayed. The
default setting is “Linear“.

2. Use the rotary knob [11] to select a setting.

3. Press the ENTER key [5] to close the selection field.
The new setting is stored and displayed in the parameter field.

Entering the Frequency Resolution

Use You can enter the frequency resolution in two different ways:
ƒ POINTS
Enter the number of reading points.
Based on the frequency range, the generator calculates the position of
the reading points and automatically determines the step size.
ƒ STEP SIZE
Enter the step size.
Based on the frequency range, the generator calculates the number of
reading points and automatically determines their position.
The first possibility:
1. Press the function key in the submenu.
Entering the number
of reading points An entry field containing the currently applicable setting is displayed. The
default setting is “100“.

2. Enter a new value (Ê 5-65).

The permissible entry range depends on the frequency range; with
maximum frequency range it is:
2 ≤ POINTS ≤ 1024
The new setting is stored and displayed in the parameter field.

Operating Manual, 11/2007 6-179 E-1147.2759.00

Generator R&S UP300/350

The second
3. Press the function key in the submenu.
possibility:
Entering the step In case of linear spacing, the default setting is “200 Hz“. At the same
size time, the function keys are assigned various units of measurement.
In case of logarithmic spacing, factor for step size is used.

4. Enter a new value (Ê 5-65).

The permissible entry range depends on the frequency range; with
maximum frequency range it is:
Linear spacing:
(START-STOP)/1023 ≤ STEP SIZE ≤ fmax
Logarithmic spacing
( STOP/START )/1023 ≤ STEP SIZE ≤ STOP/START
The new setting is stored and displayed in the parameter field.

E-1147.2759.00 6-180 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Generator

Entering the Measurement Delay

Use You can set a delay for the level measurement. This delay refers to the
waiting period between the frequency setting and the start of the amplitude
measurement.
Entering the
1. Press the function key in the menu.
measurement delay
An entry field containing the currently applicable setting is displayed. The
default setting is ”0 ms“.

2. Enter a new value (Ê 5-65).

The permissible entry range is:
0 ms ≤ MEAS DELAY ≤ 5 s
The new setting is stored and displayed in the parameter field.

Operating Manual, 11/2007 6-181 E-1147.2759.00

Generator R&S UP300/350

Setting the Amplitude Sweep Parameters

Description You can set the sweep parameters for the amplitude in the PARAM AMPL
submenu.
Selecting the
Press the function key in the menu.
PARAM AMPL
submenu The submenu name is opened and the function keys [13] are assigned
the appropriate function.

Function key
assignment
Exit the submenu.

Enter the start value. (Ê 6-165)

Enter the stop value. (Ê 6-165)

Select scaling of sweep steps (Lin/Log). (Ê 6-161)

Enter the number of reading points. (Ê 6-167)

Enter the step size. (Ê 6-167)

Enter the measurement delay. (Ê 6-168)

Note: With the FREQ SWEEP sweep mode (Ê 6-156), only the and

function keys are available. By using the key, you can enter

an amplitude value; determines the start delay of a new sweep.

E-1147.2759.00 6-182 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Generator

Entering the Amplitude Range

Use
To set the amplitude range, enter the and values of the
amplitude sweep.
Entering the
1. Press the function key in the submenu.
start value
An entry field containing the currently applicable setting is displayed. The
default setting is “100 mV (0.1 FS)”. At the same time, the function keys
are assigned various units of measurement.
Analog Digital

2. Enter a new value (Ê 5-65).

The permissible entry range is:
1 µV ≤ Start ≤ VStop (Analog)
0.0001 FS ≤ Start ≤ VStop (Digital)
-140 dBFS ≤ Start ≤ VStop (Digital)
within: VStop - stop value of amplitude sweep (Ê below)
The new setting is stored and displayed in the parameter field.
Analog

Digital

Operating Manual, 11/2007 6-183 E-1147.2759.00

Generator R&S UP300/350

Entering the
3. Press the function key in the submenu.
stop value
An entry field containing the currently applicable setting is displayed. The
default setting is “7.495 V (0.9999 FS)”. At the same time, the function
keys are assigned various units of measurement.

Analog Digital

4. Enter a new value (Ê 5-65).

The permissible entry range is:
VStart ≤ Stop ≤ 7.495 V (Analog)
VStart ≤ Stop ≤ 0.9999 FS (Digital)
within: VStart - stop value of amplitude sweep (Ê above)
The new setting is stored and displayed in the parameter field.
Analog

Digital

E-1147.2759.00 6-184 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Generator

Selecting the Spacing of Sweep Steps (Lin/Log)

Use The spacing of the sweep points can be selected. You can decide if the dis-
tance between the valus set one after another is in Linear or Logarithmic
steps.
Selecting the
1. Press the function key in the corresponding or
Spacing
submenu.
A selection field containing the available settings is displayed. The
default setting is “Linear“.

2. Use the rotary knob [11] to select a setting.

3. Press the ENTER key [5] to close the selection field.
The new setting is stored and displayed in the parameter field.

Operating Manual, 11/2007 6-185 E-1147.2759.00

Generator R&S UP300/350

Entering the Amplitude Resolution

Use You can enter the amplitude resolution in two different ways:
ƒ POINTS
Enter the number of reading points.
Based on the amplitude range, the generator calculates the position of
the reading points and automatically determines the step size.
ƒ STEP SIZE
Enter the step size.
Based on the amplitude range, the generator calculates the number of
reading points and automatically determines their position.
The first possibility:
1. Press the function key in the submenu.
Entering the number
of reading points An entry field containing the currently applicable setting is displayed. The
default setting is “100“.

2. Enter a new value (Ê 5-65).

The permissible entry range depends on the sweep mode; with maxi-
mum amplitude range it is:
2 ≤ POINTS ≤ 10 for concatenated sweep
2 ≤ POINTS ≤ 1024 for amplitude sweep
The new setting is stored and displayed in the parameter field.

The second
3. Press the function key in the submenu.
possibility:
Entering the step An entry field containing the currently applicable setting is displayed. The
size default setting is “74.7 mV (0.9998 FS)”. At the same time, the function
keys [13] are assigned various units of measurement.
Analog Digital

E-1147.2759.00 6-186 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Generator

4. Enter a new value (Ê 5-65).

The permissible entry range depends on the amplitude range; with
maximum amplitude range and linear spacing it is:
8 mV ≤ STEP SIZE ≤ 7.494 V (Analog)
0.0010 FS ≤ STEP SIZE ≤ 0.9980 FS (Digital)
The new setting is stored and displayed in the parameter field.
Analog

Digital

Entering the Measurement Delay

Use You can set a delay for the level measurement. This delay refers to the
waiting time between the amplitude setting and the start of the amplitude
measurement.
Entering the
1. Press the function key in the menu.
measurement delay
An entry field containing the currently applicable setting is displayed. The
default setting is ”200 ms“.

2. Enter a new value (Ê 5-65).

The permissible entry range is:
0 ms ≤ MEAS DELAY ≤ 5 s
The new setting is stored and displayed in the parameter field.

Operating Manual, 11/2007 6-187 E-1147.2759.00

Generator R&S UP300/350

Selecting the Unit for the Level Display

Use All measurements that return results with dimensions can be displayed either
as absolute measurements or relative to a reference value. If you select the
relative unit (dBr, dBrFS), the measurement result is displayed taking the
entered reference value into consideration.
Selecting a unit
1. Press the function key in the menu.
A selection field containing the available settings is displayed. The
default setting is “V (FS)”.
Analog Digital

2. Use the rotary knob [11] to select a setting.

3. Press the ENTER key [5] to close the selection field.
The new setting is stored and displayed in the display area.
Analog

Digital

Selecting the If you have selected the relative unit (dBr, dBrFS), a selection field
reference value containing various reference values appears.
ƒ Value
Manual reference value entry (Ê below)
ƒ Cursor X1
The current Y-coordinate value of the X1 cursor is stored and used
as the reference value for other measurements.
ƒ Cursor X2
The current Y-coordinate value of the X2 cursor is stored and used
as the reference value for other measurements.
The default setting is “Value“.

4. Use the rotary knob [11] to select a setting.

5. Press the ENTER key [5] to close the selection field.
The new setting is stored and displayed in the display area.

E-1147.2759.00 6-188 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Generator

Entering the After you have selected the “Value” setting, an entry field with the current
reference value reference value pops up. The default setting is “1 mV (0.001 FS)”. At the
manually same time, the function keys are assigned various units of measurement.

Analog Digital

6. Enter a new value (Ê 5-65).

The permissible entry range is:
1 µV ≤ REF. VALUE ≤ 100 V (Analog)
0.0001 FS ≤ REF. VALUE ≤ 0.999 FS (Digital)
-120 dBFS ≤ REF. VALUE ≤ -0.001 dBFS (Digital)
The new setting is stored and displayed in the parameter field.
Analog

Digital

Operating Manual, 11/2007 6-189 E-1147.2759.00

Generator R&S UP300/350

6.2.2.2.11 SWEEP THD

Description You can set the function parameters for a swept sinewave signal in the
SWEEP THD menu. Frequency and/or amplitude may change in this case.
The associated measurement function is automatically activated in the
analyzer.
Note: The sweep can be combined with only a few analyzer functions (Peak,
Quasi peak, RMS/FREQ). You have to switch off all other analyzer functions
before you can activate the sweep.
Selecting the 1. Call the generator SWEEP THD function (Ê 6-112).
SWEEP THD menu 2. Select the menu with the 3 or 4 cursor keys.
The menu name is highlighted and the function keys [13] are assigned
the appropriate function.

Function key
assignment
Select the sweep mode. (Ê 6-156)

Select the mesurement mode. (Ê 6-193)

Set the measurement time. (Ê 6-157)

Open the submenu: (Ê 6-158)

Set the sweep parameters for frequency.
Open the submenu: (Ê 6-164)
Set the sweep parameters for amplitude.
Activate/Deactivate the filter. (Ê 6-232)

Select the unit for the level display. (Ê 6-208)

E-1147.2759.00 6-190 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Generator

Displaying and Graphical display

analyzing
• Switch the DUT between the generator [8] and analyzer [9], or switch
measurement
the
results
Generator output to Analyzer input internally (Ê 6-218).
• Select the CURVE PLOT display mode in the Graph menu (Ê 6-288).
• Press the numeric key 4 to start sweeping (Ê 6-285).
A measurement diagram with the sweep parameters is shown in the
display area.

Note: In the Graph menu, you can change the graphic display area
(Ê 6-288) and analyze the trace using the cursors (Ê 6-300). For
activating the cursors you must stop the sweep.
List of measurement values
• Switch the DUT between the generator [8] and analyzer [9], or switch
the
Generator output to Analyzer input internally (Ê 6-218).
• Select the LIST OF VALUES display mode in the Graph menu
(Ê 6-288).
• Press the numerical key 4 to start sweeping (Ê 6-285).
The frequency and level values of the sweep are displayed.

Operating Manual, 11/2007 6-191 E-1147.2759.00

Generator R&S UP300/350

Selecting the Sweep Mode

Use You can select the parameters for sweeping:

ƒ FREQ SWEEP
The generator sweeps the frequency at fixed amplitude. The
measured THD versus the FREQ generator frequency is
displayed.

ƒ AMPL SWEEP
The generator sweeps the amplitude at a fixed frequency. The
measured THD versus the AMPL generator amplitude is
displayed.

ƒ FREQ&AMPL SWEEP
The generator sweeps the frequency at different amplitudes. The
measured THD versus the FREQ generator frequency is
displayed.

Note: The setting is always valid for both channels (Ch 1&2).

E-1147.2759.00 6-192 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Generator

Selecting the
1. Press the function key in the menu.
sweep mode
A selection field containing the available settings is displayed. The
default setting is “FREQ SWEEP “.

2. Use the rotary knob [11] to select a setting.

3. Press the ENTER key [5] to close the selection field.
The new setting is stored and displayed in the display area.

Ch 1&2

Selecting the Measurement Mode

Use All harmonics (with the distortion factor measurement) and the noise power
(with THD+N and SINAD) are measured and displayed as a table or graph.
You can select different measurement methods for the distortion factor and
the signal/noise ratio.
ƒ THD (All Harm.)
All harmonics are measured.
ƒ THD (Even Harm.)
All even harmonics are measured.
ƒ THD (Odd Harm.)
All odd harmonics are measured.
ƒ THD (Select Harm.)
All selected harmonics are measured.
ƒ THD + N
All harmonics and the noise are measured.
ƒ SINAD
All harmonics and the noise are measured.
ƒ NOISE
The noise is measured.
ƒ LEVEL THDN
The RMS value of harmonics and noise is measured.
ƒ LEVEL NOISE
The RMS value of the noise is measured.
Note: The setting is always valid for both channels (Ch 1&2).
Selecting the
1. Press the function key in the menu.
measurement mode
A selection field containing the available settings is displayed. The
default setting is “THD (All Harm.)”.

Operating Manual, 11/2007 6-193 E-1147.2759.00

Generator R&S UP300/350

2. Use the rotary knob [11] to select a setting.

3. Press the ENTER key [5] to close the selection field.
The new setting is stored and displayed in the parameter field.

Ch 1&2

Selecting the If you have selected the "THD (Select Harm.)" measurement mode, the
harmonics selection field is displayed with all harmonics.
(at measurement
mode ”Select
Harm.“)

4. Use the rotary knob [11] to select a setting and press the ENTER
key [5] to change the selection.
A check marker “9” is displayed next to the
corresponding number (harmonic), indicating the selection.

Note: For deactivation of numbers (harmonics with marking) use the

same way.
5. Use the rotary knob [11] to select the Return item.
6. Press the ENTER key [5] to close the selection field.
The new setting is stored and displayed in the parameter field.

Ch 1&2

E-1147.2759.00 6-194 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Generator

Seting the Measurement Time

Use You can select different measurement times according to the measurement
task:
ƒ Fast
A fast measurement with a lower dynamic range is performed.
ƒ Normal
Measurement is performed with a higher dynamic range.
Note: The setting is always valid for both channels (Ch 1&2).
Selecting the
1. Press the function key in the menu.
measurement time
A selection field containing the available settings is displayed. The
default setting is “Fast“.

2. Use the rotary knob [11] to select a setting.

3. Press the ENTER key [5] to close the selection field.
The new setting is stored and displayed in the parameter field.

Ch 1&2

Operating Manual, 11/2007 6-195 E-1147.2759.00

Generator R&S UP300/350

Setting the Sweep Parameters for Frequency

Description You can set the sweep parameters for the frequency in the PARAM FREQ
submenu.
Selecting the
Press the function key in the menu.
PARAM FREQ
submenu The submenu is opened and the function keys [13] are assigned the
appropriate function.

Function key
assignment
Exit the submenu.

Enter the start value. (Ê 6-197)

Enter the stop value. (Ê 6-197)

Select scaling of sweep steps (Lin/Log). (Ê 6-198)

Enter the number of reading points. (Ê 6-199)

Enter the step size. (Ê 6-199)

Enter the measurement delay. (Ê 6-201)

Note: With the AMPL SWEEP sweep mode (Ê 6-192), only the and

function keys are available. By using the key, you can enter a

frequency value; determines the start delay of a new sweep.

E-1147.2759.00 6-196 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Generator

Entering the Frequency Range

Use
To set the frequency range, enter the start and stop values of
the frequency sweep.
Entering the
1. Press the function key in the submenu.
start value
An entry field containing the currently applicable setting is displayed. The
default setting is “10 Hz“. At the same time, the function keys [13] are
assigned various units of measurement.

2. Enter a new value (Ê 5-65).

The permissible entry range is:
10 Hz ≤ Start ≤ fmax
within: fmax - maximum frequency of generator type (Ê 6-107)
The new setting is stored and displayed in the parameter field.

Note: If the start value is higher than the stop value, the stop value is
adjusted automatically.

Operating Manual, 11/2007 6-197 E-1147.2759.00

Generator R&S UP300/350

Entering the
3. Press the function key in the submenu.
stop value
An entry field containing the currently applicable setting is displayed. The
default setting is “22.139 kHz“. At the same time, the function keys [13]
are assigned various units of measurement.

4. Enter a new value (Ê 5-65).

The permissible entry range is:
10 Hz ≤ Stop ≤ fmax
within: fmax - maximum frequency of generator type (Ê 6-107)
The new setting is stored and displayed in the parameter field.

Note: If the start value is higher than the stop value, the start value is
adjusted automatically.

Selecting the Spacing of Sweep Steps (Lin/Log)

Use The spacing of the sweep points can be selected. You can decide if the
distance between the valus set one after another is in Linear or Logarithmic
steps.
Selecting the
1. Press the function key in the corresponding or
Spacing
submenu.
A selection field containing the available settings is displayed. The
default setting is “Linear“.

2. Use the rotary knob [11] to select a setting.

3. Press the ENTER key [5] to close the selection field.
The new setting is stored and displayed in the parameter field.

E-1147.2759.00 6-198 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Generator

Entering the Frequency Resolution

Use You can enter the frequency resolution in two different ways:
ƒ POINTS
Enter the number of reading points.
Based on the frequency range, the generator calculates the position of
the reading points and automatically determines the step size.
ƒ STEP SIZE
Enter the step size.
Based on the frequency range, the generator calculates the number of
reading points and automatically determines their position.
The first possibility:
1. Press the function key in the submenu.
Entering the number
of reading points An entry field containing the currently applicable setting is displayed. The
default setting is “100“.

2. Enter a new value (Ê 5-65).

The permissible entry range depends on the frequency range; with
maximum frequency range it is:
2 ≤ POINTS ≤ 200
The new setting is stored and displayed in the parameter field.

Operating Manual, 11/2007 6-199 E-1147.2759.00

Generator R&S UP300/350

The second
3. Press the function key in the submenu.
possibility:
Entering the step An entry field containing the currently applicable setting is displayed.
size
In case of linear spacing, the default setting is “224 Hz“. At the same
time, the function keys are assigned various units of measurement.
In case of logaritmic spacing, a factor for step size is used.

4. Enter a new value (Ê 5-65).

The permissible entry range depends on the frequency range; with
maximum frequency range it is:
Linear spacing:
(START-STOP)/199 ≤ STEP SIZE ≤ fmax
Logarithmic spacing:
(STOP/START)/199 ≤ STEP SIZE ≤ STOP/START
The new setting is stored and displayed in the parameter field.

E-1147.2759.00 6-200 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Generator

Entering the Measurement Delay

Use You can set a delay for the level measurement. This delay refers to the
waiting period between the frequency setting and the start of the amplitude
measurement.
Entering the
1. Press the function key in the menu.
measurement delay
An entry field containing the currently applicable setting is displayed. The
default setting is ”0 ms“.

2. Enter a new value (Ê 5-65).

The permissible entry range is:
0 ms ≤ MEAS DELAY ≤ 5 s
The new setting is stored and displayed in the parameter field.

Operating Manual, 11/2007 6-201 E-1147.2759.00

Generator R&S UP300/350

Setting the Amplitude Sweep Parameters

Description You can set the sweep parameters for the amplitude in the PARAM AMPL
submenu.
Selecting the
Press the function key in the menu.
PARAM AMPL
submenu The submenu name is opened and the function keys [13] are assigned
the appropriate function.

Function key
assignment
Exit the submenu.

Enter the start value. (Ê 6-203)

Enter the stop value. (Ê 6-203)

Select scaling of sweep steps (Lin/Log). (Ê 6-205)

Enter the number of reading points. (Ê 6-206)

Enter the step size. (Ê 6-206)

Enter the measurement delay. (Ê 6-207)

Note: With the FREQ SWEEP sweep mode (Ê 6-192), only the and

function keys are available. By using the key, you can enter

an amplitude value; determines the start delay of a new sweep.

E-1147.2759.00 6-202 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Generator

Entering the Amplitude Range

Use
To set the amplitude range, enter the and values of the
amplitude sweep.
Entering the
1. Press the function key in the submenu.
start value
An entry field containing the currently applicable setting is displayed. The
default setting is “100 mV (0.1 FS)“. At the same time, the function keys
[13] are assigned various units of measurement.
Analog Digital

2. Enter a new value (Ê 5-65).

The permissible entry range is:
1 µV ≤ Start ≤ VStop (Analog)
0.0001 FS ≤ Start ≤ VStop (Digital)
-140 dBFS ≤ Start ≤ VStop (Digital)
within: VStop - stop value of amplitude sweep (Ê below)
The new setting is stored and displayed in the parameter field.
Analog

Digital

Operating Manual, 11/2007 6-203 E-1147.2759.00

Generator R&S UP300/350

Entering the
3. Press the function key in the submenu.
stop value
An entry field containing the currently applicable setting is displayed. The
default setting is “7.495 V (0.9999 FS)”. At the same time, the function
keys [13] are assigned various units of measurement.

Analog Digital

4. Enter a new value (Ê 5-65).

The permissible entry range is:
VStart ≤ Stop ≤ 7.495 V (Analog)
VStart ≤ Stop ≤ 0.9999 FS (Digital)
within: VStart - stop value of amplitude sweep (Ê above)
The new setting is stored and displayed in the parameter field.
Analog

Digital

E-1147.2759.00 6-204 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Generator

Selecting the Spacing of Sweep Steps (Lin/Log)

Use The spacing of the sweep points can be selected. You can decide if the dis-
tance between the valus set one after another is in Linear or Logarithmic
steps.
Selecting the
1. Press the function key in the corresponding or
Spacing
submenu.
A selection field containing the available settings is displayed. The
default setting is “Linear“.

2. Use the rotary knob [11] to select a setting.

3. Press the ENTER key [5] to close the selection field.
The new setting is stored and displayed in the parameter field.

Operating Manual, 11/2007 6-205 E-1147.2759.00

Generator R&S UP300/350

Entering the Amplitude Resolution

Use You can enter the amplitude resolution in two different ways:
ƒ POINTS
Enter the number of reading points.
Based on the amplitude range, the generator calculates the position of
the reading points and automatically determines the step size.
ƒ STEP SIZE
Enter the step size.
Based on the amplitude range, the generator calculates the number of
reading points and automatically determines their position.
The first possibility:
1. Press the function key in the submenu.
Entering the number
of reading points An entry field containing the currently applicable setting is displayed. The
default setting is “100“.

2. Enter a new value (Ê 5-65).

The permissible entry range depends on the sweep mode; with
maximum amplitude range it is:
2 ≤ POINTS ≤ 10 for concatenated sweep
2 ≤ POINTS ≤ 200 for amplitude sweep
The new setting is stored and displayed in the parameter field.

The second
3. Press the function key in the submenu.
possibility:
Entering the step An entry field containing the currently applicable setting is displayed. The
size default setting is “74.7 mV (0.9998 FS)”. At the same time, the function
keys are assigned various units of measurement.
Analog Digital

E-1147.2759.00 6-206 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Generator

4. Enter a new value (Ê 5-65).

The permissible entry range depends on the amplitude range; with
maximum amplitude range it is:
8 mV ≤ STEP SIZE ≤ 7.494 V (Analog)
0.0010 FS ≤ STEP SIZE ≤ 0.9980 FS (Digital)
The new setting is stored and displayed in the parameter field.
Analog

Digital

Entering the Measurement Delay

Use You can set a delay for the level measurement. This delay refers to the
waiting time between the amplitude setting and the start of the amplitude
measurement.
Entering the
1. Press the function key in the menu.
measurement delay
An entry field containing the currently applicable setting is displayed. The
default setting is ”200 ms“.

2. Enter a new value (Ê 5-65).

The permissible entry range is:
0 ms ≤ MEAS DELAY ≤ 5 s
The new setting is stored and displayed in the parameter field.

Operating Manual, 11/2007 6-207 E-1147.2759.00

Generator R&S UP300/350

Selecting the Unit for the Level Display

Use You can set different units of the level display depending on measurement
task.
Note: The setting is always valid for both channels (Ch 1&2).
Selecting the unit
1. Press the function key in the menu.
A selection field containing the available settings is displayed. The
default setting is “dB“.

2. Use the rotary knob [11] to select a setting.

3. Press the ENTER key [5] to close the selection field.
The new setting is stored and displayed in the display area.

Ch 1&2

E-1147.2759.00 6-208 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Generator

6.2.3 Audio Monitoring Output (MONITOR)

Description In the MONITOR menu, you can configure the audio monitoring output of the
R&S UP300/350. This includes selection of the signal source and the volume
adjustment.
Selecting the Select the menu with the 3 or 4 cursor keys.
MONITOR menu
The menu name is highlighted and the function keys [13] are assigned
the appropriate function.

Function key
assignment
Switch the audio monitoring output on/off. (Ê 6-210)

Select the signal source. (Ê 6-211)

Enter the volume. (Ê 6-211)

Operating Manual, 11/2007 6-209 E-1147.2759.00

Generator R&S UP300/350

Activating/Deactivating the Audio Monitoring Output

Use At the audio monitoring output [15], you can use headphones or scope to
monitor signals which can be tapped at various points in the R&S UP300/350.
To do so, you must first switch on the audio monitoring output.
Note: The setting is always valid for both channels (Ch 1&2).
Activating the audio
1. Press the function key in the menu.
monitoring output
The function key is highlighted. The new setting is stored and displayed
in the parameter field.

After you switch on the audio monitoring output, the generator signal is
applied at the output [8].
Deactivating the
2. Press the function key in the menu.
audio monitoring
output The function key is no longer highlighted. The new setting is stored
and displayed in the parameter field.

E-1147.2759.00 6-210 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Generator

Selecting the Signal Source

Use You can monitor signals at the audio monitoring output [15] using
headphones. You can select the following signal sources:
ƒ Anl. Filter
Analyzer signal downstream of the filter stage
ƒ Generator
Generator output signal
Note: The setting is always valid for both channels (Ch 1&2).
Selecting the
1. Press the function key in the menu.
signal source
A selection field containing the available settings is displayed. The
default setting is “” “Generator“.

2. Use the rotary knob [11] to select a setting.

3. Press the ENTER key [5] to close the selection field.
The new setting is stored and displayed in the parameter field.

Ch 1&2

Setting the Volume

Use You can enter the volume of the signal at the audio monitoring output. The
setting is in percent and refers to the corresponding signal level.
Selecting 1. Press the numeric keys 1, 2, or 3 to select channel Ch 1, Ch 2, or both
the channel channels Ch 1&2.
The selected channel is displayed in green in the channel display.

Entering
2. Press the function key in the menu.
the volume
An entry field containing the currently applicable setting is displayed. The
default setting is “20 %“.

3. Enter a new value (Ê 5-65).

The permissible entry range is:
0 % ≤ VOLUME ≤ 100 %
The new setting is stored and displayed in the parameter field.

Ch 1 Ch 2

Operating Manual, 11/2007 6-211 E-1147.2759.00

Analyzer R&S UP300/350

6.3 Analyzer
Introduction The analyzer is capable of performing standard audio measurements with a
high degree of accuracy. The measurement functions are either analog or
digital (R&S UP350 only). You can activate up to 3 digital filters. All of the
filters commonly used for audio measurements are predefined.
Apart from displaying measurement results numerically, you can also analyze
the measurements graphically (Ê 6-286).
Activating the
Analyzer menu Press the main menu selection key.
1. The instrument has to be in local mode.
2. Close the SYS menu if opened.
3. Close every entry field if opened.
The Analyzer menu is displayed:

Menus for The menus used to set the analyzer functions are displayed in the menu
configuring and area.
setting
measurement
parameters
Select the measurement functions. (Ê 6-224)

Configure the filter. (Ê 6-282)

Configure the input parameter. (Ê 6-213)

E-1147.2759.00 6-212 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Analyzer

6.3.1 Configuring the Analyzer (CONFIG)

Description The CONFIG menu is used for basic configuration of the analyzer. The
following settings are made in the CONFIG menu:
ƒ Switchover between the analog and digital analyzer (R&S UP350 only)
ƒ Input switchover of the digital analyzer (R&S UP350 only)
ƒ Switchover between bandwidths (sample rate)
ƒ Activation/Deactivation of analog input and switchover to generator
output
ƒ Input configuration
ƒ Selection of range switching and of measurement range
ƒ Selection of measurement channel
Selecting the Select the menu with the 3 or 4 cursor keys.
CONFIG menu
The menu name is highlighted and the function keys [13] are assigned
the appropriate function.
Analog analyzer

Function key
assignment

Select the analyzer type (digital) (R&S UP350 only). (Ê 6-215)

Select the analyzer bandwidth. (Ê 6-216)

Select the reference potential of the input signal. (Ê 6-217)

Select the signal source. (Ê 6-218)

Select the signal coupling. (Ê 6-219)

Select the measurement range selection mode. (Ê 6-220)

Select the measurement channel. (Ê 6-221)

Operating Manual, 11/2007 6-213 E-1147.2759.00

Analyzer R&S UP300/350

Digital analyzer
(R&S UP350 only)

Function key
assignment

Select the analyzer type (analog). (Ê 6-215)

Select the sample frequency of the input signal. (Ê 6-222)

Select the input signal. (Ê 6-223)

Select the valid number of bits in the input signal. (Ê 6-223)

Select the measurement channel. (Ê 6-221)

E-1147.2759.00 6-214 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Analyzer

6.3.1.1 Selecting the Analyzer Type – Analog/Digital (R&S UP350 only)

Use When the analyzer type is changed, the new analyzer (e.g. digital) with the
currently selected measurement functions and the stored parameters of the
old analyzer type (e.g. analog) is started.
Note: The setting is always valid for both channels (Ch 1&2).
Selecting the
Press the function key in the menu.
Analog analyzer
The instrument is in the analog mode. You can then use all the function
keys which appear to configure the input parameters and the basic
conditions of the analyzer. If the status line shows “ANALYZER –
ANALOG”, the instrument is in the analog mode.

Selecting the
Press the function key in the menu.
Digital analyzer
The instrument is in the digital mode. You can then use all the function
keys which appear to configure the input parameters. If the status line
shows “ANALYZER – DIGITAL”, the instrument is in the digital mode.

Operating Manual, 11/2007 6-215 E-1147.2759.00

Analyzer R&S UP300/350

6.3.1.2 Analog Analyzer

6.3.1.2.1 Selecting the Analyzer Bandwidth

Use Switching the bandwidth changes the sample frequency. The measurement
features depend on the ratio of signal frequency to sample frequency. It
influences, for example, the lower limit frequency of the phase measurement,
the frequency resolution of the FFT, and the dynamic range of filters at low
frequencies. To fully utilize the features of the R&S UP300/350, you should
therefore set your instrument to the bandwidth that you actually require.
The R&S UP300/350 provides the following bandwidths for the analog
analyzer:
ƒ 22 kHz
ƒ 40 kHz
ƒ 80 kHz
Note: The setting is always valid for both channels (Ch 1&2).
Selecting the
1. Press the function key in the menu.
analyzer bandwidth
A selection field containing the available settings is displayed. The
default setting is “22 kHz“.

2. Use the rotary knob [11] to select a setting.

3. Press the ENTER key [5] to close the selection field.
The new setting is stored and displayed in the parameter field.

Ch 1&2

E-1147.2759.00 6-216 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Analyzer

6.3.1.2.2 Selecting the Reference Potential of the Input Signal

Use To prevent hum pick-up caused by grounding loops, the test setup must not
have multiple grounding points. Instead, only one point of the test setup
should be connected to the housing ground. Depending on the application,
you can select the following reference potentials for the input signal of the
analyzer (output signal of the generator, Ê 6-103):
ƒ Grounded
Refering to the housing potential
ƒ Floating
"Electronically floating"
Selecting 1. Press the numeric keys 1, 2, or 3 to select channel Ch 1, Ch 2, or both
the channel channels Ch 1&2.
The selected channel is displayed in green in the channel display.

Selecting the
2. Press the function key in the menu.
reference potential
A selection field containing the available settings is displayed. The
default setting is “floating“.

3. Use the rotary knob [11] to select a setting.

4. Press the ENTER key [5] to close the selection field.
The new setting is stored and displayed in the parameter field.

Ch 1 Ch 2

Operating Manual, 11/2007 6-217 E-1147.2759.00

Analyzer R&S UP300/350

6.3.1.2.3 Selecting the Signal Source

Use The R&S UP300/350 allows you to deactivate the analyzer input or to activate
either the test connectors or the generator output.
ƒ Off
The signal inputs are deactivated.
ƒ On
The signal inputs are activated.
ƒ Gen Meas
Analyzer input Ch 2 is internally switched to generator output Ch 1, and
analyzer input Ch 1 to generator output Ch 2.
Selecting 1. Press the numeric keys 1, 2, or 3 to select channel Ch 1, Ch 2, or both
the channel channels Ch 1&2.
The selected channel is displayed in green in the channel display.

Selecting the
2. Press the function key in the menu.
signal source
A selection field containing the available settings is displayed. The
default setting is “On“.

3. Use the rotary knob [11] to select a setting.

4. Press the ENTER key [5] to close the selection field.
The new setting is stored and displayed in the parameter field.

Ch 1 Ch 2

Note: When the signal inputs are switched off, INPUT OFF is displayed in
measurement displays (Ê 5-57).

E-1147.2759.00 6-218 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Analyzer

6.3.1.2.4 Selecting the Signal Coupling

Use The signal coupling function is used to select between a DC

voltage coupling (DC) and AC voltage coupling (AC). Owing to the capacitive
signal coupling associated with the AC coupling, a digital high-pass filter is
added to ensure effective suppression of the DC offset.
Note: The setting is always valid for both channels (Ch 1&2).
Selecting the
1. Press the function key in the submenu.
signal coupling
A selection field containing the available settings is displayed. The
default setting is “AC“.

2. Use the rotary knob [11] to select a setting.

3. Press the ENTER key [5] to close the selection field.
The new setting is stored and displayed in the parameter field.

Ch 1 Ch 2

Operating Manual, 11/2007 6-219 E-1147.2759.00

Analyzer R&S UP300/350

6.3.1.2.5 Selecting the Measurement Range Selection Mode

Use The measurement range selection mode determines how the input voltage is
to be measured at the input amplifier of the analyzer:
ƒ Auto
Automatic measurement range selection; the optimum range is selected.
ƒ Fixed
The set measurement range is selected.
ƒ Lower
Automatic measurement with the defined lowest possible range used.
Selecting 1. Press the numeric keys 1, 2, or 3 to select channel Ch 1, Ch 2, or both
the channel channels Ch 1&2.
The selected channel is displayed in green in the channel display.

Selecting the
2. Press the function key in the menu.
measurement range
selection mode A selection field containing the available settings is displayed. The
default setting is “Auto“.

3. Use the rotary knob [11] to select a setting.

4. Press the ENTER key [5] to close the selection field.
The new setting is stored and displayed in the parameter field.

Ch 1 Ch 2

Entering the After you have selected the “Fixed/Lower” level setting, an entry field
level range with the current level range pops up. The default setting is
(at level setting “0.00 V .. 0.40 V“.
„Fixed/Lower“)

1. Use the rotary knob [11] to select a setting.

2. Press the ENTER key [5] to close the selection field.
The new setting is stored and displayed in the parameter field.

Ch 1 Ch 2

E-1147.2759.00 6-220 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Analyzer

6.3.1.2.6 Selecting the Measurement Channel

Use You can first select the channel which you want for measurements. You can
choose between the following settings:
ƒ Ch 1
Measurement channel Ch 1 is active.
ƒ Ch 2
Measurement channel Ch 2 is active.
ƒ Ch 1&2
Both measurement channels Ch 1 and Ch 2 are active.
Selecting the
1. Press the function key in the menu.
measurement
channel A selection field containing the available settings is displayed. The
default setting is “Ch 1&2“.

2. Use the rotary knob [11] to select a setting.

3. Press the ENTER key [5] to close the selection field.
The new setting is stored and displayed in the parameter field.

Operating Manual, 11/2007 6-221 E-1147.2759.00

Analyzer R&S UP300/350

6.3.1.3 Digital Analyzer (R&S UP350 only)

6.3.1.3.1 Selecting the Sample Frequency of the Input Signal

Use You can set the sample rate of the input signal. If the sample frequency of the
analyzer does not correspond to the signal frequency, many measurement
functions will return incorrect measurements (especially if filters are
activated).
The sample frequency fsample determines the maximum analyzer frequency
fmax. You can select the following sample frequencies:
ƒ 32 kHz (fmax = 14.51 kHz)
ƒ 44.1 kHz (fmax = 19.999 kHz)
ƒ 48 kHz (fmax = 21.768 kHz)
ƒ 96 kHz (fmax = 43.536 kHz)
ƒ 192 kHz (fmax = 87.07 kHz)
Note: The setting is always valid for both channels (Ch 1&2).
Selecting the
1. Press the function key in the menu.
sample frequency
A selection field containing the available settings is displayed. The
default setting is “44.1 kHz“.

2. Use the rotary knob [11] to select a setting.

3. Press the ENTER key [5] to close the selection field.
The new setting is stored and displayed in the parameter field.

Ch 1&2

E-1147.2759.00 6-222 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Analyzer

6.3.1.3.2 Selecting the Input Signal

Use The R&S UP350 allows you to select the following digital interfaces as signal
sources:
ƒ S/P DIF
BNC digital input
ƒ Optical
Optical digital input
Note: The setting is always valid for both channels (Ch 1&2).
Selecting the
1. Press the function key in the menu.
interface protocol
A selection field containing the available settings is displayed. The
default setting is “S/P DIF“.

2. Use the rotary knob [11] to select a setting.

3. Press the ENTER key [5] to close the selection field.
The new setting is stored and displayed in the parameter field.

Ch 1&2

6.3.1.3.3 Selecting the Valid Number of Bits in the Input Signal

Use If the word size of the input signal is reduced, the audio data is truncated to
the specified wordwidth (bits).
Selecting 1. Press the numeric keys 1, 2, or 3 to select channel Ch 1, Ch 2, or both
the channel channels Ch 1&2.
The selected channel is displayed in green in the channel display.

Selecting the valid

2. Press the function key in the menu.
number of bits
A selection field containing the available settings is displayed. The
default setting is “24 bits“.

3. Use the rotary knob [11] to select a setting.

4. Press the ENTER key [5] to close the selection field.
The new setting is stored and displayed in the parameter field.

Ch 1 Ch 2

Operating Manual, 11/2007 6-223 E-1147.2759.00

Analyzer R&S UP300/350

6.3.2 Setting the Measurement Functions (FUNCTIONS)

Description In the FUNCTIONS menu, you can select the analyzer functions which you
want to activate and configure. The selected measurement function is
displayed in a vacant field in the menu bar and is available as a menu key to
allow you to enter parameters for the measurement function. At the same
time, the appropriate measurement function is activated in the analyzer.
You can only activate a limited number of measurement functions. All
functions which can no longer be combined with the already selected
measurement functions are deactivated (displayed in gray).
When you have selected a measurement function in the menu bar, the list of
available measurement parameters appears on the screen (Ê 6-226).
Selecting the Select the menu with the 3 or 4 cursor keys.
FUNCTIONS menu
The menu name is highlighted and the function keys [13] are assigned
the appropriate function.

The 1st function key

assignment
Display the next set of functions.

Measure the frequency, DC voltage, and RMS. (Ê 6-228)

Measure the peak value. (Ê 6-237)

Measure the quasi-peak value. (Ê 6-243)

Selective RMS measurement (Ê 6-246)

Frequency-domain display mode of the input signal (Ê 6-251)

Measure distortion (THD, THD+N, SINAD, Noise). (Ê 6-259)

E-1147.2759.00 6-224 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Analyzer

The 2nd function key

assignment
Display the previous set of functions.

Perform the polarity test. (Ê 6-267)

Measure the difference frequency distortion. (Ê 6-268)

Measure the phase difference between channels Ch 1 and Ch 2. (Ê 6-272)

Measure the modulation distortion. (Ê 6-275)

Protocol analysis (R&S UP350 only). (Ê 6-278)

Measure the sample frequency (R&S UP350 only). (Ê 6-281)

Operating Manual, 11/2007 6-225 E-1147.2759.00

Analyzer R&S UP300/350

6.3.2.1 Selecting the Measurement Functions

Switching on the 1. Press a function key for a measurement function in the menu.
measurement
function A new menu item (e.g. PEAK) appears in the menu area:

You can select up to 3 functions at a time. The number of

measurement functions depends on the possible combinations of
measurement functions (Ê 6-224), e.g. PEAK, QUASI PEAK,
RMS SELECTIVE. All other function keys are deactivated (displayed in
gray).

Switching off the 2. Press the function key for the desired function in the menu.
measurement
function The menu item disappears from the menu area.

E-1147.2759.00 6-226 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Analyzer

6.3.2.2 Configuring the Measurement Parameters

Use In the FUNCTIONS menu (Ê 6-226), you can select the analyzer function.
The selected measurement function is displayed in a vacant field in the menu
bar and is available as a menu key to allow you to enter parameters for the
function. At the same time, the appropriate function is activated in the
analyzer.
When you have selected a measurement function in the menu bar, the list of
available function parameters (e.g. FREQ., DC, RMS) appears on the screen.

Settings for the Some parameters of the analyzer functions (FILTER, CONFIG) can be set
selected channel channel independently (Ch 1, Ch 2), or simultaneously (Ch 1& 2). These
parameters are listed in two columns in the parameter field. The function
parameters applying to both channels (Ch 1&2) are listed in one column.
To get an overview, refer to the factory default settings (Ê 6-89).
Reference unit All measurements which return results with dimensions can be displayed
either as absolute measurements or relative to a reference value. If you
select the reference unit (dBr, dBrFS), the measurement result is displayed
taking the entered reference value into consideration. Each measurement
function has its own reference value that can be set separately for both
channels.

Operating Manual, 11/2007 6-227 E-1147.2759.00

Analyzer R&S UP300/350

6.3.2.2.1 FREQUENCY, DC, RMS

Description With this function, you can measure the frequency, DC voltage, and RMS
component of the input signal.
Setting 1. Call the FREQ., DC, RMS measurement function (Ê 6-226).
measurement
parameters 2. Select the menu with the 3 or 4 cursor keys.
The menu name is highlighted and the function keys [13] are assigned
the appropriate function.

Function key
assignment
Select the measurement time. (Ê 6-230)

Select the measurement result display

(RMS & FREQ, or RMS & DC). (Ê 6-232)
Activate/Deactivate the filter. (Ê 6-232)

Open the submenu: (Ê 6-233)

Set the averaging mode.
Select the unit of the level display. (Ê 6-235)

E-1147.2759.00 6-228 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Analyzer

Displaying and Measurement display

analyzing
• Activating the measurement function displays the respective measure-
measurement
ment values (Ê 6-232).
results

or

Frequency spectrum
1. Call the measurement function FFT (Ê 6-226).
2. Select the SPECTRUM display mode in the Graph menu (Ê 6-288).
A measurement diagram with the frequency spectrum is shown in the
display area.

Note: In the Graph menu you can change the graphic display area
(Ê 6-292, 6-296) and analyze the trace using the cursors (Ê 6-300).

Note: When you activate the measurement function, the R&S UP300/350
begins the continuous measurement. However, you can also start and stop
the measurement manually (Ê 6-285).

Operating Manual, 11/2007 6-229 E-1147.2759.00

Analyzer R&S UP300/350

Selecting the Measurement Time

Use The RMS measurement time is used to adjust the measurement speed of the
signal frequency. Short measurement times or a high degree of accuracy can
be given priority according to the specific measurement requirements.
You can select different measurement times according to the measurement
task:
ƒ Auto Fast
Fast automatic adaptation of the measurement time of the signal
frequency with sufficient accuracy
ƒ Auto
Automatic adaptation of the measurement time of the signal frequency
with high accuracy
ƒ Value
Manual entry of the measurement time
To prevent measurement errors in case severely noise-corrupted or distorted
signals and multi-tone signals, you should set the measurement time
manually (A Val). In this case, however, you must know the exact period of
the signal.
Note: The setting is always valid for both channels (Ch 1&2).
Selecting the
1. Press the function key in the menu.
measurement time
A selection field containing the available settings is displayed. The
default setting is “Auto Fast“.

2. Use the rotary knob [11] to select a setting.

3. Press the ENTER key [5] to close the selection field.
The new setting is stored and displayed in the parameter field.

Ch 1&2

E-1147.2759.00 6-230 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Analyzer

Entering the After you have selected the “A Val” measurement time, an entry field with
measurement time the current measurement time pops up. The default setting is “20 ms“. At
manually the same time, the function keys are assigned various units of
measurement.

4. Enter a new value (Ê 5-65).

The permissible entry range is:
1 ms ≤ MEAS TIME ≤ 10 s
The new setting is stored and displayed in the parameter field.

Ch 1&2

Operating Manual, 11/2007 6-231 E-1147.2759.00

Analyzer R&S UP300/350

Selecting the Measurement Result Display

Use You can select which measurement values are to be shown in the display
area:
ƒ RMS & FREQ
RMS and frequency are displayed.
ƒ RMS & DC
RMS and DC voltage are displayed.
Selecting the
1. Press the function key in the menu.
measurement result
display A selection field containing the available settings is displayed. The
default setting is “RMS & FREQ“.

2. Use the rotary knob [11] to select a setting.

3. Press the ENTER key [5] to close the selection field.
The new setting is stored and displayed in the display area.

Activating/Deactivating the Filters

Use You can select up to 3 individual filters in the signal path. This filter is
configured in the FILTER menu (Ê 6-282). The filter is identical for all
measurements and can be activated or deactivated separately for each
measurement function.
Note: The setting is always valid for both channels (Ch 1&2).
Activating filters
1. Press the function key in the current measurement menu.
The function key is highlighted and the new setting is stored. After the
filter is switched on, the input signal is filtered.
The current status is displayed in the parameter field.

Ch 1&2

Deactivating filters
2. Press the function key in the current measurement menu.
The function key is no longer highlighted. The input signal is measured
without filter.
The current status is displayed in the parameter field.

Ch 1&2

E-1147.2759.00 6-232 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Analyzer

Setting the Averaging

Description To stabilize the measurement display, you can activate continuous averaging
(Cont) in the AVERAGING submenu. The display is then always
generated from the most recent measurement values. You can determine the
number (Factor) of measurement values which are used for averaging.
Note: The setting is always valid for both channels (Ch 1&2).
Selecting the
Press the function key in the current measurement menu.
AVERAGING
submenu The submenu is opened and the function keys [13] are assigned the
appropriate function.

Function key
assignment
Exit the submenu.

Activate/Deactivate the averaging. (Ê below)

Enter the averaging factor. (Ê below)

Operating Manual, 11/2007 6-233 E-1147.2759.00

Analyzer R&S UP300/350

Activating/
1. Press the function key in the submenu.
Deactivating the
averaging A selection field containing the available settings is displayed. The
default setting is “Off“.

2. Use the rotary knob [11] to select a setting.

3. Press the ENTER key [5] to close the selection field.
The new setting is stored and displayed in the parameter field.

Ch 1&2

Enter the averaging

4. Press the function key in the submenu.
factor
An entry field containing the currently applicable setting is displayed. The
default setting is “1“.

5. Enter a new value (Ê 5-65).

The permissible entry range is:
1 ≤ AVG FACTOR ≤ 256
The new setting is stored and displayed in the parameter field.

Ch 1&2

E-1147.2759.00 6-234 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Analyzer

Selecting the Unit for the Level Display

Use All measurements which return results with dimensions can be displayed
either as absolute measurements or relative to a reference value. If you
select the reference unit (dBr, dBrFS), the measurement result is displayed
taking the entered reference value into consideration. Each measurement
function has its own reference value that can be set separately for both chan-
nels.
Selecting 1. Press the numeric keys 1, 2, or 3 to select channel Ch 1, Ch 2, or both
the channel channels Ch 1&2.
The selected channel is displayed in green in the channel display.

Selecting the unit

2. Press the function key in the menu.
A selection field containing the available settings is displayed. The
default setting is “V (FS)”.
Analog Digital

3. Use the rotary knob [11] to select a setting.

4. Press the ENTER key [5] to close the selection field.
The new setting is stored and displayed in the display area.
Analog

Digital

Selecting the If you have selected the unit (dBr, dBrFS), a selection field
reference value containing various reference values appears.
ƒ Value
Manual reference value entry (Ê below)
ƒ Store Ch1
The current measurement value of channel Ch 1 is stored and used
as the reference value for other measurements.
ƒ Store Ch2
The current measurement value of channel Ch 2 is stored and used
as the reference value for other measurements.
ƒ Meas Ch1
The current measurement value of channel Ch 1 is used
continuously as the reference value.
ƒ Meas Ch2
The current measurement value of channel Ch 1 is used
continuously as the reference value.

Operating Manual, 11/2007 6-235 E-1147.2759.00

Analyzer R&S UP300/350

The default setting is “Value“.

5. Use the rotary knob [11] to select a setting.

6. Press the ENTER key [5] to close the selection field.
The new setting is stored and displayed in the display area.

Entering the After you have selected the “Value” setting, an entry field with the current
reference value reference value pops up. The default setting is “1 mV (0.001 FS)”. At the
manually same time, the function keys [13] are assigned various units of
measurement.
Analog Digital

7. Enter a new value (Ê 5-65).

The permissible entry range is:
1 µV ≤ REF. VALUE ≤ 100 V (Analog)
0.0001 FS ≤ REF. VALUE ≤ 0.999 FS (Digital)
-120 dBFS ≤ REF. VALUE ≤ -0.001 dBFS (Digital)
The new setting is stored and displayed in the parameter field.
Analog

Digital

E-1147.2759.00 6-236 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Analyzer

6.3.2.2.2 PEAK (Peak Value)

Description With this function you can measure the peak value of the input signal within a
predefined measurement time. The peak detector tracks the signal
characteristic without delay.
Setting 1. Call the PEAK measurement function (Ê 6-226).
measurement 2. Select the menu with the 3 or 4 cursor keys.
parameters
The menu name is highlighted and the function keys [13] are assigned
the appropriate function.

Function key
assignment
Select the measurement mode. (Ê 6-239)

Set the interval time. (Ê 6-240)

Activate/Deactivate the filter. (Ê 6-232)

Select the unit for the level display. (Ê 6-241)

Operating Manual, 11/2007 6-237 E-1147.2759.00

Analyzer R&S UP300/350

Displaying and Measurement display

analyzing
Activating the measurement function displays the measurement values.
measurement
results

Frequency spectrum
1. Call the measurement function FFT (Ê 6-226).
2. Select the SPECTRUM display mode in the Graph menu (Ê 6-288).
A measurement diagram with the frequency spectrum is shown in the
display area.

Note: In the Graph menu, you can change the graphic display area
(Ê 6-292, 6-296) and analyze the trace using the cursors (Ê 6-300).

Note: When you activate the measurement function, the R&S UP300/350
begins the continuous measurement. However, you can also start and stop
the measurement manually (Ê 6-285).

E-1147.2759.00 6-238 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Analyzer

Selecting the Measurement Method

Use You can select which peak value measurement is to be performed and shown
in the display area:
ƒ Peak pos
The highest positive voltage value is measured.
ƒ Peak neg
The (absolutely) highest negative voltage value is measured.
ƒ Peak to Peak
The highest peak-peak voltage is measured.
ƒ Peak abs
The absolutely highest (positive or negative) voltage value is measured.
Note: The setting is always valid for both channels (Ch 1&2).

Peak
pos

Peak Peak
to abs
Peak
Peak
neg

Selecting the
1. Press the function key in the menu.
measurement
method A selection field containing the available settings is displayed. The
default setting is “Peak pos“.

2. Use the rotary knob [11] to select a setting.

3. Press the ENTER key [5] to close the selection field.
The new setting is stored and displayed in the display area.

Ch 1&2

Operating Manual, 11/2007 6-239 E-1147.2759.00

Analyzer R&S UP300/350

Setting the Interval Time

Use You can enter different interval times according to the measurement task.
Note: The setting is always valid for both channels (Ch 1&2).
Setting the
1. Press the function key in the menu.
interval time
An entry field containing the currently applicable setting is displayed. The
default setting is “250 ms“. At the same time, the function keys [13] are
assigned various units of measurement.

2. Enter a new value (Ê 5-65).

The permissible entry range is:
1 ms ≤ INTERVAL TIME ≤ 10 s
The new setting is stored and displayed in the parameter field.

Ch 1&2

E-1147.2759.00 6-240 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Analyzer

Selecting the Unit for the Level Display

Use All measurements which return results with dimensions can be displayed
either as absolute measurements or relative to a reference value. If you
select the reference unit (dBr, dBrFS), the measurement result is displayed
taking the entered reference value into consideration. Each measurement
function has its own reference value that can be set separately for both chan-
nels.
Selecting 1. Press the numeric keys 1, 2, or 3 to select channel Ch 1, Ch 2, or both
the channel channels Ch 1&2.
The selected channel is displayed in green in the channel display.

Selecting the unit

2. Press the function key in the current measurement menu.
A selection field containing the available settings is displayed. The
default setting is “V (FS)”.
Analog Digital

3. Use the rotary knob [11] to select a setting.

4. Press the ENTER key [5] to close the selection field.
The new setting is stored and displayed in the display area.
Analog

Digital

Selecting the If you have selected the unit (dBr, dBrFS), a selection field
reference value containing various reference values appears.
ƒ Value
Manual reference value entry (Ê below)
ƒ Store Ch1
The current measurement value of channel Ch 1 is stored and used
as the reference value for other measurements.
ƒ Store Ch2
The current measurement value of channel Ch 2 is stored and used
as the reference value for other measurements.
ƒ Meas Ch1
The current measurement value of channel Ch 1 is used
continuously as the reference value.
ƒ Meas Ch2
The current measurement value of channel Ch 2 is used continu-
ously as the reference value.
The default setting is “Value“.

Operating Manual, 11/2007 6-241 E-1147.2759.00

Analyzer R&S UP300/350

5. Use the rotary knob [11] to select a setting.

6. Press the ENTER key [5] to close the selection field.
The new setting is stored and displayed in the display area.

Entering the After you have selected the “Value” setting, an entry field with the current
reference value reference value pops up. The default setting is “1 mV (0.001 FS)”. At the
manually same time, the function keys [13] are assigned various units of
measurement.
Analog Digital

7. Enter a new value (Ê 5-65).

The permissible entry range is:
1 µV ≤ REF. VALUE ≤ 100 V (Analog)
0.001 FS ≤ REF. VALUE ≤ 0.999 FS (Digital)
The new setting is stored and displayed in the parameter field.
Analog

Digital

E-1147.2759.00 6-242 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Analyzer

6.3.2.2.3 QUASI PEAK (Quasi Peak Value)

Description With this function, you can measure the quasi-peak value of the input signal.
This is performed by means of peak detection with subsequent defined rise
and fall times. The QUASI PEAK measurement is implemented as an RFI
voltage measurement according to CCIR 468-4 and DIN 45405.
Setting 1. Call the QUASI PEAK measurement function (Ê 6-226).
measurement 2. Select the menu with the aid of the 3 or 4 cursor keys.
parameters
The menu name is highlighted and the function keys [13] are assigned
the appropriate function.

Function key
assignment
Select the interval time. (Ê 6-245)

Activate/Deactivate the filter. (Ê 6-232)

Select the unit for the level display. (Ê 6-241)

Operating Manual, 11/2007 6-243 E-1147.2759.00

Analyzer R&S UP300/350

Displaying and Measurement display

analyzing
Activating the measurement function displays the measurement values.
measurement
results

Bar graph
Select the Q-PEAK INDICATOR display mode in the Graph menu (Ê 6-290).
A bar graph is shown for each channel (Ch 1 and Ch 2) in the display
area. Each bar graph shows the current measurement value and the
lowest and highest measurement value in the active measurement.

Frequency spectrum
1. Call the measurement function FFT (Ê 6-226).
2. Select the SPECTRUM display mode in the Graph menu (Ê 6-290).
A measurement diagram with the frequency spectrum is shown in the
display area.

Note: In the Graph menu, you can change the graphic display area
(Ê 6-292, 6-296) and analyze the trace using the cursors (Ê 6-300).

Note: When you activate the measurement function, the R&S UP300/350
begins the continuous measurement. With the quasi-peak measurement, the
last maximum value is always stored and displayed. You can start and stop
the measurement manually (Ê 6-285).

E-1147.2759.00 6-244 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Analyzer

Selecting the Interval Time

Use You can enter different interval times according to the measurement task.
Note: The setting is always valid for both channels (Ch 1&2).
Selecting the
1. Press the function key in the menu.
interval time
An entry field containing the currently applicable setting is displayed. The
default setting is “3 s“. At the same time, the function keys [13] are
assigned various units of measurement.

2. Enter a new value (Ê 5-65).

The permissible entry range is:
100 ms ≤ INTERVAL TIME ≤ 100 s
The new setting is stored and displayed in the parameter field.

Ch 1&2

Operating Manual, 11/2007 6-245 E-1147.2759.00

Analyzer R&S UP300/350

6.3.2.2.4 RMS SELECTIVE (Selective RMS value)

Description With this function, you can perform a selective RMS measurement with a
narrowband band-pass filter.
Setting 1. Call the RMS SELECTIVE measurement function (Ê 6-226).
measurement 2. Select the menu with the 3 or 4 cursor keys.
parameters
The menu name is highlighted and the function keys [13] are assigned
the appropriate function.

Function key
assignment
Select the tuning mode. (Ê 6-247)

Enter the measurement frequency. (Ê 6-247)

Select the measurement bandwidth. (Ê 6-248)

Activate/Deactivate the filter. (Ê 6-232)

Open the submenu: (Ê 6-265)

Set the POST FFT.
Select the unit for the level display. (Ê 6-241)

Displaying and Measurement display

analyzing
Activating the measurement function displays the measurement values.
measurement
results

Note: When you activate the measurement function, the R&S UP300/350
begins the continuous measurement. However, you can also start and stop
the measurement manually (Ê 6-285).

E-1147.2759.00 6-246 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Analyzer

Selecting the Tuning Mode

Use You can select between automatic tuning up to the strongest signal, or
measurement at fixed frequency.
Note: The setting is always valid for both channels (Ch 1&2).
Selecting the
1. Press the function key in the menu.
tuning mode
A selection field containing the available settings is displayed. The
default setting is “Auto“.

2. Use the rotary knob [11] to select a setting.

3. Press the ENTER key [5] to close the selection field.
The new setting is stored and displayed in the parameter field.

Ch 1&2

Entering the Measurement Frequency

Note: The setting is always valid for both channels (Ch 1&2). The value is
valid only for the fixed frequency mode.
Entering the
1. Press the function key in the menu.
measurement
frequency An entry field containing the currently applicable setting is displayed. The
default setting is “1 kHz“. At the same time, the function keys [13] are
assigned various units of measurement.

2. Enter a new value (Ê 5-65).

The permissible entry range depends on the measurement bandwidth:
BW/2 ≤ CENTER FREQ ≤ fmax – BW/2
The new setting is stored and displayed in the parameter field.

Ch 1&2

Operating Manual, 11/2007 6-247 E-1147.2759.00

Analyzer R&S UP300/350

Selecting the Measurement Bandwidth

Use You can select different measurement bandwidths:

• 1%
The Bandwidth is 1 % of the centre frequency.
• 3%
The Bandwidth is 3 % of the centre frequency.
• 1/12 octave
The Bandwidth is 1/12 octave (5.77 %) of the centre frequency.
• 1/3 octave
The Bandwidth is 1/3 octave (23.15 %) of the centre frequency.

• Rel.Value
The Bandwidth is the entered value in percent [%] of the centre fre-
quency.

• Abs. Value
The Bandwidth is constant, referring to the entered value in Hz.

Note: The setting is always valid for both channels (Ch 1&2). The bandwidth
used for measurement is always higher than or equal to 10 Hz, independent
of customer bandwitdh settings.

E-1147.2759.00 6-248 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Analyzer

Selecting the
1. Press the function key in the menu.
measurement
bandwidth A selection field containing the available settings is displayed. The
default setting is “1/3 octave“.

2. Use the rotary knob [11] to select a setting.

3. Press the ENTER key [5] to close the selection field.
The new setting is stored and displayed in the parameter field.

Ch 1&2

Entering the After you have selected the “Rel. Value” item, an entry field with the
relative bandwidth current relative bandwidth size pops up. The default setting is “1%“.
manually

4. Enter a new value (Ê 5-65).

The permissible entry range is:
0.001 % ≤ REL. BANDWIDTH ≤ 100 %
The new setting is stored and displayed in the parameter field.

Ch 1&2

Operating Manual, 11/2007 6-249 E-1147.2759.00

Analyzer R&S UP300/350

Entering the After you have selected the “Abs. Value” item, an entry field with the cur-
absolute bandwidth rent absolute bandwidth pops up. The default setting is “100 Hz“. At the
same time, the function keys [13] are assigned various units of
measurement.

5. Enter a new value (Ê 5-65).

The permissible entry range is:
10 Hz ≤ ABS. BANDWIDTH ≤ fs * 0.1
within: fs - current sampling frequency of analyzer type
The new setting is stored and displayed in the parameter field.

Ch 1&2

E-1147.2759.00 6-250 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Analyzer

6.3.2.2.5 FFT (Frequency-Domain Display, Spectrum)

Description With this function, you can display the input signal as a frequency spectrum.
Transformation to the frequency domain is performed by means of Fast
Fourier Transformation (FFT).
Setting 1. Call the FFT measurement function (Ê 6-226).
measurement 2. Select the menu with the 3 or 4 cursor keys.
parameters
The menu name is highlighted and the function keys [13] are assigned
the appropriate function.

Function key
assignment
Set the FFT size. (Ê 6-253)

Set the FFT window. (Ê 6-253)

Activate/Deactivate the filter. (Ê 6-232)

Open the submenu: (Ê 6-255)

Set the averaging mode.
Select the unit for the level display. (Ê 6-257)

Operating Manual, 11/2007 6-251 E-1147.2759.00

Analyzer R&S UP300/350

Displaying and Frequency spectrum

analyzing
Select the SPECTRUM display mode in the Graph menu (Ê 6-288).
measurement
results A measurement diagram with the frequency spectrum is shown in the
display area.

Note: In the Graph menu, you can change the graphic display area
(Ê 6-292, 6-296) and analyze the trace using the cursors (Ê 6-300).
List of measurement values
Select the LIST OF VALUES display mode in the Graph menu (Ê 6-288).
The FFT frequency and level values are displayed.

Note: When you activate the measurement function, the R&S UP300/350
begins the continuous measurement. However, you can also start and stop
the measurement manually (Ê 6-285).

E-1147.2759.00 6-252 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Analyzer

Selecting the FFT Size

Use For a detailed measurement, select a higher FFT resolution. As the FFT size
increases, the signal resolution also increases and the noise bandwidth
decreases. However, the higher the FFT size is, the lower the measurement
speed will be.
You can select FFTs with the following size:
ƒ 1024
ƒ 2048
ƒ 4096
ƒ 8192
ƒ 16384
Note: The setting is always valid for both channels (Ch 1&2).
Selecting the
1. Press the function key in the menu.
FFT size
A selection field containing the available settings is displayed. The
default setting is “1024“.

2. Use the rotary knob [11] to select a setting.

3. Press the ENTER key [5] to close the selection field.
The new setting is stored and displayed in the parameter field.

Ch 1&2

Selecting the FFT Window

Use According to system theory, the FFT regards a signal section as being
continued infinitely and periodically. Usually, however, infinite continuity is not
possible at the section boundary. Discontinuity at the section boundary would
be evaluated as a pulse (with white spectrum). This pulse spectrum is
superimposed on the actual (useful) signal spectrum ("leakage").
Remedy: The signal section intended for the FFT is
attenuated with respect to zero at both ends by a greater or lesser degree by
means of the window function. The FFT then regards the signal as
continuous. Window functions therefore help to minimize this "leakage" (this
is, however, accompanied by a reduction in selectivity).

Operating Manual, 11/2007 6-253 E-1147.2759.00

Analyzer R&S UP300/350

You can select an FFT window from the following selection of window
functions:
ƒ Rectangular
If the signal fits in the section for the FFT exactly with an integer multiple
of periods, there is no discontinuity at the section boundaries, and then a
window is not required and the maximum frequency resolution is
possible.
ƒ Hamming
This window does not provide any significant advantages; it was
implemented simply to complete the range.
ƒ Hann
This window combines selectivity with good leakage suppression in the
"far-off range" but has a relatively wide bell-shaped curve around the
signal lines.
ƒ Blackman Harris
The slope of the bell-shaped curve up to approx. 80 dB is very steep;
however, this window has considerable "leakage" for values under
80 dB.
ƒ Rife Vincent 1
Rife Vincent 2
Rife Vincent 3
The suppression of far-off interference is very good for all 3 windows.
The width of the bell-shaped curve at the bottom of the individual lines
drops and the width at the top increases as the Rife Vincent number
increases. It is therefore possible to set various compromises between
frequency resolution and the suppression of adjacent lines.
ƒ Flat Top
Here, the region around the carrier is deliberately distorted to such an
extent that at least two adjacent lines (in the case of excitation with one
sinewave line only) always have roughly the same magnitude.
Advantage: Unlike other window functions, the amplitude can be read
off accurately from the graph.
Disadvantage: The frequency selectivity is poor.
ƒ Kaiser (β = 12)
With this window, the compromise between selectivity, sideband
suppression and suppression of far-off interference is good
Note: The setting is always valid for both channels (Ch 1&2).
Selecting the
1. Press the function key in the menu.
FFT window
A selection field containing the available settings is displayed. The
default setting is “Rife Vincent 2“.

2. Use the rotary knob [11] to select a setting.

3. Press the ENTER key [5] to close the selection field.
The new setting is stored and displayed in the parameter field.

Ch 1&2

E-1147.2759.00 6-254 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Analyzer

Setting Averaging

Description To stabilize the measurement display, you can activate an averaging mode in
the AVERAGING submenu. You can select the following settings:
ƒ Off
Averaging is deactivated.
ƒ Average
The display is always generated from the last measurement values. You
can determine the number of measurement values (FACTOR) which are
used for averaging.
ƒ Exponential
Averaging is performed continuously.
Note: The setting is always valid for both channels (Ch 1&2).
Selecting the
Press the function key in the menu.
AVERAGING
submenu The submenu is opened and the function keys [13] are assigned the
appropriate function.

Function key
assignment
Exit the submenu.

Activate/Deactivate the averaging mode. (Ê below)

Enter the averaging factor. (Ê below)

Operating Manual, 11/2007 6-255 E-1147.2759.00

Analyzer R&S UP300/350

Activating the
1. Press the function key in the submenu.
averaging
A selection field containing the available settings is displayed. The
default setting is “OFF“.

2. Use the rotary knob [11] to select a setting.

3. Press the ENTER key [5] to close the selection field.
The new setting is stored and displayed in the parameter field.

Ch 1&2

Entering the
4. Press the function key in the submenu.
averaging factor
An entry field containing the currently applicable setting is displayed. The
default setting is “1“.

5. Enter a new value (Ê 5-65).

The permissible entry range is:
1 ≤ AVG FACTOR ≤ 256
The new setting is stored and displayed in the parameter field.

Ch 1&2

E-1147.2759.00 6-256 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Analyzer

Selecting the Unit for the Level Display

Use All measurements which return results with dimensions can be displayed
either as absolute measurements or relative to a reference value. If you
select the reference unit (dBr, dBrFS), the measurement result is displayed
taking the entered reference value into consideration.
Note: The setting is always valid for both channels (Ch 1&2).
Selecting the unit
1. Press the function key in the menu.
A selection field containing the available settings is displayed. The
default setting is “dBV (dBFS)”.
Analog Digital

2. Use the rotary knob [11] to select a setting.

3. Press the ENTER key [5] to close the selection field.
The new setting is stored and displayed in the display area.
Ch 1&2
(Analog)
(Digital)

Operating Manual, 11/2007 6-257 E-1147.2759.00

Analyzer R&S UP300/350

Entering the After you have selected the (dBr, dBrFS) unit, an entry field with the
reference value current reference value pops up. The default setting is “1 mV
manually (0.001 FS)”. At the same time, the function keys [13] are assigned
various units of measurement.
Analog Digital

4. Enter a new value (Ê 5-65).

The permissible entry range is:
1 µV ≤ REF. VALUE ≤ 100 V (Analog)
0.0001 FS ≤ REF. VALUE ≤ 0.999 FS (Digital)
The new setting is stored and displayed in the parameter field.
Ch 1&2
(Analog)
(Digital)

E-1147.2759.00 6-258 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Analyzer

6.3.2.2.6 THD, THD+N, SINAD (Total Harmonic Distortion)

Description With this function, you can measure the harmonic distortion of the input
signal.
Setting 1. Call the THD measurement function (Ê 6-226)
measurement 2. Select the menu with the 3 or 4 cursor keys.
parameters
The menu name is highlighted and the function keys [13] are assigned
the appropriate function.

Function key
assignment
Select the measurement mode. (Ê 6-261)

Select the frequency search mode. (Ê 6-262)

Select the measurement speed. (Ê 6-264)

Activate/Deactivate the filter. (Ê 6-232)

Open the submenu: (Ê 6-265)

Set the POST FFT.
Select the unit for the level display. (Ê 6-266)

Displaying and Measurement display

analyzing
Activating the measurement function displays the harmonic distortion
measurement
according to measurement mode.
results

Frequency spectrum
1. Switch on the measurement function POST FFT (Ê 6-266).
2. Select the SPECTRUM display mode in the Graph menu (Ê 6-290).
A measurement diagram with the frequency spectrum is shown in the
display area.

Operating Manual, 11/2007 6-259 E-1147.2759.00

Analyzer R&S UP300/350

Note: In the Graph menu, you can change the graphic display area
(Ê 6-292, 6-296) and analyze the trace using the cursors (Ê 6-300).
Bar graph
Select the BAR GRAPH display mode in the Graph menu (Ê 6-288).
A bar graph is shown in the display area. The fundamental (1),
harmonics (2-10) (Ê 6-261), and noise component (11) of the
measurement signal are displayed depending on the measurement
mode.

List of measurement values

Select the LIST OF VALUES display mode in the Graph menu (Ê 6-288).
The frequency and level values of the first harmonic (fundamental), and
the relative level values of the other harmonics (2-10) and of the total
noise power for the measurement signal are shown in the display area.

Note: When you activate the measurement function, the R&S UP300/350
begins the continuous measurement. However, you can also start and stop
the measurement manually (Ê 6-285).

E-1147.2759.00 6-260 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Analyzer

Selecting the Measurement Mode

Use All harmonics (with the distortion factor measurement) and the noise power
(with THD+N and SINAD) are measured and displayed as a table or graph.
You can select different measurement methods for the distortion factor and
the signal/noise ratio.
ƒ THD (All Harm.)
All harmonics are measured.
ƒ THD (Even Harm.)
All even harmonics are measured.
ƒ THD (Odd Harm.)
All odd harmonics are measured.
ƒ THD (Select Harm.)
All selected harmonics are measured.
ƒ THD + N
All harmonics and the noise are measured.
ƒ SINAD
All harmonics and the noise are measured.
ƒ NOISE
The noise power is measured.
ƒ LEVEL THDN
The total RMS derived from the fundamental, harmonics, and noise is
measured.
ƒ LEVEL NOISE
The total RMS of the noise is measured.
Note: The setting is always valid for both channels (Ch 1&2).
Selecting the
1. Press the function key in the menu.
measurement mode
A selection field containing the available settings is displayed. The
default setting is “THD (All Harm.)”.

2. Use the rotary knob [11] to select a setting.

3. Press the ENTER key [5] to close the selection field.
The new setting is stored and displayed in the parameter field.

Ch 1&2

Operating Manual, 11/2007 6-261 E-1147.2759.00

Analyzer R&S UP300/350

Selecting the If you have selected the "THD (Select Harm.)" measurement mode, the
harmonics selection field is displayed with all harmonics.
(at measurement
mode ”Select
Harm.“)

4. Use the rotary knob [11] to select a setting and press the ENTER
key [5] to change the selection.
A check marker “9” is displayed next to the corresponding number
(harmonic), indicating the selection.

Note: For deactivation of numbers (harmonics with marking) use the

same way.
5. Use the rotary knob [11] to select the Return item.
6. Press the ENTER key [5] to close the selection field.
The new setting is stored and displayed in the parameter field.

Ch 1&2

Selecting the Frequency Search Mode

Note: The lower limit frequency fmin of the measurement signal depends on
the selected bandwidth of the analyzer.
ƒ Bandwidth 22 kHz: fmin ≥ 20 Hz
ƒ Bandwidth 40 kHz: fmin ≥ 40 Hz
ƒ Bandwidth 80 kHz: fmin ≥ 80 Hz
Use Depending on the measurement task, you can select different modes for the
signal frequency (fundamental) search:
ƒ Auto
Automatic signal frequency search and automatic harmonics
measurement
ƒ Fixed
Manual entry of signal frequency and manual harmonics measurement
Note: The setting is always valid for both channels (Ch 1&2).

E-1147.2759.00 6-262 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Analyzer

Selecting the
1. Press the function key in the menu.
frequency search
mode A selection field containing the available settings is displayed. The
default setting is “Auto“.

2. Use the rotary knob [11] to select a setting.

3. Press the ENTER key [5] to close the selection field.
The new setting is stored and displayed in the parameter field.

Ch 1&2

Entering the signal After you have selected the “Fixed” setting, an entry field with the current
frequency manually setting pops up. The default setting is “1 kHz“. At the same time, the
function keys [13] are assigned various units of measurement.

4. Enter a new value (Ê 5-65).

The permissible entry range is:
fmin ≤ FREQ ≤ fmax
within: fmin - minimum frequency of the analyzer type (Ê above)
fmax - maximum frequency of the analyzer type
(Ê 6-216, 6-222)
The new setting is stored and displayed in the parameter field.

Ch 1&2

Operating Manual, 11/2007 6-263 E-1147.2759.00

Analyzer R&S UP300/350

Selecting the Measurement Time

Use You can select different measurement times according to the measurement
task:
ƒ Fast
A fast measurement with a lower dynamic range is performed.
ƒ Normal
Measurement is performed with a higher dynamic range.
Note: The setting is always valid for both channels (Ch 1&2).
Selecting the
1. Press the function key in the menu.
measurement time
A selection field containing the available settings is displayed. The
default setting is “Fast“.

2. Use the rotary knob [11] to select a setting.

3. Press the ENTER key [5] to close the selection field.
The new setting is stored and displayed in the parameter field.

Ch 1&2

E-1147.2759.00 6-264 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Analyzer

Setting the POST FFT

Description The THD measurement function cannot be activated at the same time as the
FFT. You can, however, use the Post FFT to analyze the spectrum of the
signal on which the THD measurement is being performed. The stored
samples used to calculate the measurement function are also used to
calculate the FFT.
Selecting the
Press the function key in the current measurement menu.
FFT submenu
The submenu is opened and the function keys [13] are assigned the
appropriate function.

Function key
assignment
Exit the submenu.

Activate/Deactivate the FFT. (Ê 6-266)

Set the FFT size. (Ê 6-253)

Set the FFT window. (Ê 6-253)

Operating Manual, 11/2007 6-265 E-1147.2759.00

Analyzer R&S UP300/350

Activating/Deactivating the POST FFT

Use If you want to display the frequency spectrum of the measurement signal in
the Graph menu, you must activate the POST FFT.
Note: The setting is always valid for both channels (Ch 1&2).
Activating the FFT
1. Press the function key in the submenu.
The function key is highlighted and the new setting is stored. After
activation, you can view the input signal (Ê 6-259).
The current status is displayed in the parameter field.

Ch 1&2

Deactivating the FFT

2. Press the function key in the submenu.
The function key is no longer highlighted and the Post FFT is switched
off.
The current status is displayed in the parameter field.

Ch 1&2

Selecting the Unit for the Level Display

Use You can set different units of the level display depending on the measure-
ment task.
Note: The setting is always valid for both channels (Ch 1&2).
Selecting the unit
1. Press the function key in the menu.
A selection field containing the available settings is displayed. The
default setting is “dB“.

2. Use the rotary knob [11] to select a setting.

3. Press the ENTER key [5] to close the selection field.
The new setting is stored and displayed in the display area.

Ch 1&2

E-1147.2759.00 6-266 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Analyzer

6.3.2.2.7 POLARITY (Polarity Test)

Description The polarity test is used to check the polarity of the signal transmitted by the
DUT.
Preparing 1. Call the generator POLARITY TEST f unction (Ê 6-112).
the measurement 2. Set the signal parameters (Ê 6-150).
3. Switch the DUT between the generator [8] and analyzer [9].

Setting the 4. Call the POLARITY measurement function (Ê 6-226).

measurement 5. Select the menu with the 3 or 4 cursor keys.
parameters
The menu name is highlighted.

Displaying and Measurement display

analyzing
The analyzer performs the polarity check of the output signal from the DUT
measurement
and displays the polarity:
results
ƒ Positive (correct polarity)
ƒ Negative (reversed polarity)

Note: When you activate the measurement function, the R&S UP300/350
begins the continuous measurement. However, you can also start and stop
the measurement manually (Ê 6-285).

Operating Manual, 11/2007 6-267 E-1147.2759.00

Analyzer R&S UP300/350

6.3.2.2.8 DFD (Difference Frequency Distortion)

Description With this function, you can measure the 2nd or 3rd order difference frequency
distortion. For this measurement a suitable two-tone signal must be supplied
to the DUT.
Preparing 1. Call the generator DFD function (Ê 6-112).
the measurement 2. Set the signal parameters (Ê 6-144).
3. Switch the DUT between the generator [8] and analyzer [9].

Setting 4. Call the DFD measurement function (Ê 6-226).

measurement 5. Select the menu with the 3 or 4 cursor keys.
parameters
The menu name is highlighted and the function keys [13] are assigned
the appropriate function.

Function key
assignment
Select the difference frequency distortions (Ê 6-271)
and measurement standard.
Activate/Deactivate the filter. (Ê 6-232)

Open the submenu: (Ê 6-265)

Set the POST FFT.
Select the unit for the level display. (Ê 6-266)

E-1147.2759.00 6-268 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Analyzer

Measurement Based on your selection (d2 or d3), the R&S UP300/350 measures the 2nd
method and 3rd order intermodulation products selectively (measurements are
therefore largely unaffected by noise) according to DIN IEC 268, part 3.

Operating Manual, 11/2007 6-269 E-1147.2759.00

Analyzer R&S UP300/350

Displaying and Measurement display

analyzing
Activating the measurement function displays the measurement values
measurement
depending on measurement mode (Ê 6-271).
results

Frequency spectrum
1. Call the measurement function POST FFT (Ê 6-266).
2. Select the SPECTRUM display mode in the Graph menu (Ê 6-288).
A measurement diagram with the frequency spectrum is shown in the
display area.

Note: In the Graph menu you can change the graphic display area
(Ê 6-292, 6-296) and analyze the trace using the cursors (Ê 6-300).
Bar graph
Select the BAR GRAPH display mode in the Graph menu (Ê 6-288).
A bar graph is shown in the display area. Depending on the measure-
ment mode (Ê 6-270) the sinewave signal (measurement signals 3, 4)
and the intermodulation products (1, 2, 5) are displayed.

Note: When you activate the measurement function, the R&S UP300/350
begins the continuous measurement. However, you can also start and stop
the measurement manually (Ê 6-285).

E-1147.2759.00 6-270 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Analyzer

Selecting the Difference Frequency Distortion and Measurement Standards

Use You can select the display mode for the difference frequency distortion
according to the measurement standards:
ƒ d2 (IEC 268)
Measurement and display of the 2nd order intermodulation product
acc. to IEC 268
ƒ d3 (IEC 268)
Measurement and display of the 3rd order intermodulation product
acc. to IEC 268
ƒ d2 (IEC 118)
Measurement and display of the 2nd order intermodulation product
acc. to IEC 118
ƒ d3 (IEC118)
Measurement and display of the 3rd order intermodulation product
acc. to IEC 118
Note: The intermodulation distortion (IMD) tones are not subjected to a level
testing case of measurement according to IEC 118. This means that a DFD
measurement is possible even if the IMD signal is severely distorted (e.g. as
a result of the frequency response of the DUT or of the transmission path). A
typical example is the measurement of earpieces.
Note: The setting is always valid for both channels (Ch 1&2).
Selecting
1. Press the function key in the menu.
measurement
standards A selection field containing the available settings is displayed. The
default setting is “d2 (IEC 268)“.

2. Use the rotary knob [11] to select a setting.

3. Press the ENTER key [5] to close the selection field.
The new setting is stored and displayed in the parameter field.

Ch 1&2

Operating Manual, 11/2007 6-271 E-1147.2759.00

Analyzer R&S UP300/350

6.3.2.2.9 PHASE (Measuring the Phase Difference Between Channels)

Description With this function, you can measure the phase difference between the input
signals of channels Ch 1 and Ch 2. The signal from channel Ch 1 is used as
the reference signal.
The phase measurement returns values ranging from -179.9° to +180°.
Preparing 1. Call, for example, the generator SINE function (Ê 6-112).
the measurement 2. Set the signal parameters (f1 = f2) (Ê 6-113).
3. Switch the DUT between the generator [8] and analyzer [9].

Setting 4. Call the PHASE measurement function (Ê 6-226).

measurement 5. Select the menu with the 3 or 4 cursor keys.
parameters
The menu name is highlighted and the function key [13] is assigned the
appropriate function.

Function key
assignment
Select the type of the signal search. (Ê 6-273)

Displaying and Measurement display

analyzing
Activating the measurement function, the instrument displays the
measurement
measurement values. The frequency of the reference signal from channel
results
Ch 1 and the phase difference from the signals of channels Ch 1 and Ch 2
are displayed.

Note: When you activate the measurement function, the R&S UP300/350
begins the continuous measurement. However, you can also start and stop
the measurement manually (Ê 6-285).

E-1147.2759.00 6-272 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Analyzer

Selecting the Type of Signal Search

Note: The lower limit frequency (fmin) of the measurement signal depends on
the selected bandwidth of the analyzer.
ƒ Bandwidth 22 kHz: fmin ≥ 20 Hz
ƒ Bandwidth 40 kHz: fmin ≥ 40 Hz
ƒ Bandwidth 80 kHz: fmin ≥ 80 Hz

Use Depending on the measurement task, you can select different modes for the
signal frequency search in channel Ch 1:
ƒ Auto tuning
Automatic signal frequency search and automatic phase measurement
ƒ Fixed frequency
Manual entry of signal frequency and manual phase measurement
Note: The setting is always valid for both channels (Ch 1&2).
Selecting the type of
1. Press the function key in the menu.
signal search
A selection field containing the available settings is displayed. The
default setting is “Auto tuning“.

2. Use the rotary knob [11] to select a setting.

3. Press the ENTER key [5] to close the selection field.
The new setting is stored and displayed in the parameter field.
Ch 1&2

Operating Manual, 11/2007 6-273 E-1147.2759.00

Analyzer R&S UP300/350

Entering the signal After you have selected the “Fixed frequency” setting, an entry field with
frequency manually the current signal frequency pops up. The default setting is “1 kHz“. At
the same time, the function keys are assigned various units of
measurement.

4. Enter a new value (Ê 5-65).

The permissible entry range is:
fmin ≤ FREQ ≤ fmax
within: fmin - minimum frequency of the analyzer type (Ê above)
fmax - maximum frequency of the analyzer type (Ê 6-216,
6-222)
The new setting is stored and displayed in the parameter field.
Ch 1&2

E-1147.2759.00 6-274 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Analyzer

6.3.2.2.10 MOD DIST (Modulation Distortion)

Description With this function, you can measure the modulation factor between different
signals. For this modulation factor analysis, a suitable two-tone signal must
be supplied to the DUT.
Preparing 1. Call the generator MOD DIST function (Ê 6-112).
the measurement 2. Set the signal parameters (Ê 6-138).
3. Switch the DUT between the generator [8] and analyzer [9].

Setting 4. Call the MOD DIST measurement function (Ê 6-226).

measurement
parameters 5. Select the menu with the 3 or 4 cursor keys.
The menu name is highlighted and the function keys [13] are assigned
the appropriate function.

Function key
assignment
Activate/Deactivate the filter. (Ê 6-232)

Open the submenu: (Ê 6-265)

Set the POST FFT.
Select the unit for the level display. (Ê 6-266)

Operating Manual, 11/2007 6-275 E-1147.2759.00

Analyzer R&S UP300/350

Measurement The R&S UP300/350 measures the 2nd and 3rd order intermodulation
method products selectively (measurements are therefore unaffected by noise)
according to DIN IEC 268, Part 3, and calculates the squared sum of the
intermodulation products.
Note: Contrary to the recommendation in DIN IEC 268, the total
intermodulation factor is measured to ensure that this measurement method
is comparable to the customary SMPTE measurement methods.

E-1147.2759.00 6-276 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Analyzer

Displaying and Measurement display

analyzing
Activating the measurement function, the instrument displays the total
measurement
intermodulation product.
results

Frequency spectrum
1. Call the measurement function POST FFT (Ê 6-266).
2. Select the SPECTRUM display mode in the Graph menu (Ê 6-288).
A measurement diagram with the frequency spectrum is shown in the
display area.

Note: In the Graph menu you can change the graphic display area
(Ê 6-292, 6-296) and analyze the trace using the cursors (Ê 6-300).
Bar graph
Select the BAR GRAPH display mode in the Graph menu (Ê 6-288).
A bar graph is shown in the display area. Depending on the measure-
ment type, the interference signal (1), useful signal (4), and
intermodulation products (2, 3, 5, 6) of the input signal are
displayed.

Note: When you activate the measurement function, the R&S UP300/350
begins the continuous measurement. However, you can also start and stop
the measurement manually (Ê 6-285).

Operating Manual, 11/2007 6-277 E-1147.2759.00

Analyzer R&S UP300/350

6.3.2.2.11 PROTOCOL (Protocol Analysis), (R&S UP350 only)

Description The PROTOCOL function is not a measurement function in the usual sense,
but instead allows the channel status data to be displayed for the AES/EBU
interface. Other (transission) errors also appear in this protocol analysis.
Setting 1. Switch on the digital analyzer (Ê 6-215).
measurement 2. Call the PROTOCOL measurement function (Ê 6-226).
parameters
3. Select the menu with the 3 or 4 cursor keys.
The menu name is highlighted and the function key [13] is assigned the
appropriate function.

Function key
assignment
Enter the measurement time. (Ê 6-280)

E-1147.2759.00 6-278 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Analyzer

Displaying and List of the protocol analysis

analyzing
Select the LIST OF VALUES display mode in the Graph menu (Ê 6-288).
measurement
results Depending on the protocol recognized, the channel status data of the
digital interface is displayed.
Consumer

Professional

Note: When you activate the measurement function, the R&S UP350 begins
the continuous measurement. However, you can also start and stop the
measurement manually (Ê 6-285).

Operating Manual, 11/2007 6-279 E-1147.2759.00

Analyzer R&S UP300/350

Selecting the Measurement Time

Use You can enter different measurement times according to the measurement
task.
Note: The setting is always valid for both channels (Ch 1&2).
Setting the
1. Press the function key in the current measurement menu.
measurement time
An entry field containing the currently applicable setting is displayed. The
default setting is “100 ms“. At the same time, the function keys are
assigned various units of measurement.

2. Enter a new value (Ê 5-65).

The permissible entry range is:
1 ms ≤ MEAS TIME ≤ 10 s
The new setting is stored and displayed in the parameter field.

Ch 1&2

E-1147.2759.00 6-280 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Analyzer

6.3.2.2.12 SAMPLE RATE (Sample Frequency), (R&S UP350 only)

Description With this function, you can measure the sample frequency on channels Ch 1
and Ch 2.
Setting 1. Switch on the digital analyzer (Ê 6-215).
measurement 2. Call the SAMPLE RATE measurement function (Ê 6-226).
parameters
3. Select the menu with the 3 or 4 cursor keys
The menu name is highlighted and the function key [13] is assigned the
appropriate function.

Function key
assignment
Enter the measurement time. (Ê 6-280)

Displaying and Measurement display

analyzing
Activating the measurement function, the instrument displays the sample rate.
measurement
results

Note: When you activate the measurement function, the R&S UP350 begins
the continuous measurement. However, you can also start and stop the
measurement manually (Ê 6-285).
The measurement time affects the resolution precision.

Operating Manual, 11/2007 6-281 E-1147.2759.00

Analyzer R&S UP300/350

6.3.3 Configuring the Filters (FILTER)

Description In the analyzer, you can activate up to 3 digital filters. These filters are
cascaded.
Standardized filters are available in the FILTER menu. In the individual meas-
urement functions, you can then decide whether or not the selected filters are
to be effective on a specific channel.
Selecting the Select the menu with the 3 or 4 cursor keys.
FILTER menu
The menu name is highlighted and the function keys [13] are assigned
the appropriate function.

Function key
assignment
Select filter 1. (Ê 6-283)

Select filter 2. (Ê 6-283)

Select filter 3. (Ê 6-283)

E-1147.2759.00 6-282 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Analyzer

6.3.3.1 Selecting the Filters

Use Activating special weighting filters (e.g. third-octave or octave filters) provides
a large number of measurement options. You can select the following
weighting filters:
ƒ Off
No weighting filter active
ƒ A weighting
Weighting for RFI voltage measurement
(acc. to DIN 45412)
ƒ C message
Transmission measurement
(acc. to IEEE 743-84)
ƒ CCITT
Psophometric measurement
(acc. to CCITT 0.41, IEEE Rec. 743-84, CISPR 6-76, CCITT Rec. P.53)
ƒ CCIR 1k wtd
Weighting for RFI voltage measurement
(acc. to CCIR Rec. 468-4, DIN 45405, CCITT Rec. N21, CISPR 6-76)
ƒ CCIR unwtd
Band-pass filter from 20 Hz to 20 kHz for band-limited unweighted
measurement according to CCIR
(acc. to CCIR Rec. 468-4)
ƒ CCIR 2 k wtd
NAB standard
(acc. to CCIR)
ƒ deemphasis 50/15
Compact disc
(acc. to CCIR Rec. 651)
ƒ deemphasis 50
Noise and psophometric voltage measurement according to DIN 45405
(acc. to ARD Spec. 5/3.1)
ƒ deemphasis 75
Noise and psophometric voltage measurement according to DIN 45405
(acc. to ARD Spec. 5/3.1)
ƒ deemphasis J.17
Noise and psophometric voltage measurement according to DIN 45405
(acc. to CCITT J.17)
ƒ Rumble wtd
Testing of record players, psophometric voltage measurement
(acc. to DIN 45539)
ƒ Rumble unwtd
Testing of record players, noise voltage measurement
(acc. to DIN 368.3, DIN 45539)
ƒ IEC/IEEE tuner
Measurements of tuners (acc. to DIN/IEC 315)
ƒ 1/3 octave
1
Band-pass filter with bandwidth of /3 octave

Operating Manual, 11/2007 6-283 E-1147.2759.00

Analyzer R&S UP300/350

ƒ 1/1 octave
Band-pass filter with bandwidth of 1 octave
Selecting 1. Press the numeric keys 1, 2, or 3 to select channel Ch 1, Ch 2, or both
the channel channels Ch 1&2.
The selected channel is displayed in green in the channel display.

Selecting and
2. Press the function key in the menu.
activating filters
A selection field containing the available settings is displayed. The
default setting is “Off“.

3. Use the rotary knob [11] to select a setting.

Note: The scroll bar indicates that there are more settings available.
4. Press the ENTER key [5] to close the selection field.
The new setting is stored and displayed in the parameter field.

Ch 1 Ch 2

5. Press the and function keys in the menu if you

want to select more filters.
The selected filters (max. 3) are active and can only be activated
together (cascaded) in the individual measurement functions.
Entering the center If you select an octave filter, a selection field containing various center
frequency frequencies appears. The default setting is “25 Hz“.
(for an octave filter)

6. Use the rotary knob [11] to select a setting.

Note: The scroll bar indicates that there are more settings available.
7. Press the ENTER key [5] to close the selection field.
The new setting is stored and displayed in the parameter field.

Ch 1 Ch 2

E-1147.2759.00 6-284 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Analyzer

6.3.4 Starting and Stopping the Measurements

Use When you activate a measurement function, the R&S UP300/350 begins the
continuous measurement. You can, however, control the measurement
manually. The numeric keys 4, 5, and 6 are provided for this purpose.
ƒ 4: START
Measurements are reset and restarted.
Simple sweeps are reset and restarted. Concatenated sweeps are
performed only once and then stopped.
ƒ 5: SINGLE
Single measurements are performed. When a single measurement has
finished, MEASUREMENT STOPPED appears in the parameter field.
Simple sweeps are performed only once. In case of concatenated
sweeps, a partial sweep is performed. As soon as the measurement is
completed, SWEEP STOPPED is displayed in the status line.
ƒ 6: STOP/CONTINUE
Continuous and single measurements or sweeps are stopped.
MEASUREMENT STOPPED or SWEEP STOPPED appears in the
parameter field.
Note: The sweep is not supported by the “CONTINUE” function.

Operating Manual, 11/2007 6-285 E-1147.2759.00

Graph Menu R&S UP300/350

6.4 Graph Menu

Introduction Apart from displaying measurement results numerically, you can also analyze
the measurements graphically. Various display modes are provided for this
purpose. In the Graph menu, you can select various display parameters for
the individual measurement functions, change the X and Y axises of the
measurement diagram and analyze the trace using the X and Y cursors.
Note: What is measured and how measurement is performed is configured in
the Analyzer menu (or in the Generator menu in case of sweeps). The way in
which the measurement is displayed can also be changed.
Activating the The instrument has to be in local mode.
Graph menu 1. Close the SYS menu if opened.
2. Close every entry field if opened.

3. Press the main menu selection key.

The Graph menu is displayed:

Menus for The menus used to set the graph are displayed in the menu area.
configuring and
setting
display parameters

Set the display mode. (Ê 6-287)

Scale the X axis. (Ê 6-292)

Scale the Y axis. (Ê 6-296)

Trace analysis using the cursors. (Ê 6-300)

E-1147.2759.00 6-286 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Graph Menu

6.4.1 Selecting the Display Mode (GRAPH MODE)

Description In the GRAPH MODE menu, you can set the display parameters for the
corresponding measurement function and the display mode for the traces.
Selecting the Select the menu with the 3 or 4 cursor keys.
GRAPH MODE
menu The menu name is highlighted and the function keys [13] are assigned
the appropriate function.

Function key
assignment
Select the display parameters. (Ê 6-288)

Select the display mode. (Ê 6-290)

Operating Manual, 11/2007 6-287 E-1147.2759.00

Graph Menu R&S UP300/350

6.4.1.1 Selecting the Display Parameters

Use Apart from displaying measurement results numerically, you can also analyze
the measurements graphically. Various display parameters are available
depending on the measurement function:
ƒ Spectrum (FFT, THD, DFD, MOD DIST)
If you select the FFT or Post FFT measurement functions, the
frequency spectrum calculated by the R&S UP300/350 appears in the
display area.

ƒ Bar graph (THD, DFD, MOD DIST)

This display shows the current measurement values in analog form as a
bar graph. However, the frequency axis is not true-to-scale because the
relative size of harmonics, or their variation, is given priority to the
precise value, e.g. measurement function MOD DIST (Ê 6-275).

ƒ Curve Plot (Sweep)

This display shows the X-Y graph of the corresponding sweep.

E-1147.2759.00 6-288 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Graph Menu

ƒ Q-Peak indicator (QUASI PEAK)

This display shows the current QUASI-PEAK measurement values in
analog form as a bar graph. The MIN and MAX values for the active
measurement is also shown.

ƒ List of values (SWEEP RMS+THD, FFT, THD, protocol analysis)

The results of the THD measurement are listed in a table, e.g.
THD measurement function (Ê 6-259).

Note: If a scroll bar is displayed at the right, you can use the 5 or 6 cur-
sor keys [7], or the rotary knob to look at other measurement results.
Selecting
1. Press the function key in the menu.
display parameters
A selection field containing the available settings is displayed. The
default setting is dependent on the current measurement function, e.g.
“Spectrum“.

2. Use the rotary knob [11] to select a setting.

3. Press the ENTER key [5] to close the selection field.
The new setting is displayed in the measurement diagram.

Operating Manual, 11/2007 6-289 E-1147.2759.00

Graph Menu R&S UP300/350

6.4.1.2 Selecting the Display Mode

Use You can select the following settings for displaying the traces:
ƒ Overwrite
Overwrites the trace with every measurement run.

ƒ Max hold
Displays the maximum value over several measurement runs. This is
particularly useful in case of modulated or pulse-like signals. The mode
compares the old and new values of each point and
selects the higher value, creating a new curve.

ƒ Waterfall
Offsets the individual traces in the Z axis to give a three-dimensional
display. With new values, the actual display of the old data is shifted to
the back and the new data are placed to the front of the display. The
maximum amount of curves is limited to 10 per channel.

E-1147.2759.00 6-290 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Graph Menu

Selecting the
1. Press the function key in the menu.
display mode
A selection field containing the available settings is displayed. The
default setting is “Overwrite“.

2. Use the rotary knob [11] to select a setting.

3. Press the ENTER key [5] to close the selection field.
The new setting is displayed in the measurement diagram.

Operating Manual, 11/2007 6-291 E-1147.2759.00

Graph Menu R&S UP300/350

6.4.2 Scaling the X Axis (X AXIS)

Description You can scale the X axis of the measurement diagram to allow certain trace
sections to be analyzed.
Selecting the Select the menu with the 3 or 4 cursor keys.
X AXIS menu
The menu name is highlighted and the function keys [13] are assigned
the appropriate function.

Function key
assignment
Automatic display area scaling. (Ê 6-293)

Manual display area scaling:

Enter the upper limit of the display area. (Ê 6-293)
Manual display area scaling:
Enter the lower limit of the display area. (Ê 6-293)
Select the display mode. (Ê 6-295)

E-1147.2759.00 6-292 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Graph Menu

6.4.2.1 Setting the Display Range

Use You can modify the display area of the X axis measurement diagram using
minimum and maximum values.
Initial position of the
X axis

Entering the lower

limit of the X axis 1. Press the function key in the menu. An entry field
containing the currently applicable setting is displayed. The actual value
can be seen on the left end of the axis. At the same time, the function
keys [13] are assigned various units of measurement.

2. Enter a new value, e.g. 12 kHz (Ê 5-65).

The entry range depends on your measurement task.
The new setting is displayed in the measurement diagram.

Operating Manual, 11/2007 6-293 E-1147.2759.00

Graph Menu R&S UP300/350

Entering the upper

3. Press the function key in the menu.
limit of the X axis
An entry field containing the currently applicable setting is displayed. The
actual value can be seen on the right end of the X axis. At the same
time, the function keys [13] are assigned various units of measurement.

4. Enter a new value, e.g. 20 kHz (Ê 5-65).

The entry range depends on your measurement task.
The new setting is displayed in the measurement diagram.

Auto scaling
Press the function key in the menu.
of the X axis
The X axis is automatically set to display the entire data overview
(Ê above, initial position of the X axis).

E-1147.2759.00 6-294 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Graph Menu

6.4.2.2 Selecting the Display Mode

Use You can select the following settings for scaling the X axis:
ƒ LIN
Linear scaling of the X axis, default setting
ƒ LOG
Logarithmic scaling of the X axis
Activating the
1. Press the function key in the menu.
logarithmic scaling
The function key is highlighted and the new setting is stored. When
activated, the X axis is displayed logarithmically.

Activating the
2. Press the function key in the menu.
linear scaling
The function key is no longer highlighted and the X axis is displayed
linearly.

Operating Manual, 11/2007 6-295 E-1147.2759.00

Graph Menu R&S UP300/350

6.4.3 Scaling the Y Axis (Y AXIS)

Description You can scale the Y axis of the measurement diagram to allow certain trace
sections to be analyzed.
Selecting the Select the menu with the 3 or 4 cursor keys.
Y AXIS menu
The menu name is highlighted and the function keys [13] are assigned
the appropriate function.

Function key
assignment
Automatic display area scaling. (Ê 6-297)

Manual display area scaling:

Enter the upper limit of the display area. (Ê 6-297)
Manual display area scaling:
Enter the lower limit of the display area. (Ê 6-297)
Select the display mode. (Ê 6-299)

Note: The function key is only available if you have set the unit V, FS,
% FS, and % for the Y axis (Ê 6-257).

E-1147.2759.00 6-296 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Graph Menu

6.4.3.1 Setting the Display Range

Use You can modify the display area of the Y axis measurement diagram using
minimum and maximum values.
Initial position of the
Y axis

Entering the upper

1. Press the function key in the menu.
limit of the Y axis
An entry field containing the currently applicable setting is displayed. The
default setting is the upper edge of the diagram. If you want to change
the unit of measurement, go to the function setting, e.g. FFT menu
(Ê 6-251).

2. Enter a new value, e.g. -10 dBV (Ê 5-65).

The entry range depends on the selected unit of measurement.
The new setting is displayed in the measurement diagram.

Operating Manual, 11/2007 6-297 E-1147.2759.00

Graph Menu R&S UP300/350

Entering the lower

3. Press the function key in the menu.
limit of the Y axis
An entry field containing the currently applicable setting is displayed. The
default setting is the lower edge of the diagram. If you want to change
the unit of measurement, go to the function setting, e.g. FFT menu
(Ê 6-251).

4. Enter a new value, e.g. -30 dBV (Ê 5-65).

The entry range depends on the selected unit of measurement.
The new setting is displayed in the measurement diagram.

Auto scaling
Press the function key in the menu.
of the Y axis
The Y axis is automatically set to display the entire data overview
(Ê above, initial position of the Y axis).

E-1147.2759.00 6-298 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Graph Menu

6.4.3.2 Selecting the Display Mode

Use You can select the following settings for scaling the Y axis:
ƒ LIN
Linear scaling of the Y axis, default setting
ƒ LOG
Logarithmic scaling of the Y axis
Activating the
1. Press the function key in the menu.
logarithmic scaling
The function key is highlighted and the new setting is stored. When
activated, the Y axis is displayed logarithmically.

Activating the
2. Press the function key in the menu.
linear scaling
The function key is no longer highlighted and the Y axis is displayed
linearly.

Operating Manual, 11/2007 6-299 E-1147.2759.00

Graph Menu R&S UP300/350

6.4.4 Trace Analysis Using Cursors (CURSORS)

Description You can position two cursors on the X axis and cursors on the Y axis and
move them over the display using the rotary knob or the cursor keys. The
measurement values under these cursors are shown in the full-screen display
(Ê 6-314).
The cursor moves from one measurement value to
another. If there are more measurement values, they can be displayed as
points (e.g. with FFT); the maximum value of the measurement values repre-
sented by a particular point is displayed.
Selecting the Select the menu with the 3 or 4 cursor keys.
CURSORS menu
The menu name is highlighted and the function keys [13] are assigned
the appropriate function.

Function key
assignment
Open the submenu: (Ê 6-301)
Configure cursor 1 on the X axis.

Open the submenu: (Ê 6-301)

Configure cursor 2 on the X axis.

Open the submenu: (Ê 6-309)

Configure cursor 1 on the Y axis.

Open the submenu: (Ê 6-309)

Configure cursor 2 on the Y axis.

E-1147.2759.00 6-300 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Graph Menu

6.4.4.1 Configuring the X Cursors

Description Each X cursor can be configured individually. When activated, they can be
moved to any position and used to mark the zoom area on every trace.
Selecting the
Press the or function keys in the menu.
X1 or X2
submenus The menu name is highlighted and the function keys [13] are assigned
the appropriate function, e.g. X1.

Function key
assignment
Exit the submenu.

Activate/Deactivate the X cursor. (Ê 6-302)

Position the X cursor manually. (Ê 6-305)

Assign an X cursor to a trace (Ch 1 or Ch 2). (Ê 6-303)

Zoom the display area. (Ê 6-307)

Position an X cursor on the maximum value. (Ê 6-303)

Note: The , , , and function keys are only

available if you have activated the X cursor.

Operating Manual, 11/2007 6-301 E-1147.2759.00

Graph Menu R&S UP300/350

6.4.4.1.1 Activating/Deactivating the X Cursors

Use When you activate an X cursor, you can move it to any position and use it to
mark the zoom area.
Selecting 1. Press the numeric keys 1, 2, or 3 to select channel Ch 1, Ch 2, or both
the channel channels Ch 1&2.
The selected channel is displayed in green in the channel display.

Activating the
2. Press the function key in the X1, or X2 submenus.
X cursors
The function key is highlighted and the new setting is stored. When
activated, the X cursor is positioned in the measurement diagram on the
left.
Note: When activated, you can move the X cursor with the rotary
knob [11] in little steps.

Deactivating the
3. Press the function key in the X1, or X2 submenus.
X cursors
The function key is no longer highlighted. The X cursor disappears.

E-1147.2759.00 6-302 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Graph Menu

6.4.4.1.2 Assigning the X Cursors to a Trace (Ch 1 or Ch 2)

Use When activated, the cursor is positioned on the trace of the current channel
(Ch 1 or Ch 2). If both channels are active, you can, however, assign the X
cursor to a particular trace.
ƒ Ch 1
The X cursor is placed on the trace of channel Ch 1.
ƒ Ch 2
The X cursor is placed on the trace of channel Ch 2.
Assigning 1. Activate the X1 cursor, for example (Ê 6-302).
X cursors
to a trace 2. Press the function key in the cursor X1 submenu.
A selection field containing the available settings is displayed. The
default setting is “Ch 1“. However, the default setting depends on cursors
(X1 to Ch1, X2 to Ch2) and channel selection.

3. Use the rotary knob [11] to select a setting.

4. Press the ENTER key [5] to close the selection field.
The new setting is displayed in the measurement diagram.

6.4.4.1.3 Positioning the X Cursors on a Maximum

Use If you have activated an X cursor, you can position it automatically on a

maximum:
ƒ Max
The X cursor is positioned on the highest maximum in the display area.

Operating Manual, 11/2007 6-303 E-1147.2759.00

Graph Menu R&S UP300/350

ƒ Max right
The X cursor is positioned on the next maximum to the right of the
current position in the display area.

ƒ Max left
The X cursor is positioned on the next maximum to the left of the current
position in the display area.

Positioning 1. Activate the X cursor (Ê 6-302).

X Cursors
automatically 2. Press the function key in the cursor X submenu.
A selection field containing the available settings is displayed. The
default setting is “Max“.

3. Use the rotary knob [11] to select a setting.

4. Press the ENTER key [5] to close the selection field.
The new setting is displayed in the measurement diagram.

Note: The X cursor parameters are shown in the full-screen display

(Ê 6-314).

E-1147.2759.00 6-304 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Graph Menu

6.4.4.1.4 Manual Positioning the X Cursors

Use If you have activated an X cursor, you can move it manually on the trace us-
ing the cursor keys (applies only to the full-screen
display (Ê 6-314), or the rotary knob. You can also enter a specific value if
you want to set the cursor at a precise position. The user can control only the
cursor selected in the graph menu (X1, X2):
1. Rotary knob → to move the cursor
2. 4 key → to find max right
3. 3 key → to find max left
Manual 1. Activate the X cursor (Ê 6-302).
positioning the
X cursors

2. Press the function key in the X cursor submenu.

An entry field containing the currently applicable setting is displayed. At
the same time, the function keys [13] are assigned various units of
measurement.

Operating Manual, 11/2007 6-305 E-1147.2759.00

Graph Menu R&S UP300/350

3. a) Enter a new value (Ê 5-65).

The permissible entry range is:
MIN ≤ CURSOR POSITION ≤ MAX
within: MIN - lower limit of the display range (Ê 6-293)
MAX - upper limit of the display range (Ê 6-293)
b) Use the rotary knob [11] to select a setting.
The new position is displayed in the measurement diagram.

Note: The X cursor parameters are shown in the full-screen display

(Ê 6-314).

E-1147.2759.00 6-306 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Graph Menu

6.4.4.1.5 Zooming the Display Area

Use You can zoom the display area in a variety of ways using the cursors:
ƒ Zoom in
The size of the displayed section is increased by 1.41.

ƒ Zoom out
The size of the displayed section is decreased by 1.3.

ƒ Cursor to Cursor
If both X cursors are activated, you can use them as the start and end
values for the new display area.

Activating and 1. Activate the X cursors (Ê 6-302).

positioning cursors 2. Position the X cursors (Ê 6-303, 6-305).
With the normal zoom modes (Zoom in, Zoom out), the current cursor X1
or X2 marks the zoom area.
Both cursors X1 and X2 are required to zoom a specific display area
(Cursor to Cursor). They are used as the start and end values for the
new display area.

Operating Manual, 11/2007 6-307 E-1147.2759.00

Graph Menu R&S UP300/350

Selecting the
3. Press the function key in the X1, or X2 submenus.
zoom area
A selection field containing the available settings is displayed. The
default setting is “Zoom in“.

4. Use the rotary knob [11] to select a setting.

5. Press the ENTER key [5] to close the selection field.
The new setting is displayed in the measurement diagram.

Note: After activating the AUTO SCALING function (Ê 6-293), the entire
display area is shown.

E-1147.2759.00 6-308 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Graph Menu

6.4.4.2 Configuring the Y Cursors

Description Each Y cursor can be configured individually. When activated, they can be
moved to any position and used to mark levels or to zoom the display area.
Selecting the
Press the or function keys in the menu.
Y1 or Y2
submenus The menu name is highlighted and the function keys [13] are assigned
the appropriate function, e.g. Y1.

Function key
assignment
Exit the submenu.

Activate/Deactivate the Y cursor. (Ê 6-310)

Position the Y cursor manually. (Ê 6-311)

Zoom the display area. (Ê 6-312)

Note: The and function keys are only available if you have
activated the Y cursor (Ê 6-310).

Operating Manual, 11/2007 6-309 E-1147.2759.00

Graph Menu R&S UP300/350

6.4.4.2.1 Activating/Deactivating the Y Cursors

Use When you activate the Y cursor, you can move it to any position and use it to
mark the zoom area.
Activating the
1. Press the function key in the Y1, or Y2 submenus.
Y cursors
The function key is highlighted and the new setting is stored. When
activated, the Y cursor is positioned in the measurement diagram on the
top.
Note: When activated, you can move the Y cursor with the rotary
knob [11] in little steps.

Deactivating the
2. Press the function key in the Y1, or Y2 submenus.
Y cursors
The function key is no longer highlighted. The Y cursor disappears.

E-1147.2759.00 6-310 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Graph Menu

6.4.4.2.2 Manual Positioning the Y Cursors

Use If you have activated the Y cursor, you can move it manually on the trace
using the cursor keys (applies only to the full-screen display,
Ê 6-314), or the rotary knob. You can also enter a specific value if you want
to set the cursor at precise position. The user can control only the cursor
selected in the graph menu (X1, X2). To move the cursor, use the rotary
knob.
Manual 1. Activate the Y cursor (Ê 6-310).
positioning the
Y cursors 2. Press the function key in the Y cursor submenu.
An entry field containing the currently applicable setting is displayed.

3. a) Enter a new value (Ê 5-65).

The permissible entry range is:
MIN ≤ CURSOR POSITION ≤ MAX
within: MIN - lower limit of the display range (Ê 6-297)
MAX - upper limit of the display range (Ê 6-297)
b) Use the rotary knob [11] to select a setting.
The new position is displayed in the measurement diagram.

Note: The cursor parameters are shown in the full-screen display (Ê 6-314).

Operating Manual, 11/2007 6-311 E-1147.2759.00

Graph Menu R&S UP300/350

6.4.4.2.3 Zooming the Display Area

Use You can zoom the display area in a variety of ways using the Y cursors:
ƒ Zoom in
The size of the displayed section is increased by 1.41.

ƒ Zoom out
The size of the displayed section is decreased by 1.3.

ƒ Cursor to Cursor
If both Y cursors are activated, you can use them as the start and end
values for the new display area.

E-1147.2759.00 6-312 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Graph Menu

Activating and 1. Activate the Y cursors (Ê 6-310).

positioning cursors 2. Position the Y cursors (Ê 6-311).
With the normal zoom modes (Zoom in, Zoom out), the current cursor Y1
or Y2 marks the zoom area.
Both cursors, Y1 and Y2, are required to zoom a specific display area
(Cursor to Cursor). They are used as the start and end values for the
new display area.
Selecting the
3. Press the function key in the Y1, or Y2 submenus.
zoom area
A selection field containing the available settings is displayed. The
default setting is “Zoom in“.

4. Use the rotary knob [11] to select a setting.

5. Press the ENTER key [5] to close the selection field.
The new setting is displayed in the measurement diagram.

Note: After activating the AUTO SCALING function (Ê 6-293) the entire
display area is shown.

Operating Manual, 11/2007 6-313 E-1147.2759.00

Graph Menu R&S UP300/350

6.4.5 Full-Screen Display

Use The full-screen display mode allows you to visually analyze the graphic
measurement values more effectively. It also shows the parameters for
cursors X1, X2, X1 and X2, Y1 and Y2 more clearly.
Preparation 1. Select a display mode (Ê 6-287).
(adapting the 2. Scale the X and Y axes if necessary (Ê 6-292, 6-296).
measurement
3. Activate the X and Y cursors if necessary (Ê 6-301, 6-309).
diagram)
Note: The cursor last selected can also be positioned in the
full-screen display. To do so, you must open the appropriate submenu
before you activate the full screen. To change the position of a cursor,
you must open the appropriate submenu (X1, X2, Y1, Y2) before you
activate the full screen.
Activating the 4. The instrument has to be in local mode.
full-screen display 5. Close the SYS menu if opened.
6. Close every entry field if opened.

7. Press the main menu selection key.

The menu area, function area, and parameter field disappear from the
screen [14]. The diagram area then fills the whole screen. The scale la-
bels and parameters of the cursors are displayed.

E-1147.2759.00 6-314 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Graph Menu

Repositioning the 8. a) Move the cursor to any position using the rotary knob [11].
active cursor
b) Position the cursor at the maximum on the trace using the 3 or 4
cursor keys (applies only to cursor X1 and X2).
The new cursor parameters are displayed in the measurement diagram.

Deactivating the
full screen 9. Press the main menu selection key.
The menu area, function area and the parameter field reappear on the
screen [14]. The cursor parameters disappear.

Operating Manual, 11/2007 6-315 E-1147.2759.00

System Menu (SYS Menu key) R&S UP300/350

6.5 System Menu (SYS Menu key)

Introduction The R&S UP300/350 has generator and analyzer functions as well as the
system and service functions.
In this menu, the hardware settings overview is displayed, current settings
can be saved, recalled, or printed out (Ê 6-325), a selftest or self
calibrations can be performed, the system settings can be configured, and
the system and hardware information is provided.
Switching over the When the R&S UP300/350 has been switched on and the selftest has run
user interface without detecting any faults, the audio analyzer’s user interface is activated.
1. Press the BACK/SYS key [3].
The menus for the system and service functions are brought up on the
screen in the menu area and the functions key [13] are assigned the
appropriate functions. Depending on the function key assignment, the
associated parameters are listed as tables in the display area.

2. Press the BACK/SYS key [3] or ESC/CANCEL key [4].

The audio analyzer’s user interface is activated again.
Menus for
system and
service functions
Select and call the instrument‘s default setting. (Ê 6-317)

Display the current instrument settings. (Ê 6-320)

Save and load user-defined settings, print functions. (Ê 6-323)

System settings (Ê 6-328)

Service functions (Ê 6-337)

Information about settings and hardware configuration (Ê 6-338)

Perform the automatic calibration. (Ê 6-341)

E-1147.2759.00 6-316 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 System Menu (SYS Menu key)

6.5.1 Instrument Default Setting (PRESET Menu)

Description From the PRESET menu, you can specify a user-defined instrument setting
as the instrument default setting and call it up.
Selecting the 1. Press the BACK/SYS key [3].
PRESET menu 2. Select the menu with the 3 or 4 cursor keys [6].
The menu name is highlighted and the function keys [13] are assigned
the appropriate functions.

Function key
assignment
Call the instrument default setting. (Ê 6-318)

Select the instrument default setting. (Ê 6-318)

Start the remote control manually. (Ê 6-319)

Operating Manual, 11/2007 6-317 E-1147.2759.00

System Menu (SYS Menu key) R&S UP300/350

6.5.1.1 Selecting and Calling the Instrument Default Setting

Use When you switch on the R&S UP300/350, the last settings used are restored.
The R&S UP300/350 also allows you to save and call user-defined
instrument settings. If you frequently use one of these settings and want to
load it quickly, you can define this setting as the PRESET setting (default
setting) and call it directly at any time.
Selecting the 1. Save the user-defined settings (Ê 6-323).
user-defined 2. Select the menu with the 3 or 4 cursor keys [6].
settings
A table containing the available settings is displayed. The current setting
is marked with the sign “x”.

3. Select a setting with the 5 or 6 cursor keys [7].

The selected option is highlighted.
The PRESET memory location FACTORY contains the factory setting
(Ê 6-89).

4. Press the function key.

The setting is defined as the instrument default setting and is marked
with the sign “x”.
Activating the
Press the function key in the menu.
instrument
default setting The current instrument default setting is loaded and the SYS menu is left.
The audio analyzer’s user interface is activated again.

Note: The FACTORY PRESET contains the factory default settings which
cannot be modified.

E-1147.2759.00 6-318 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 System Menu (SYS Menu key)

6.5.1.2 Start the Remote Control Manually

Use The R&S UP300/350 can be remote-controlled via the existing USB host
interface [16]. The R&S UP300/350 automatically detects an existing
connection to a PC and also automatically switches to remote control in the
default setting (AUTO) (Ê 6-332).
You can also switch the R&S UP300/350 to remote control manually.
Starting the remote
Press the function key in the menu.
control manually
The R&S UP300/350 switches to remote control automatically.

Note: With remote control, the local control mode of the R&S UP300/350 is
deactivated and can only be reactivated by pressing the BACK/SYS key [3]
on the front panel. Switching between remote control and local control takes
approx. 20 s.

Operating Manual, 11/2007 6-319 E-1147.2759.00

System Menu (SYS Menu key) R&S UP300/350

6.5.2 Displaying the Current Instrument Setting (STATE Menu)

Description From the STATE menu, you can display an overview of the principal analyzer
and generator configuration settings.
Selecting the 1. Press the BACK/SYS key [3].
STATE menu 2. Select the menu with the 3 or 4 cursor keys [6].
The principal analyzer and generator configuration settings are listed in a
table.

Analog Mode:
Explanation of
parameters

ANALYZER Analog Active analyzer type (analog) (Ê 6-215)

INPUT Signal source (Ê 6-218)

BANDWIDTH Bandwidth of the analyzer (Ê 6-216)

COMMON Reference potential of the input signal (Ê 6-103)

COUPLING Signal coupling (Ê 6-219)

RANGE MODE Level range switching mode (Ê 6-220)

RANGE LIMITS Level range limits (Ê 6-220)

CHANNEL Selected measurement channel (Ê 6-221)

GENERATOR Analog Active generator type (analog) (Ê 6-101)

OUTPUT State of the generator output (Ê 6-104)

BANDWIDTH Bandwidth of the generator (Ê 6-102)

COMMON Reference potential of the output signal (Ê 6-103)

RANGE MODE Level range switching mode (Ê 6-105)

E-1147.2759.00 6-320 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 System Menu (SYS Menu key)

Digital Mode:
Explanation of
parameters

ANALYZER Digital Active analyzer type (digital) (Ê 6-215)

SAMPLE RATE Sample frequency of the input signal (Ê 6-222)

INPUT Input signal (Ê 6-223)

NO. OF BITS Word size of the input signal (Ê 6-223)

CHANNEL Selected measurement channel (Ê 6-221)

GENERATOR Digital Active generator type (digital) (Ê 6-101)

SAMPLE RATE Sample frequency of the output signal (Ê 6-107)

RATE OFFSET Offset of the sample frequency (Ê 6-108)

VALIDITY BIT State of the validity bit (Ê 6-108)

NO. OF BITS Word size of the output signal (Ê 6-109)

PROTOCOL Interface protocol (Ê 6-109)

Operating Manual, 11/2007 6-321 E-1147.2759.00

System Menu (SYS Menu key) R&S UP300/350

6.5.3 User-Defined Settings (FILE Menu)

Description You can save user-defined settings and load them when required from the
FILE menu. You can also print out a screenshot.
Selecting the 1. Press the BACK/SYS key [3].
FILE menu 2. Select the menu with the 3 or 4 cursor keys [6].
The menu name is highlighted and the function keys [13] are assigned
the appropriate function.

Function key
assignment
Save a user-defined setting. (Ê 6-323)

Load a user-defined setting. (Ê 6-323)

Print out a screenshot. (Ê 6-325)

Save the measurement results. (Ê 6-327)

E-1147.2759.00 6-322 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 System Menu (SYS Menu key)

6.5.3.1 Saving and Loading a User-Defined Settings

Use When you switch on the R&S UP300/350, the last settings used are restored.
The R&S UP300/350 also allows you to save and load user-defined
settings.
You can save 10 different settings (SAVE 1 to 10). When the
R&S UP300/350 is delivered, the factory settings (Factory) are loaded in the
all SAVE memory locations.
Saving a 1. Set up the R&S UP300/350 for the measurement you want to perform
user-defined (Ê 6-212).
settings
2. Press the function key in the menu.
A table containing the available settings is displayed (memory locations).

3. Select a setting with the 5 or 6 cursor keys [7].

The selected option is highlighted.
4. Press the ENTER key [5].
An entry field for entering a file name is displayed. The default setting is
“user saved”.

5. Enter a new file name using the numeric keys [12] or an external
keyboard (Ê 3-45).
6. Press the ENTER key [5].
The current setting is saved and the text “Factory” is replaced by the file
name, date, and time.

Operating Manual, 11/2007 6-323 E-1147.2759.00

System Menu (SYS Menu key) R&S UP300/350

Loading the 1. Press the function key in the menu.

user-defined
settings A table containing the available settings is displayed (memory locations).

2. Select a setting with the 5 or 6 cursor keys [7].

The FACTORY memory location contains the factory setting (Ê 6-89).

3. Press the ENTER key [5].

The following message is displayed.

4. Press the ENTER key [5].

The setting you have selected is loaded.

Note: If you frequently use one of the saved settings and want to load it
quickly, you can define this setting as the PRESET (default setting) and call it
directly at any time (Ê 6-318).

E-1147.2759.00 6-324 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 System Menu (SYS Menu key)

6.5.3.2 Printing out a Screenshot

Use The R&S UP300/350 can print or save a current screenshot and an overview
of the current instrument settings. A printer with a USB connection or a USB
stick is required.
For this you need a printer with a USB DEVICE connector or a USB stick.
Selecting the output
1. Press the function key in the menu.
unit
A table containing the available parameters is displayed.
2. Select the PRINTER parameter with the 5 or 6 cursor keys [7].

3. Press the ENTER key [5].

A selection field containing the available settings is displayed. The
default setting is “HP DeskJet mono“.

4. Select a setting with the rotary knob [11].

5. Press the ENTER key [5] to close the selection field.
The setting is saved and the printer driver is loaded.
Printing out/Saving 1. Connect a printer to the connector for an external USB device [17].
screenshots only 2. Select an output unit (printer, USB stick) (Ê above).

3. Press the function key in the menu.

A table containing the available parameters is displayed.
4. Select the PRINT SCREEN parameter with the 5 or 6 cursor keys [7].

5. Press the ENTER key [5].

The following message is displayed.

A current screenshot is printed out/saved.

Operating Manual, 11/2007 6-325 E-1147.2759.00

System Menu (SYS Menu key) R&S UP300/350

Printing out/Saving 1. Connect a printer to the connector for an external USB device [17].
screenshots and 2. Select an output unit (printer, USB stick) (Ê 6-325).
parameters
3. Press the function key in the menu.
A table containing the available parameters is displayed.
4. Select the PRINT SCREEN + PARAM parameter with the 5 or 6
cursor keys [7].

5. Press the ENTER key [5].

The following message is displayed.

A current screenshot and an overview of the current instrument and

functions settings (Ê 6-320) are printed out/saved.

Note: When the printer is not connected, the following message is

displayed:

Connect the USB printer to the connector for an external USB device [17]
and confirm the message by pressing the ENTER key [5].

When the USB stick is not connected, the following message is displayed:

Connect the USB stick to the connector for an external USB device [17]
and confirm the message by pressing the ENTER key [5].

E-1147.2759.00 6-326 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 System Menu (SYS Menu key)

6.5.3.3 Saving the Measurement Results

Use The R&S UP300/350 allows you to store the results of different
measurements as a list on a USB stick.
ƒ FFT LIST->USB STICK
Value pairs of the FFT measurement (Ê 6-252) are stored.
ƒ SWEEP LIST->USB STICK
Value pairs of the SWEEP measurement (Ê 6-155) are stored.
ƒ THD LIST->USB STICK
Value pairs of the THD measurement (Ê 6-260) are stored.
For this you need a USB stick.
Saving the 1. Connect the USB stick to the connector for an external USB device
measurement [17].
results on the USB 2. Select the USB stick for the output unit (Ê 6-325).
stick
(ASCII format) 3. Press the function key in the menu.
A table containing the available parameters is displayed.
4. Select the PRINT SCREEN parameter with the 5 or 6 cursor keys [7].

5. Press the ENTER key [5].

An entry field for entering a file name is displayed. The default setting is
“UP300_Date_Time”.

Note: You can enter a new file name using the numeric keys [12], or an
external keyboard (Ê 3-45).
6. Press the ENTER key [5].
Before you press the BACK/SYS key, the current measurement results
are saved in ASCII format on the USB stick.

Note: When the USB stick is not connected, the following message is
displayed:

Connect the USB stick to the connector for an external USB device[17]
and confirm the message by pressing the ENTER key [5].

Operating Manual, 11/2007 6-327 E-1147.2759.00

System Menu (SYS Menu key) R&S UP300/350

6.5.4 System Settings (CONFIG Menu)

Description You can configure the general system parameters for time/date, reference
source, instrument interface, and screen saver from the CONFIG menu.
Selecting the 1. Press the BACK/SYS key [3].
CONFIG menu 2. Select the menu with the 3 or 4 cursor keys [6].
The menu name is highlighted and the function keys [13] are assigned
the appropriate functions

Function key
assignment
Set the date and time. (Ê 6-329)

Select an internal or external reference sources. (Ê 6-331)

Configure the instrument interfaces. (Ê 6-332)

Set the screen saver mode. (Ê 6-334)

Select an internal or external monitor. (Ê 6-336)

E-1147.2759.00 6-328 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 System Menu (SYS Menu key)

6.5.4.1 Setting the Date and Time

Use The saved setting is time-stamped, using the time provided by the internal
real-time clock (Ê 6-323).
When you set the internal real-time clock, you can choose between two date
and time display format options and modify the parameters.
ƒ dd.mm.yyyy 24 h clock
ƒ mm/dd/yyyy 12 h clock
where: dd - day
mm - month
yy - year
Selecting the
1. Press the function key in the menu.
display format
A table containing the available parameters is displayed.
2. Select the FORMAT parameter with the 5 or 6 cursor keys [7].

3. Press the ENTER key [5].

A selection field containing the available settings is displayed. The
default setting is “dd.mm.yyyy 24h”.

4. Select a setting with the rotary knob [11].

5. Press the ENTER key [5] to close the selection field.
The setting is saved and the display format updated.

Operating Manual, 11/2007 6-329 E-1147.2759.00

System Menu (SYS Menu key) R&S UP300/350

Setting
1. Press the function key in the menu.
the date
A table containing the available parameters is displayed.
2. Select the DATE parameter with the 5 or 6 cursor keys [7].

3. Press the ENTER key [5].

An entry field containing the current setting is displayed.

4. Enter a new value (Ê 5-65).

5. Press the ENTER key [5].
The setting is saved and displayed.
Setting
1. Press the function key in the menu.
the time
A table listing the available parameters is displayed.
2. Select the TIME parameter with the 5 or 6 cursor keys [7].

3. Press the ENTER key [5].

An entry field containing the current setting is displayed.

4. Enter a new value (Ê 5-65).

5. Press the ENTER key [5].
The setting is saved and displayed.

E-1147.2759.00 6-330 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 System Menu (SYS Menu key)

6.5.4.2 Selecting an Internal or External Reference Sources

Use The R&S UP300/350 acting as the frequency standard for all internal
oscillators can use the internal reference source (internal) or an external
reference source (external). A 10 MHz crystal oscillator is used as the
internal reference source. When the default setting is activated (internal
reference), a 10 MHz frequency is output at the REF OUT rear-panel
connector [23] to synchronize other devices to the R&S UP300/350 reference
frequency, for example.
When the “REFERENCE external” setting is activated, the REF IN connector
[23] is used as the input for an external frequency standard. All the
R&S UP300/350’s internal oscillators are synchronized to this external
reference frequency (also 10 MHz).
Selecting the 1. When required, connect the external reference source to the REF IN
reference source connector [23].

2. Press the function key in the menu.

The current reference source setting is displayed.

3. Press the ENTER key [5].

A selection field containing the available settings is displayed. The
default setting is “intern”.

4. Select a reference source with the rotary knob [11].

5. Press the ENTER key [5].
The setting is saved and the R&S UP300/350 frequency standard is
taken from a new source.

Note: If there is no reference signal when you switch over to the external
reference, the message PLL appears in the status line of the main menu after
a short delay to indicate that there is no synchronisation.

Operating Manual, 11/2007 6-331 E-1147.2759.00

System Menu (SYS Menu key) R&S UP300/350

6.5.4.3 Configuring the Instrument Interfaces

Use The R&S UP300/350 can be remote-controlled via the existing USB host
interface [16]. The R&S UP300/350 automatically detects an existing
connection to a PC and also automatically switches to remote control in the
default setting (AUTO).
Switchover between an internal USB master (local control on the instrument)
and external USB master (remote control via PC) is affected by means of a
USB master switch.

The behaviour of the USB master switch can be controlled via the following
settings:
ƒ AUTO
The AUTO setting is the standard configuration of the USB master switch
and allows flexible switching between the local control mode on the
R&S UP300/350 and remote control via PC. This setting allows the
instrument to automatically find a connected PC and switch immediately
to “remote control”.
When you press the BACK/SYS key [3], the R&S UP300/350 can be
switched to “local mode” at any time. The PC and the R&S UP300/350
are thus disconnected. To reactivate the AUTO setting, switch the
R&S UP300/350 again to “remote control”. You can also switch the
R&S UP300/350 to remote control manually (Ê Chyba! Záložka není
definována.).
ƒ INSTRUMENT
The INSTRUMENT setting is required if the R&S UP300/350 is to be
controlled only via the front panel (local control), regardless a PC
connection. This setting avoids automatic switchover to “remote
control”.
When you switch the INSTRUMENT setting to AUTO, an existing PC is
recognized, and the R&S UP300/350 automatically switches to “remote
control”. You can also switch the R&S UP300/350 to remote control
manually (Ê Chyba! Záložka není definována.).

E-1147.2759.00 6-332 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 System Menu (SYS Menu key)

ƒ EXTERN
The EXTERNAL sets the USB master switch to the remote control mode
and the R&S UP300/350 can only be controlled via a PC.
When you press the BACK/SYS key [3], the R&S UP300/350 can be
switched again to “local mode” at any time, for example, for changing
the settings. Reactivate the EXTERNAL setting to switch the
R&S UP300/350 again to “remote control”. You can also switch the
R&S UP300/350 to remote control manually (Ê Chyba! Záložka není
definována.).
Setting the
1. Press the function key in the menu.
USB master selector
The current USB master setting is displayed.

2. Press the ENTER key [5].

A selection field containing the available settings is displayed. The
default setting is “AUTO”.

3. Select a setting with the rotary knob [11].

4. Press the ENTER key [5] to close the selection field.
The setting is saved.

Note: If the remote control is active, the local control mode of the
R&S UP300/350 is deactivated and can only be reactivated by pressing the
BACK/SYS key [3] on the front panel, or disconnecting the USB cabel.
Switching between remote control and local control takes approx. 20 s.

Operating Manual, 11/2007 6-333 E-1147.2759.00

System Menu (SYS Menu key) R&S UP300/350

6.5.4.4 Setting the Screen Saver Mode

Activating the The R&S UP300/350 has a screen-saver function that turns the screen off
screen saver [14] after a certain time. There are a number of timing options for the screen
turn-off:
ƒ None
The screen remains switched on.
ƒ 5 min
The screen is turned off after 5 minutes.
ƒ 30 min
The screen is turned off after 30 minutes.

1. Press the function key in the menu.

A table listing the available parameters is displayed.
2. Select the SREEN SAVER parameter with the 5 or 6 cursor keys [7].

3. Press the ENTER key [5].

A selection field containing the available settings is displayed. The
default setting is “none”.

4. Select a setting with the rotary knob [11].

5. Press the ENTER key [5].
The setting is saved and the screen saver is activated or deactivated.

E-1147.2759.00 6-334 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 System Menu (SYS Menu key)

Activating the If the instrument is in remote-control mode and the results are being
screen saver in displayed on the controller (PC monitor), the screen can be switched off:
remote-control
ƒ Black
mode
The screen is switched off.
ƒ Picture
The picture is displayed on the screen when the instrument is in
remote-control mode.

1. Press the function key in the menu.

A table listing the available parameters is displayed.
2. Select the REMOTE parameter with the 5 or 6 cursor keys [7].

3. Press the ENTER key [5].

A selection field containing the available settings is displayed. The
default setting is “black”.

4. Select a setting with the rotary knob [11].

5. Press the ENTER key [5].
The setting is saved and the screen saver in the
remote-control mode is activated or deactivated.
With the “black” setting, the screen is, of course, black, and only the
green LED [2] indicates that the R&S UP300/350 is in remote-control
mode.
With the “picture” setting, the following message is displayed on the
screen with the R&S UP300/350 in remote-control mode:

Note: With remote control, the local control mode of the R&S UP300/350 is
deactivated and can only be reactivated by pressing the BACK/SYS key [3]
on the front panel, or dicsconnecting the USB cabel. Switching between
remote control and local control takes approx. 20 s.

Operating Manual, 11/2007 6-335 E-1147.2759.00

System Menu (SYS Menu key) R&S UP300/350

6.5.4.5 Selecting the Internal or External Monitors

Use Screen display is possible via the internal monitor or external monitor:
ƒ Intern
Screen display is shown on the internal monitor via the built-in colour
TFT display.
ƒ Extern
Screen display is shown on the external monitor via the connected
monitor, and the built-in colour TFT display is deactivated.
Selecting 1. If required, connect a monitor to the MONITOR connector [21].
the monitor
2. Press the function key in the menu.
The current screen setting is displayed.

3. Press the ENTER key [5].

A selection field containing the available settings is displayed. The
default setting is “intern”.

4. Select a setting with a rotary knob [11].

5. Press the ENTER key [5].
The setting is saved.
If the “external” setting is selected, the connected screen shows the
active user interface. The internal monitor is switched off.

E-1147.2759.00 6-336 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 System Menu (SYS Menu key)

6.5.5 Service Functions (SERVICE Menu)

Description You can call a number of auxiliary functions to be used for servicing or
troubleshooting from the SERVICE menu. These functions are not required
for normal measurements with the R&S UP300/350.
Selecting the 1. Press the BACK/SYS key [3].
SERVICE menu 2. Select the menu with the 3 or 4 cursor keys [6].
The menu name is highlighted and the function key [13] is assigned the
appropriate function.

Function key
assignment
Perform the selftest when the ENTER key is pressed. (Ê 6-337)

6.5.5.1 Performing the Selftests

ATTENTION
No external cables may be connected during the selftest.

Use The R&S UP300/350 can perform a module selftest. If there is an error, the
R&S UP300/350 is capable of localizing the defective module.
The test results help the service personnel to analyze the instrument and
perform troubleshooting.
Starting 1. Press the function key in the menu.
selftests
The SELFTEST text is displayed (Ê below).
2. Press the ENTER key [5].
The selftest starts. All module parts and software procedures are
checked one after another and the result list with “passed”, or “error”
status is displayed.

Operating Manual, 11/2007 6-337 E-1147.2759.00

System Menu (SYS Menu key) R&S UP300/350

6.5.6 System Information (INFO Menu)

Description You can obtain information such as module data, instrument statistics and
system messages from the INFO menu.
Selecting the 1. Press the BACK/SYS key [3].
INFO menu 2. Select the menu with the 3 or 4 cursor keys [3].
The menu name is highlighted and the function keys [13] are assigned
the appropriate functions.

Function key
assignment
Display module data. (Ê 6-339)

Display instrument statistics. (Ê 6-339)

Display system messages. (Ê 6-340)

E-1147.2759.00 6-338 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 System Menu (SYS Menu key)

6.5.6.1 Displaying the Module Data

Use You can display the serial number of the modules installed in the
R&S UP300/350.
Calling the
Press the function key in the menu.
module data
A table listing the current modules and the serial number is displayed.

6.5.6.2 Displaying the Instrument Statistics

Use You can display the following R&S UP300/350 statistics:

ƒ MODEL - model designation
ƒ SERIAL NUMBER - serial number
ƒ FW VERSION - firmware version
ƒ OPERATION TIME - operating hours
ƒ POWER ON CYCLES - on/off cycles
Direct
Press the function key in the menu.
selection
A table listing the current data is displayed.

Operating Manual, 11/2007 6-339 E-1147.2759.00

System Menu (SYS Menu key) R&S UP300/350

6.5.6.3 Displaying the System Messages

Use You can display the most recent R&S UP300/350 system messages in their
order of occurrence. Operating errors are neither saved nor displayed.
System messages help the service personnel to analyze the instrument and
handle errors.
Displaying the
1. Press the function key in the menu.
system messages
A table listing the current system messages is displayed.
2. Select a system message with the 5 or 6 cursor keys [7].

3. Press the ENTER key [5].

The current system message is clearly displayed with the date and time
of their occurrence and the error code.

4. Press the ENTER key [5] for closing the display.

E-1147.2759.00 6-340 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 System Menu (SYS Menu key)

6.5.7 Adjustment Functions (CALIB Menu)

Description Via the CALIB menu, you can call up an automatic adjustment of the
generator and analyzer modules, especially to reduce the influence of DC
offset. You can adjust the generator and analyzer separately, or adjust the
entire instrument.
Selecting the 1. Press the BACK/SYS key [3].
CALIB menu 2. Select the menu with the 3 or 4 cursor keys [6].
The menu name is highlighted and the function key [13] is assigned the
appropriate function.

Function key
assignment
Perform the auto adjustment when the enter key is pressed (Ê 6-342, 6-343).

Operating Manual, 11/2007 6-341 E-1147.2759.00

System Menu (SYS Menu key) R&S UP300/350

6.5.7.1 Starting the Auto Adjustment of the Generator Module

Use The R&S UP300/350 can perform an auto adjustment of the generator
modules.
Adjusting
1. Press the function key in the menu.
the generator
A table listing the available start options is displayed.
2. Select the AUTOCAL GENERATOR parameter with the 5 or 6 cursor
keys [7].

3. Press the ENTER key [5].

The auto adjustment starts. The generator modules are adjusted and the
message „Calibrating, please wait“ appears. After adjustment, the result
“Success”, or “Error” is present after approx. 25 seconds.
Note: If the results are erroneous, you should perform the selftest of the
instrument (Ê 6-337) and repeat the adjustment. If the error occurs
again, contact Customer Service (Ê 1-33).
4. Press the ESC/CANCEL key [4] to cancel the adjustment.
The old adjustment state is retained.

6.5.7.2 Starting the Auto Adjustment of the Analyzer Module

Use The R&S UP300/350 can perform an automatic adjustment of the analyzer
modules.
Adjusting
1. Press the function key in the menu.
the analyzer
A table listing the available start options is displayed.
2. Select the AUTOCAL ANALYZER parameter with the 5 or 6 cursor
keys [7].

3. Press the ENTER key [5].

The auto adjustment starts. The analyzer modules are adjusted and the
message „Calibrating, please wait“ appears. After adjustment, the result
“Success”, or “Error” is present after approx. 25 seconds.
Note: If the results are erroneous, you should perform the selftest of the
instrument (Ê 6-337) and repeat the adjustment. If the error occurs
again, contact Customer Service (Ê 1-33).
4. Press the ESC/CANCEL key [4] to cancel the adjustment.
The old adjustment state is retained.

E-1147.2759.00 6-342 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 System Menu (SYS Menu key)

6.5.7.3 Starting the Auto Adjustment of the R&S UP300/350

Use The R&S UP300/350 can perform an automatic adjustment of all

instrument modules.
Adjusting
1. Press the function key in the menu.
the instrument
A table listing the available start options is displayed.
2. Select the AUTOCAL DEVICE parameter with the 5 or 6 cursor keys
[7].

3. Press the ENTER key [5].

The auto adjustment starts. All instrument modules are adjusted and the
message „Calibrating, please wait“ appears. After adjustment, the result
“Success”, or “Error” is present after approx. 25 seconds.
Note: If the results are erroneous, you should perform the selftest of the
instrument (Ê 6-337) and repeat adjustment. If the error occurs again,
contact Customer Service (Ê 1-33).
4. Press the ESC/CANCEL key [4] to cancel the adjustment.
The old adjustment state is retained.

Operating Manual, 11/2007 6-343 E-1147.2759.00

Keyboard Connector (KEYB) R&S UP300/350

7 Instrument Interfaces
This chapter The chapter 7 contains a description of the R&S UP300/350’s interfaces.
Further The address of our Support Center and a list of Rohde & Schwarz service
information centers can be found at the front of this manual.

7.1 Keyboard Connector (KEYB)

Connector There is a 6-pin PS/2 KEYB connector [22] on the rear panel of the
R&S UP300/350 for an external keyboard.
Pin assignment Pin Signal
1 KEYBOARDDATA
2 MOUSEDATA
3 GND
4 5V, KEYBOARD
5 KEYBOARDCLK
6 MOUSECLK

7.2 Monitor Connector (MON)

Connector There is a MON connector [21] on the rear panel of the R&S UP300/350 for
an external monitor.
Pin assignment Pin Signal
1 R
2 G
3 B
4 (NC)
5 GND
6 GND
7 GND
8 GND
9 GND
10 GND
11 (NC)
12 (NC)
13 HSYNC
14 VSYNC
15 (NC)

E-1147.2759.00 7-344 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Reference Input and Output (10 MHz In/Out)

7.3 Reference Input and Output (10 MHz In/Out)

External If an external reference is used, the internal reference oscillator is
reference synchronized to the 10 MHz reference signal at REF IN/OUT connector [23].
The input level must be 0.5 to 2 V.
Internal The 10 MHz signal from the internal reference oscillator is available at the
reference REF IN/OUT connector [23] so that other devices can be synchronized to the
R&S UP300/350. The output level is 7 dBm.
Instrument You can switch over between the internal and external reference in the
setting CONFIG menu (Ê 6-331).

7.4 USB Interface (PC, DEV)

Connector The USB-Host [16] and USB-Device [17] connectors on the rear panel of the
R&S UP300/350 are for a USB device.
Pin assignment Pin Signal
1 Vbus (Vcc)
2 D-
3 D+
4 GND
Shell Shield

7.5 Audio Monitoring Output (MON OUT)

Connector At the audio monitoring output [15], you can use headphones to monitor
signals which can be tapped at various points in the R&S UP300/350.
Specification Connector: Mini jack 3.5 mm
Output impedance: 10 Ω
Voltage: Max. 2 V (without load)
Instrument setting The MONITOR menu allows you to make the settings when an external
headphone is used (Ê 6-209).

Operating Manual, 11/2007 7-345 E-1147.2759.00

System Messages R&S UP300/350

8 Error Messages
This chapter You can find a description of errors that may occur in the R&S UP300/350
and you will also find notes on troubleshooting.
The R&S UP300/350 displays detected errors and warnings on the screen.
The various types of messages are described as the following:
ƒ System messages
ƒ Warnings indicating impermissible operating states
Further Chapter 6 describes all the R&S UP300/350‘s menus and the associated
information functions in detail.

8.1 System Messages

System messages System messages inform you about internally detected errors. The
following information are displayed, e. g.:
ƒ Type of error (x)
ƒ Four-digit error number (y)
ƒ Request for closing the system messages (z)

x y

The error number allows the service shop to determine the type of error. In
the event of a system message, please write down the error number and
proceed according to the following steps:
Device error A system error was detected in the instrument.
“Error number”
1. Please write down the error number and the corresponding instrument
settings.
2. Contact your nearest Rohde & Schwarz representative (Ê 1-34). The
instrument may have to be checked in the service shop.
Overtemperature An impermissibly high temperature was detected in the instrument. The
error internal fans are switched to full power for approx. 30 seconds, and then the
“Error number” R&S UP300/350 is automatically switched off to prevent further overheating.
The overtemperature could be caused by too high an ambient temperature
and/or a reduced air circulation.
1. Allow the instrument to cool off for a while and remove any
obstructions that could prevent the R&S UP300/350 from air circulation.
2. If this does not eliminate the overtemperature, have the instrument
checked by the service shop.

Note: Some errors can cause the instrument or parts of the instrument to be
switched off immediately in order to avoid destruction of components.
Whenever a system message occurs, an entry is made under SYSTEM
MESSAGES (Ê 6-340).

E-1147.2759.00 8-346 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Warnings Indicating Impermissible Operating States

8.2 Warnings Indicating Impermissible Operating States

Warnings Red labels in the status line tell the user that the measurement results may
be incorrect. This can be caused by excessively high signal levels at the input
or by incorrect settings on the instrument. The warning remains on the screen
until the problem has been eliminated.
There are several types of messages that can be displayed on the screen.

OVL G The output current of the R&S UP300/350 is too high. This can be caused by
the following:
1. The load impedance is too low at high output levels. Eliminate any short
circuits.
2. A noise voltage is being supplied at the output connector. Remove the
voltage source.
The output concerned switches off if the error lasts for longer than 2
seconds. The output should be switched on again after the error has been
eliminated (Ê 6-104).
OVL A The input level of the R&S UP300/350 is too high. This can be caused by the
following:
1. The input level changes rapidly by 1 to 2 measurement ranges. The
warning disappears after the measurement range has been reconfigured.
2. The input level exceeds the fixed level range (Fixed Range). Readjust
the level range (Ê 6-105).
3. The input level exceeds the value Vrms > 33 V. Reduce the input level.
PLL The control loop, which is used to set the frequency of the internal reference
oscillator with crystal accuracy, is not locked. This causes a frequency error,
and the audio analyzer no longer operates according to
specifications. The cause for this may be an internal instrument error or the
absence of the 10 MHz reference signal at the external input REF IN. The
absence of the reference signal, however, is not indicated unless the
reference has been switched to “external”.
1. If the missing external reference signal is the cause of this error
message, connect a 10 MHz signal to the REF IN [23] input or switch the
reference to “internal” (Ê 6-331).
2. If the missing external reference signal is not the cause of this error
message, an internal instrument error has occurred. In this case, switch
the instrument off and on again. If the error message is still present, the
instrument must be sent to the service shop to be checked.
OVT An impermissibly high temperature was detected in the instrument. The
internal fans are switched to full power for approx. 2 minutes, and then the
R&S UP300/350 is automatically switched off to prevent further overheating.
The overtemperature could be caused by too high an ambient temperature
and/or a reduced air circulation.
1. Allow the instrument to cool off for a while and remove any
obstructions that could prevent the R&S UP300/350 from air circulation.
2. If this does not eliminate the overtemperature, have the instrument
checked by the service shop.

Operating Manual, 11/2007 8-347 E-1147.2759.00

Warnings Indicating Impermissible Operating States R&S UP300/350

Note: Some errors can cause the instrument or parts of the instrument to be
switched off immediately in order to avoid destruction of components.
Whenever a system message occurs, an entry is made under SYSTEM
MESSAGES (Ê 6-340).

E-1147.2759.00 8-348 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Index

9 Index
9.1 Index
DFD.............................................................. 6-268
0 FFT .............................................................. 6-251
0 ... 9 (Numerical keys)....................................... 5-54 FREQ., DC, RMS ......................................... 6-228
A MOD DIST.................................................... 6-275
AC line PEAK ........................................................... 6-237
Connection ..................................................... 3-42 PHASE ......................................................... 6-272
AC line fuse ........................................................ 2-38 POLARITY ................................................... 6-267
AC line switch ..................................................... 2-38 POST FFT.................................................... 6-265
AC supply PROTOCOL ................................................. 6-278
Connector....................................................... 2-38 QUASI PEAK ............................................... 6-243
Fuse ............................................................... 2-38 SAMPLE RATE ............................................ 6-281
Accessories ........................................................ 1-36 THD, THD+N, SINAD................................... 6-259
Action keys ......................................................... 5-56 ANL ....................................... 5-52, 5-54, 5-77, 6-212
Activating Application .......................................................... 1-35
Analyzer input............................................... 6-218 Application range of the R&S UP300/350........... 1-35
Audio monitoring output................................ 6-210 Assignment, function keys .................................. 5-60
AVERAGING ..................................... 6-233, 6-255 Audio monitoring output, activation/deactivation of. 6-
CURSOR...................................................... 6-310 210
Filters ........................................................... 6-232 AUTO SCALING
Generator output .......................................... 6-104 X axis ........................................................... 6-293
POST FFT.................................................... 6-266 Y axis ........................................................... 6-297
ADC SAMPLING............................................... 6-222 Averaging
AM (MULTISINE) FACTOR ........................................... 6-233, 6-255
Activating...................................................... 6-129 MODE ............................................... 6-233, 6-255
Entering frequency ....................................... 6-130 AVERAGING
Modulation depth.......................................... 6-131 Activating...................................................... 6-233
AM DEPTH ....................................................... 6-131 AVERAGING .................................................... 6-233
AM FREQ ......................................................... 6-130 AVERAGING .................................................... 6-255
AM STATE........................................................ 6-129 AVERAGING
AMPL Activating...................................................... 6-255
NOISE .......................................................... 6-120 Axis (measurement diagram)
SINE............................................................. 6-117 X axis ........................................................... 6-292
AMPL RATIO.................................................... 6-142 Y axis ........................................................... 6-296
Amplitude B
DC OFFSET ................................................. 6-153 BACK (Key) ........................................................ 5-56
High-level (SINE BURST)............................. 6-136 Back key ............................................................. 2-37
Low-level (SINE BURST) ............................. 6-137 Bandwidth
MONITOR .................................................... 6-211 Analog analyzer............................................ 6-216
MULTISINE .................................................. 6-125 Analog generator.......................................... 6-102
NOISE .......................................................... 6-120 BANDWIDTH
POLARITY TEST ......................................... 6-151 Analyzer ....................................................... 6-216
Ratio (MOD DIST) ........................................ 6-142 Generator ..................................................... 6-102
Resolution (SWEEP) .............. 6-167, 6-186, 6-206 RMS SELECTIVE ............................. 6-174, 6-248
SINE............................................................. 6-117
SWEEP .................................. 6-165, 6-183, 6-203 C
Analog CALIB ...................................................... 5-88, 6-341
Selecting analyzer type ................................ 6-215 Calibration
Selecting generator type............................... 6-101 Analyzer ....................................................... 6-342
Analyzer Generator ..................................................... 6-342
Activating/deactivating input ......................... 6-218 Instrument .................................................... 6-343
Calibrate ....................................................... 6-342 CENTER FREQ................................................ 6-247
Configuring functions.................................... 6-227 COMMON.............................................. 6-103, 6-217
Configuring parameters ................................ 6-213 CONFIG ........................................... 5-76, 5-83, 5-88
Default settings............................................... 6-94 Analyzer ....................................................... 6-213
Measuring example ........................................ 4-47 Generator ....................................................... 6-99
Overview ........................................................ 5-77 System settings............................................ 6-328
Selecting functions ....................................... 6-226 Configuring
Selecting type............................................... 6-215 Analyzer ....................................................... 6-213
Setting the signal type .................................. 6-224 Cursor ............................................... 6-301, 6-309
Analyzer function Filters ................................................ 6-282, 6-283

Operating Manual, 11/2007 9-349 E-1147.2759.00

Index R&S UP300/350

Generator ....................................................... 6-99 Level unit........................................... 6-208, 6-266

Measurement parameters (analyzer)............ 6-227 Peak value ................................................... 6-149
Signal parameters (generator)...................... 6-113 Diagram
Connecting X axis ........................................................... 6-292
DUT................................................................ 3-44 Y axis ........................................................... 6-296
Connecting DIFF FREQ (DFD)................................. 6-145, 6-147
External keyboard........................................... 3-45 Difference frequency distortion .............. 6-268, 6-271
Connector Difference frequency signal .............................. 6-144
External keyboard......................................... 7-344 Digital
External Monitor ........................................... 7-344 Input socket.................................................... 2-39
For AC supply................................................. 2-38 Output socket ................................................. 2-39
For external keyboard..................................... 2-38 Selecting analyzer type ................................ 6-215
For external monitor ....................................... 2-38 Selecting generator type .............................. 6-101
For external USB device................................. 2-38 Display............................... 5-57, 6-290, 6-295, 6-299
For external USB host .................................... 2-38 Analysis........................................................ 6-300
Connectors ....................................................... 7-344 Full screen.................................................... 6-314
Control Function area ................................................. 5-60
Front view....................................................... 2-37 Graphical...................................................... 6-286
Rear view R&S 350 ........................................ 2-39 Instrument settings ....................................... 6-320
Rear view R&S UP300/350 ............................ 2-38 Mode ...................................... 6-290, 6-295, 6-299
Control elements................................................. 2-37 Module data ................................................. 6-339
Coupling Parameters................................................... 6-288
Frequency (SINE)......................................... 6-116 Setting the Screen Saver Mode ................... 6-334
Signal (analyzer) .......................................... 6-219 Statistics....................................................... 6-339
COUPLING ....................................................... 6-219 Tabular form................................................. 6-286
CURSOR X axis ........................................................... 6-292
Activating........................................... 6-302, 6-310 Y axis ........................................................... 6-296
Assigning trace............................................. 6-303 Zooming ............................................ 6-307, 6-312
Configuring ........................................ 6-301, 6-309 DISPLAY (FREQ., DC, RMS) ........................... 6-232
Maximum...................................................... 6-303 Display area........................................................ 5-58
Parameters................................................... 6-314 Distribution function (NOISE)............................ 6-120
Positioning.............................. 6-303, 6-305, 6-311 DUT .................................................................... 3-44
Cursor keys......................................................... 2-37 DUT (Connecting)............................................... 3-44
Description ..................................................... 5-55
Parameter entry.............................................. 5-67 E
CURSORS.......................................................... 5-85 EMC ................................................................... 3-43
Enlarging
D X axis ........................................................... 6-307
Data sheet .......................................................... 1-11 Y axis ........................................................... 6-312
Date .................................................................. 6-329 ENTER (Action keys)................................. 2-37, 5-56
DATE/TIME ...................................................... 6-329 Entry ................................................................... 5-53
DC .................................................................... 6-228 Entering numerical parameters ...................... 5-65
Measurement time........................................ 6-230 Selection ........................................................ 5-64
Measuring OFFSET ..................................... 6-228 Toggling ......................................................... 5-63
Setting OFFSET ........................................... 6-152 Error messages .............................. 1-3, 6-340, 8-346
DC OFFSET ............................................ 5-72, 6-153 ESC/CANCEL (Action keys) ...................... 2-37, 5-56
DC voltage component
Measuring..................................................... 6-228 F
Setting .......................................................... 6-152 f1 = f2 ............................................................... 6-116
Deactivating FACTOR................................................ 6-233, 6-255
Analyzer input............................................... 6-218 FFT.......................................................... 5-80, 6-251
Audio monitoring output................................ 6-210 Level unit...................................................... 6-257
AVERAGING ..................................... 6-233, 6-255 Size .............................................................. 6-253
CURSOR........................................... 6-302, 6-310 Window ........................................................ 6-253
Filters ........................................................... 6-232 FFT SIZE
Generator output .......................................... 6-104 FFT .............................................................. 6-253
POST FFT.................................................... 6-266 POST FFT.................................................... 6-265
Decimal point (Numerical keys) .......................... 5-54 FFT WINDOW
Default settings, instrument ................................ 6-89 FFT .............................................................. 6-253
Default, instrument settings ................................ 6-89 POST FFT.................................................... 6-265
Device error (system messages) ...................... 8-346 FILE.................................................................... 5-87
DFD ..................................... 5-71, 5-81, 6-144, 6-268 FILTER .................................................... 5-83, 6-282
Frequency (DIFF FREQ) ................... 6-145, 6-147 Activating...................................................... 6-232
Frequency (MAIN FREQ) ............................. 6-147 Selecting ...................................................... 6-283
Frequency (UPPER FREQ).......................... 6-145 FIND ................................................................. 6-303

E-1147.2759.00 9-350 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Index

FREQ Selecting type............................................... 6-101

Measurement time........................................ 6-230 Setting example ............................................. 4-47
MULTISINE .................................................. 6-124 Setting the signal type .................................. 6-110
RMS SELECTIVE......................................... 6-247 Generator function
SINE............................................................. 6-115 DC OFFSET................................................. 6-152
FREQ MODE DFD.............................................................. 6-144
THD, THD+N, SINAD................................... 6-262 MOD DIST.................................................... 6-138
FREQ., DC, RMS..................................... 5-78, 6-228 MULTISINE .................................................. 6-122
Level unit ...................................................... 6-235 NOISE .......................................................... 6-119
Measurement result display.......................... 6-232 POLARITY TEST ......................................... 6-150
Frequency SINE............................................................. 6-114
DFD................................................... 6-145, 6-147 SINE BURST................................................ 6-132
Measuring..................................................... 6-228 SWEEP ............................................. 6-154, 6-171
MOD DIST.................................................... 6-140 Generator output, activation/deactivation of ..... 6-104
MULTISINE .................................................. 6-124 Getting started .................................................... 4-47
Resolution (SWEEP) .............. 6-161, 6-179, 6-199 GOTO REMOTE .............................................. 6-319
RMS SELECTIVE......................................... 6-247 Graph ............................................... 5-52, 5-54, 5-84
SINE............................................................. 6-115 Default settings .............................................. 6-97
SINE BURST................................................ 6-133 Overview ........................................................ 5-84
SWEEP .................................. 6-159, 6-177, 6-197 Setting .......................................................... 6-286
Frequency coupling (SINE)............................... 6-116 GRAPH MODE ....... 5-84, 6-287, 6-290, 6-295, 6-299
Frequency resolution (MULTISINE).................. 6-126 GRAPH TYPE .................................................. 6-288
Front view ........................................................... 2-37
FS OFFSET (digital generator) ......................... 6-108 H
Full screen ........................................................ 6-314 Handle ................................................................ 3-40
FULL SCREEN ................................................... 5-54 HARDWARE INFO ........................................... 6-339
Full sreen.......................................................... 6-314 Headphones ..................................................... 7-345
Function HIGH LEVEL AMPL.......................................... 6-136
DC OFFSET ................................................. 6-152 HIGH LEVEL TIME........................................... 6-134
DFD................................................... 6-144, 6-268 Ch
FFT............................................................... 6-251 CH1 ................................... 5-52, 6-115, 6-221, 6-303
MOD DIST......................................... 6-138, 6-275 CH1&2 .......................................... 5-52, 6-115, 6-221
MULTISINE .................................................. 6-122 CH1, input connector .......................................... 2-37
NOISE .......................................................... 6-119 CH1, output connector........................................ 2-37
PEAK............................................................ 6-237 CH2 ................................... 5-52, 6-115, 6-221, 6-303
PHASE ......................................................... 6-272 CH2, input connector .......................................... 2-38
POLARITY ................................................... 6-267 CH2, output connector........................................ 2-38
POLARITY TEST ......................................... 6-150 CHANNEL ........................................................ 6-221
PROTOCOL ................................................. 6-278 Characteristics
QUASI PEAK................................................ 6-243 CURSOR...................................................... 6-302
SAMPLE RATE ............................................ 6-281
SINE............................................................. 6-114 I
SINE BURST................................................ 6-132 IEC 118 ................................................. 6-145, 6-271
SWEEP ............................................. 6-154, 6-171 IEC 268 ................................................. 6-147, 6-271
THD, THD+N, SINAD................................... 6-259 INFO........................................................ 5-88, 6-338
Function area, assignment.................................. 5-60 Input
Function keys...................................................... 2-37 Analog analyzer............................................ 6-218
Assignment..................................................... 5-69 Digital (S/P DIF) ............................................. 2-39
Description ............................................ 5-55, 5-60 External reference ........................................ 7-345
Function test ....................................................... 3-43 CH1 ................................................................ 2-37
FUNCTIONS.............................................. 5-69, 5-77 CH2 ................................................................ 2-38
Analyzer ....................................................... 6-224 Optical (TOSLINK) ......................................... 2-39
Generator ..................................................... 6-110 INPUT.................................................... 6-218, 6-223
Fuse.................................................................... 2-38 Input for external reference................................. 2-38
Inputs................................................................ 7-344
G Instrument
GEN......................................... 5-52, 5-54, 5-69, 6-98 Calibrate....................................................... 6-343
GEN FREQ....................................................... 6-133 Instrument functions ........................................... 5-69
Generator Instrument Interfaces........................................ 7-344
Calibrate ....................................................... 6-342 Instrument settings
Configuring parameters .................................. 6-99 Displaying..................................................... 6-320
Configuring Signals ...................................... 6-113 Factory ........................................................... 6-89
Default settings............................................... 6-90 PRESET....................................................... 6-317
Overview ........................................................ 5-69 User-defined................................................. 6-322
Selecting functions ....................................... 6-112

Operating Manual, 11/2007 9-351 E-1147.2759.00

Index R&S UP300/350

Interface SAMPLE RATE ............................................ 6-280

USB................................................................ 2-38 SWEEP ........................................................ 6-157
INTERFACE ..................................................... 6-332 THD, THD+N, SINAD........................ 6-195, 6-264
Interface protocol Measurement bandwidth (RMS SELECTIVE) . 6-174,
Digital analyzer............................................. 6-223 6-248
Digital generator ........................................... 6-109 Measurement delay (SWEEP)6-163, 6-168, 6-181, 6-
Interfaces, USB................................................. 7-345 187, 6-201, 6-207
Intermodulation product .................................... 6-271 Measurement diagram
INTERVAL TIME X axis ........................................................... 6-292
PEAK................................................. 6-240, 6-245 Y axis ........................................................... 6-296
SINE BURST................................................ 6-135 Measurement functions .................................... 6-224
Measurement method (PEAK).......................... 6-239
K Measurement mode (THD, THD+N, SINAD)6-193, 6-
Key assignment 261
Function keys ................................................. 5-69 Measurement range switchover (analyzer) ....... 6-220
Keyboard, external..................................... 2-38, 3-45 Measurement result display (FREQ., DC, RMS)6-232
Keypad ............................................................... 5-53 Measurement results (saving) .......................... 6-327
Keys Measurement signal
BACK ............................................................. 5-56 Activating/deactivating.................................. 6-218
Cursor keys .................................................... 5-55 Analyzing...................................................... 6-300
ENTER ........................................................... 5-56 Measurement time................................. 6-240, 6-245
ESC/CANCEL ................................................ 5-56 FREQ., DC, RMS ......................................... 6-230
Main menu selection keys .............................. 5-54 PROTOCOL ................................................. 6-280
Numerical keys............................................... 5-54 SAMPLE RATE ............................................ 6-280
SYS ................................................................ 5-56 SWEEP ........................................................ 6-157
L THD, THD+N, SINAD........................ 6-195, 6-264
Level range switchover Measurements
Analog analyzer............................................ 6-220 Single measurement .................................... 6-285
Analog generator.......................................... 6-105 Starting......................................................... 6-285
Level unit Stopping ....................................................... 6-285
DFD................................................... 6-208, 6-266 Measuring
FFT............................................................... 6-257 Average value ................................... 6-233, 6-255
FREQ., DC, RMS ......................................... 6-235 DFD.............................................................. 6-268
MOD DIST......................................... 6-208, 6-266 FFT .............................................................. 6-251
PEAK............................................................ 6-241 FREQ ........................................................... 6-228
QUASI PEAK................................................ 6-241 FREQ., DC, RMS ......................................... 6-228
RMS SELECTIVE......................................... 6-241 MOD DIST.................................................... 6-275
SINAD ............................................... 6-208, 6-266 PEAK ........................................................... 6-237
SWEEP ............................................. 6-169, 6-188 PHASE ......................................................... 6-272
THD................................................... 6-208, 6-266 POLARITY ................................................... 6-267
THD+N .............................................. 6-208, 6-266 POST FFT.................................................... 6-265
LIN/LOG ................................................ 6-295, 6-299 PROTOCOL ................................................. 6-278
Line fuse ............................................................. 2-38 QUASI PEAK ............................................... 6-243
LOCK TO PLOT ............................................... 6-303 SAMPLE RATE ............................................ 6-281
LOW LEVEL AMPL........................................... 6-137 THD, THD+N, SINAD................................... 6-259
LOWER FREQ ................................................. 6-140 Measuring example ............................................ 4-47
Measuring frequency domain ........................... 6-251
M Measuring frequency range
MAIN FREQ...................................................... 6-147 POST FFT.................................................... 6-265
Main menu selection keys................................... 2-37 Measuring modulation distortion ....................... 6-275
MAX Measuring peak value....................................... 6-237
X axis ........................................................... 6-293 Measuring phase difference ............................. 6-272
Y axis ........................................................... 6-297 Measuring quasi peak value ............................. 6-243
Maximum (CURSOR) ....................................... 6-303 Measuring spectrum ......................................... 6-251
MEAS DELAY..6-163, 6-168, 6-181, 6-187, 6-201, 6- POST FFT.................................................... 6-265
207 Measuring total harmonic distortion .................. 6-259
MEAS MODE Menu
DFD.............................................................. 6-271 CALIB............................................................. 5-88
PEAK............................................................ 6-239 Calling and changing...................................... 5-61
PHASE ......................................................... 6-273 CONFIG ....................................... 5-76, 5-83, 5-88
THD, THD+N, SINAD........................ 6-193, 6-261 CURSORS ..................................................... 5-85
MEAS TIME DC OFFSET................................................... 5-72
FREQ., DC, RMS ......................................... 6-230 DFD....................................................... 5-71, 5-81
PROTOCOL ................................................. 6-280 FFT ................................................................ 5-80
FILE ............................................................... 5-87

E-1147.2759.00 9-352 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Index

FILTER........................................................... 5-83 Description ..................................................... 5-54

FREQ., DC, RMS ........................................... 5-78 Parameter entry ............................................. 5-65
FUNCTIONS ......................................... 5-69, 5-77
GRAPH MODE............................................... 5-84 O
INFO............................................................... 5-88 ON ...................................................................... 3-42
MOD DIST............................................. 5-71, 5-82 ON, switching on ................................................ 2-37
MONITOR ...................................................... 5-76 ON/OFF (Cursor)................................... 6-302, 6-310
MULTISINE .................................................... 5-70 Operating hours................................................ 6-339
NOISE ............................................................ 5-70 Operating mode
Overview ........................................................ 5-69 System settings............................................ 6-316
PEAK.............................................................. 5-78 Operation
PHASE ........................................................... 5-81 Manual ........................................................... 5-51
POLARITY TEST ........................................... 5-72 Overview ........................................................ 5-52
PRESET ......................................................... 5-87 Optical
PROTOCOL ................................................... 5-82 Input socket.................................................... 2-39
QUASI PEAK.................................................. 5-79 Output socket ................................................. 2-39
RMS SELECTIVE........................................... 5-79 Output
SAMPLE RATE .............................................. 5-82 Analog generator.......................................... 6-104
SERVICE ....................................................... 5-88 Digital (S/P DIF) ............................................. 2-39
SINE............................................................... 5-69 CH1 ................................................................ 2-37
SINE BURST.................................................. 5-71 CH2 ................................................................ 2-38
STATE............................................................ 5-87 Internal/External reference ........................... 7-345
SWEEP .......................................................... 5-73 Monitor (audio monitoring) ............................. 2-38
THD................................................................ 5-80 Optical (TOSLINK) ......................................... 2-39
X AXIS............................................................ 5-84 Output for external reference.............................. 2-38
Y AXIS............................................................ 5-84 OUTPUT ON/OFF ............................................ 6-104
Menu area .......................................................... 5-60 Outputs............................................................. 7-344
MIN OVERLOAD (Warning) ..................................... 8-347
X axis ........................................................... 6-293 Overtemperature error (system messages) ...... 8-346
Y axis ........................................................... 6-297 Overview (operation) .......................................... 5-52
Minus sign (Numerical keys)............................... 5-54 OVT (Warning) ................................................. 8-347
MOD DIST ........................... 5-71, 5-82, 6-138, 6-275 P
Frequency (LOWER FREQ) ......................... 6-140 Parameter display............................................. 6-288
Frequency (UPPER FREQ).......................... 6-140 Parameter entry
Level unit ........................................... 6-208, 6-266 Direct.............................................................. 5-63
Peak value.................................................... 6-143 Numerical entry .............................................. 5-65
Ratio............................................................. 6-142 Selection ........................................................ 5-64
MODE Toggling ......................................................... 5-63
Averaging .......................................... 6-233, 6-255 Parameters
SWEEP .................................. 6-156, 6-173, 6-192 Cursor .......................................................... 6-314
Model designation............................................. 6-339 PDF .................................................................. 6-120
Module Data ..................................................... 6-339 PEAK............................................ 5-78, 6-151, 6-237
MONITOR................................................ 5-76, 6-336 Level unit...................................................... 6-241
Activating/deactivating.................................. 6-210 Measurement method .................................. 6-239
Amplitude ..................................................... 6-211 PHASE .................................................... 5-81, 6-272
Source.......................................................... 6-211 MULTISINE .................................................. 6-125
Monitor, external ...................................... 2-38, 7-344 Signal search ............................................... 6-273
MULTISINE ............................................. 5-70, 6-122 PHASE DIFF .................................................... 6-116
Amplitude ..................................................... 6-125 Phase difference (SINE) ................................... 6-116
Frequency .................................................... 6-124 PLL unlock (warnings) ...................................... 8-347
Frequency resolution .................................... 6-126 POINTS ..... 6-161, 6-167, 6-179, 6-186, 6-199, 6-206
Number ........................................................ 6-123 POLARITY........................................................ 6-267
PHASE ......................................................... 6-125 Polarity test....................................................... 6-267
Reference value ........................................... 6-128 POLARITY TEST .................................... 5-72, 6-150
Multitone signal................................................. 6-122 Amplitude ..................................................... 6-151
N Polarization test signal...................................... 6-150
NO. OF BITS ......................................... 6-109, 6-223 POSITION ............................................. 6-305, 6-311
NO. OF SINE.................................................... 6-123 POST FFT ........................................................ 6-265
NOISE ..................................................... 5-70, 6-119 Activating...................................................... 6-266
Amplitude ..................................................... 6-120 Size .............................................................. 6-265
Distribution function...................................... 6-120 Window ........................................................ 6-265
Noise signal ...................................................... 6-119 Power-on cycles ............................................... 6-339
Number (MULTISINE) ...................................... 6-123 Preset ............................................................... 6-317
Numerical keys ................................................... 2-37 PRESET ....................................... 5-87, 6-317, 6-318

Operating Manual, 11/2007 9-353 E-1147.2759.00

Index R&S UP300/350

PRINT.................................................... 6-325, 6-327 Scaling (SWEEP) 6-161, 6-166, 6-179, 6-185, 6-198,
Printing out (Screenshot) .................................. 6-325 6-205
PROTOCOL ....................................................... 5-82 Screen ................................................................ 2-37
Interface (generator)..................................... 6-109 Display area ................................................... 5-58
Measurement time........................................ 6-280 Layout ............................................................ 5-57
Protocol analysis .......................................... 6-278 Menu area ...................................................... 5-60
Putting into operation.......................................... 3-40 SCREEN........................................................... 6-334
Screen saver mode .......................................... 6-334
Q Screenshot (printing out) .................................. 6-325
QUASI PEAK........................................... 5-79, 6-243 Search mode (THD, THD+N, SINAD)............... 6-262
Level unit ...................................................... 6-241 Selecting
R Filters ........................................................... 6-283
RANGE MODE Measurement parameters (analyzer) ........... 6-226
Analyzer ....................................................... 6-220 Signal parameters (generator) ..................... 6-112
Generator ..................................................... 6-105 Selecting measurement channel
Rear view Analyzer ....................................................... 6-221
R&S UP300/350 ............................................. 2-38 Generator ..................................................... 6-115
R&S UP350 .................................................... 2-39 Selecting source (signal)
RECALL............................................................ 6-323 Analyzer ....................................................... 6-218
Reducing Audio monitoring output ............................... 6-211
X axis ........................................................... 6-307 Selection keys .................................................... 5-54
Y axis ........................................................... 6-312 Selection keys .................................................... 2-37
REF .................................................................. 6-331 SELFTEST ....................................................... 6-337
REF. VALUE..................................................... 6-128 Selftests............................................................ 6-337
Reference SERVICE................................................. 5-88, 6-337
External ........................................................ 7-345 Service functions .............................................. 6-337
Internal ................................................ 2-38, 7-345 Setting
Reference potential Entering numerical parameters ...................... 5-65
Analyzer ....................................................... 6-217 Selecting settings ........................................... 5-64
Generator ..................................................... 6-103 Selection of instrument functions ................... 5-63
Reference source Toggling ......................................................... 5-63
External ........................................................ 6-331 Setting example.................................................. 4-47
Internal ......................................................... 6-331 Setting lever........................................................ 3-40
Reference value (MULTISINE) ......................... 6-128 Setting up the Instrument.................................... 3-40
REL AMPL........................................................ 6-125 Signal
Remote control (start) ....................................... 6-319 Activating/deactivating the analyzer ............. 6-218
Result display ................................................... 6-286 DC OFFSET................................................. 6-152
RMS.................................................................. 6-228 DFD.............................................................. 6-144
Measurement time........................................ 6-230 Display ......................................................... 6-286
RMS SELECTIVE ............................................... 5-79 Generator, activation/deactivation of ............ 6-104
Frequency .................................................... 6-247 MOD DIST.................................................... 6-138
Level unit ...................................................... 6-241 MULTISINE .................................................. 6-122
Measurement bandwidth ................... 6-174, 6-248 NOISE .......................................................... 6-119
RMS UNIT ........................................................ 6-235 POLARITY TEST ......................................... 6-150
RMS value SINE............................................................. 6-114
Measuring..................................................... 6-228 SINE BURST................................................ 6-132
Rotary knob ........................................................ 2-37 Sweeping sinewave........................... 6-154, 6-171
Description ..................................................... 5-55 Signal coupling (analyzer) ................................ 6-219
Parameter entry.............................................. 5-67 Signal search (PHASE) .................................... 6-273
Signal source
S Selecting ...................................................... 6-211
Safety Instructions .............................................. 1-21 Selecting (analyzer)...................................... 6-218
SAMPLE FREQ ................................................ 6-107 Signal types ...................................................... 6-110
Sample frequency SINAD .............................................................. 6-259
Digital analyzer............................................. 6-222 Level unit........................................... 6-208, 6-266
Digital generator ........................................... 6-107 Measurement mode .......................... 6-193, 6-261
Measuring..................................................... 6-281 Measurement time ............................ 6-195, 6-264
SAMPLE RATE ....................................... 5-82, 6-281 Search mode................................................ 6-262
Measurement time........................................ 6-280 SINE ........................................................ 5-69, 6-114
SAVE ................................................................ 6-323 Amplitude ..................................................... 6-117
Saving (measurement results) .......................... 6-327 Frequency .................................................... 6-115
Scaling Frequency couplings .................................... 6-116
X axis ........................................................... 6-292 Phase difference .......................................... 6-116
Y axis ........................................................... 6-296 SINE BURST ........................................... 5-71, 6-132
Frequency .................................................... 6-133

E-1147.2759.00 9-354 Operating Manual, 11/2007

R&S UP300/350 Index

HIGH LEVEL AMPL ..................................... 6-136 MOD DIST.................................................... 6-143

HIGH LEVEL TIME....................................... 6-134 Trace analysis .................................................. 6-300
INTERVAL TIME .......................................... 6-135 Transmission format (analyzer) ........................ 6-223
LOW LEVEL AMPL ...................................... 6-137 Two-tone signal ................................................ 6-138
Sine burst signal ............................................... 6-132
Sinewave signal................................................ 6-114 U
SINGLE ................................................... 5-52, 6-285 UNIT
Single measurement......................................... 6-285 DFD................................................... 6-208, 6-266
SOURCE .......................................................... 6-211 FFT .............................................................. 6-257
SPACING FREQ., DC, RMS ......................................... 6-235
Frequency (SWEEP) .. 6-161, 6-166, 6-179, 6-185, MOD DIST......................................... 6-208, 6-266
6-198, 6-205 PEAK ........................................................... 6-241
MULTISINE .................................................. 6-126 QUASI PEAK ............................................... 6-241
STANDBY........................................................... 3-42 RMS SELECTIVE ........................................ 6-241
STANDBY, switching off ..................................... 2-37 SINAD ............................................... 6-208, 6-266
START..................................................... 5-52, 6-285 SWEEP ............................................. 6-169, 6-188
Amplitude (SWEEP) ............... 6-165, 6-183, 6-203 THD................................................... 6-208, 6-266
Frequency (SWEEP) .............. 6-159, 6-177, 6-197 THD+N .............................................. 6-208, 6-266
STATE .......................................... 5-87, 6-210, 6-320 Unit (level)
STATISTICS..................................................... 6-339 DFD................................................... 6-208, 6-266
STEP SIZE 6-161, 6-167, 6-179, 6-186, 6-199, 6-206 FFT .............................................................. 6-257
Stock number.................................................... 6-339 FREQ., DC, RMS ......................................... 6-235
STOP....................................................... 5-52, 6-285 MOD DIST......................................... 6-208, 6-266
Amplitude (SWEEP) ............... 6-165, 6-183, 6-203 PEAK ........................................................... 6-241
Frequency (SWEEP) .............. 6-159, 6-177, 6-197 QUASI PEAK ............................................... 6-241
SWEEP......................................... 5-73, 6-154, 6-171 RMS SELECTIVE ........................................ 6-241
Level unit ........................................... 6-169, 6-188 SINAD ............................................... 6-208, 6-266
Swept sinewave signal........................... 6-154, 6-171 SWEEP ............................................. 6-169, 6-188
Switching On THD................................................... 6-208, 6-266
Unit................................................................. 3-42 THD+N .............................................. 6-208, 6-266
SYS ................................................ 5-52, 5-87, 6-316 Unpacking (Unit)................................................. 3-40
key.................................................................. 2-37 UPPER FREQ
Key ................................................................. 5-56 DFD.............................................................. 6-145
System functions .......................................... 6-316 MOD DIST.................................................... 6-140
System USB device, external .......................................... 2-38
Default settings............................................... 6-97 USB host, external.............................................. 2-38
Overview ........................................................ 5-87 USB interface ................................................... 7-345
Settings ........................................................ 6-316 USB stick ............................................................ 3-46
System information ........................................... 6-338 USB, interfaces................................................. 6-332
System messages ................................. 6-340, 8-346 Useful data (analyzer)....................................... 6-223
Device error.................................................. 8-346 V
Overtemperature error.................................. 8-346 VALIDITY-BIT (digital generator)...................... 6-108
SYSTEM MESSAGES...................................... 6-340 VOLUME .......................................................... 6-211
System settings ................................................ 6-328
W
T Warnings .......................................................... 8-347
THD .................................................................... 5-80 OVL A .......................................................... 8-347
Level unit ........................................... 6-208, 6-266 OVL G .......................................................... 8-347
Measurement mode .......................... 6-193, 6-261 OVT.............................................................. 8-347
Measurement time............................. 6-195, 6-264 PLL unlock ................................................... 8-347
Search mode ................................................ 6-262 Warranty ............................................................. 1-36
THD, THD+N, SINAD ....................................... 6-259 Wordwidth (digital generator)............................ 6-109
THD+N ............................................................. 6-259
Level unit ........................................... 6-208, 6-266 X
Measurement mode .......................... 6-193, 6-261 X axis................................................................ 6-292
Measurement time............................. 6-195, 6-264 X AXIS ..................................................... 5-84, 6-307
Search mode ................................................ 6-262
Time.................................................................. 6-329 Y
High-level (SINE BURST)............................. 6-134 Y axis................................................................ 6-296
Interval (SINE BURST)................................. 6-135 Y AXIS..................................................... 5-84, 6-312
Total RMS
Z
DFD.............................................................. 6-149
ZOOM
MOD DIST.................................................... 6-143
X axis ........................................................... 6-307
TOTAL RMS
Y axis ........................................................... 6-312
DFD.............................................................. 6-149

Operating Manual, 11/2007 9-355 E-1147.2759.00